best outdoor pillows

Best Outdoor Pillows for All Weather

If you’re looking for the best outdoor pillows, you’re most likely looking for pillows to withstand weather elements.  And, these weather elements may include rain, sleet and snow.  These weather elements may also include the sun and the damage the rays can cause.  In terms of pillows, the sun’s rays can fade the material which, in turn, can make the pillows look less than desirable.

Therefore, we found six of the best outdoor pillows that can take a beating.  So, our final picks are all water-resistant, fade-resistant, mold and mildew-resistant and UV protected.  And, these safeguards will ensure a long life for your outdoor pillows.

Furthermore, when choosing the best outdoor pillows, we were all about style.  Outdoor pillows should add a sense of calm to your outdoor living space.  And, whether you are someone who finds calm in bright patterns or colors, or you are someone who finds calm in zen-like patterns and colors, we found an array of pillows to suit just about every taste.

best outdoor pillows

Now, our final picks for best outdoor pillows will add comfort to make the most of your relaxing down time.  And, a lot of times, and especially with pillows that are designed to withstand not-so-friendly weather elements, outdoor pillows can be overly stiff.  So, we found an array of pillows that are firm, yet, comfortable.

Additionally, we have one pick on our list, the Greendale Home Fashions Outdoor Accent Pillows, which are on the firmer side.  Therefore, if you are someone that finds comfort in firmness, this may be a pick to consider.

And, in determining our final picks for best outdoor pillows, consumer response was extremely important to us.  And, this response was able to inform us of the quality, durability and longevity of each particular outdoor pillow.  So, ultimately, after scouring through hundreds of reviews, our final 6 outdoor pillows checked off nearly every feature we requested, with a ton of positive reviews to back us up.

Lastly, if you’re looking for outdoor cushions, as well as, outdoor pillows, you may want to check out our list for best outdoor cushions.

 

Best Outdoor Pillows

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Sunjoy S-PL065PFB Outdoor Pillow
Sunjoy
S-PL065PFB Outdoor Pillow
Olefin Fabric
Poly Fiber Filling
UV Protected
Fade Resistant
Water Resistant
Color Options
20.5" x 19" x 4"
GDF Studio 300765 Corona Outdoor Patio Water Resistant Pillow Set
GDF Studio
300765 Corona Outdoor Patio Water Resistant Pillow Set
Fabric
Polyester Fiber Fill
Water Resistant
Color Options
18" x 18" x 6"
18" x 11.5" x 6"
Pillow Perfect Outdoor/Indoor Remi Lagoon Rectangular Throw Pillow
Pillow Perfect
Outdoor/Indoor Remi Lagoon Rectangular Throw Pillow
Polyester
Polyester Fiber Fill
Weather Resistant
Fade Resistant
Color Options
18.5" x 11.5" x 5"
Greendale Home Fashions Outdoor Accent Pillows
Greendale Home Fashions
Outdoor Accent Pillows
Polyester
Poly Fiber Filling
UV Protected
Stain Resistant
Water Resistant
Design Options
17" x 17"
Pillow Perfect Outdoor/Indoor Rectangular Throw Pillow
Pillow Perfect
Outdoor/Indoor Rectangular Throw Pillow
Polyester
Polyester Fiber Fill
Weather Resistant
Fade Resistant
18.5" x 11.5" x 5"
Pillow Perfect Outdoor Veranda Turquoise Throw Pillow
Pillow Perfect
Outdoor Veranda Turquoise Throw Pillow
Polyester
Polyester Fiber Fill
Weather Resistant
Fade Resistant
18.5" x 18.5" x 5"

 

Best Outdoor Pillows

Sunjoy S-PL065PFB Outdoor Pillow

Sunjoy S-PL065PFB Outdoor Pillows

Our first pick for best outdoor pillows is an extra-large option which will fit most deep-seated chairs.  The Sunjoy S-PL065PFB Outdoor Pillows measures 20.5 inches long, 19 inches wide and 4 inches deep.  And, these pillows come in a pack of 2.

These outdoor pillows are covered with olefin fabric.  According to Home Quicks, Olefin fabric is lightweight, yet, durable.  Additionally, olefin fabric features a moderate shine and suave texture.  And, because olefin fabric dries quickly, it makes for the perfect fabric for outdoor living.

In addition to being outfitted with olefin fabric, these pillows have a cord trimmed.  This cord trim allows for a finished and elegant look.

The Sunjoy S-PL065PFB Outdoor Pillows are filled with 100% polyester fiber filling.  And, according to eHow, polyester fiber filling is non-allergenic and resistant to mildew.

These outdoor pillows are easy to clean and it is recommended you spot clean using a mild soap and water.

Lastly, the Sunjoy S-PL065PFB Outdoor Pillows come in your choice of colors.  Choose between Blue, Tan or Paprika.

Pros:

These outdoor pillows offer a generous size and are perfect for deep-set furniture.

Furthermore, olefin fabric is the perfect fabric for outdoor pillows as it is extremely sturdy, yet, comfortable at the same time.

Lastly, consumers love how plump and firm these pillows are.

Cons:

We wish there were more color options.

 

GDF Studio 300765 Corona Outdoor Patio Water Resistant Pillow Set

GDF Studio 300765 Corona Outdoor Patio Water Resistant Pillow Set

This pillow set is perfect for those looking to outfit an outdoor couch or loveseat.  The GDF Studio 300765 Corona Outdoor Patio Pillow Set comes with 2 square pillows and 2 rectangular pillows.  And, these rectangular pillows are great for added lumbar support.

The square pillows each measure 18 inches long, 18 inches wide and 6 inches deep .  And, the rectangular pillows each measure 18 inches long, 11.5 inches tall and 6 inches deep.

The GDF Studio 300765 Corona Outdoor Patio Pillow Set is constructed with polyester fabric.  Polyester fabric is an ultra durable fabric that will last a long time.  Additionally, polyester is easy to clean and maintain.

This outdoor pillow set is filled with polyester fiber.  And, polyester fiber is known to be non-allergenic and mildew-resistant.  Furthermore, these pillows are overstuffed for maximum comfort.

The GDF Studio 30075 Corona Outdoor Patio Pillow Set is water-resistant.  And, according to Triple Fat Goose, water-resistant means these pillows will resist contact by light water.  However, it is not designed to withstand heavy exposure.  Therefore, we do recommend bringing all water-resistant pillows in when there is a chance of heavy rain.

Lastly, this pillow set comes in your choice of colors.  Choose between Green or Orange.

Pros:

This is a well-made set of pillows.  In addition, because they are made of polyester fabric, they are easy to clean and will last a long time.

And, we love the rectangular pillows which will help to support the lumbar.

Cons:

While this pillow set gets tremendous reviews from consumers, there has been a report of the pillows obtaining mildew.  Now, we can’t say for sure what the cause of this is.  However, like we stated above, these pillows are resistant to light rain.  Therefore, be sure you don’t leave them out in weather elements, such as heavy rain, which will promote mildew.

 

Pillow Perfect Outdoor/Indoor Remi Lagoon Rectangular Throw Pillow

Pillow Perfect Outdoor/Indoor Remi Lagoon Rectangular Throw Pillows

These are the perfect pillows to add some color and some much-need lumbar support.  The Pillow Perfect Outdoor/Indoor Remi Lagoon Rectangular Throw Pillows are handcrafted, therefore, there may be slight size variance.  However, the approximate size of each pillow is 18.5 inches long, 11.5 inches wide and 5 inches deep.

These outdoor throw pillows are made with 100% polyester fabric.  And, like we mentioned above, polyester is a great fabric for outdoor pillows as it is durable and easy to clean.

The Pillow Perfect Outdoor/Indoor Remi Lagoon Rectangular Throw Pillows feature a cord trimming with matching fabric.  This cord trimming brings a sense of elegance to the pillows and a completed look.

Furthermore, these outdoor pillows are filled with 100% polyester fiber filling which is mold and mildew resistant, as well as, non-allergenic.

The Pillow Perfect Outdoor/Indoor Remi Lagoon Rectangular Throw Pillows are weather-resistant and fade resistant.  And, we recommend not leaving these pillows out in heavy rain, however, from time to time, a light sprinkling shouldn’t be a problem.

Finally, with this pick you get your choice of colors.  Choose between Blue or Brown.  And, It is recommended to spot clean these pillows.  Simply wipe with a damp cloth and mild detergent, then let air dry.

Pros:

Whether you go with the Blue or Brown pillows, the colors are fabulous and bring a touch of the tropics to your backyard.

Furthermore, these pillows are well-made and overstuffed for ultimate comfortability.

And, the lumbar support is a huge bonus for us.

Cons:

We wish they had the square pillows to match.  However, they have plenty of square pillows in solid colors and patterns where you can mix-and-match.  You can find those pillows here.

 

Greendale Home Fashions Outdoor Accent Pillows

Greendale Home Fashions Outdoor Accent Pillows

If you are all about a zen-like atmosphere, these outdoor accent pillows offer the perfect, relaxing pattern and color.  And, it also comes in your choice of 2 other zen-like colors and patterns, Azule and Seaside.

The Greendale Home Fashions Outdoor Accent Pillows each measure 17 inches long by 17 inches wide.  Furthermore, these pillows are overstuffed at 4 inches thick.

These outdoor throw pillows are stuffed with 100% recycled, post consumer plastic bottles.  This material has a bounce-back type of personality which will keep the pillows looking brand new and inviting for a very long time.  However, and perhaps our favorite aspect, is this stuffing is eco-friendly and helps us to keep the oceans free of plastic.

The Greendale Home Fashions Outdoor Accent Pillows are covered with 100% UV resistant polyester.  And, this polyester is durable and easy to clean.

Furthermore, these outdoor pillows are water-resistant and stain-resistant.  Although, we wouldn’t recommend leaving them out in a downpour.

Lastly, in order to care for these pillows, it is recommended you spot clean with a mild soap and damp cloth.  However, we hear through the grapevine that stuffing consisting of post consumer plastic bottles is machine washable.

Pros:

The Greendale Home Fashions Outdoor Accent Pillows are extremely well-made.  And, the post consumer plastic bottle stuffing is a great choice for the outdoors, as well as, the environment.

Furthermore, these outdoor pillows are firm and will hold their shape for years.

Cons:

Because these outdoor pillows are firm, they may be too firm for some.  Some consumers love to sink in after a long week of work.  And, if you love to sink in to your comfort, these may not be the pillows for you.

 

Pillow Perfect Outdoor Veranda Turquoise Throw Pillow

Pillow Perfect Outdoor Veranda Turquoise Throw Pillow

Our final pick for best outdoor pillows is an extra-large pick and able to outfit deep-set furniture.  The Pillow Perfect Outdoor Veranda Turquoise Throw Pillows each measure 18.5 inches long, 18.5 inches wide and 5 inches deep.

These outdoor pillows are made of 100% polyester which is ultra durable and easy to clean.  To clean these pillows, it is recommended you spot clean with a mild soap and damp cloth.

The Pillow Perfect Outdoor Veranda Turquoise Throw Pillows are filled with 100% polyester fiber filling.  This polyester fiber filling is mold resistant and non-allergenic.

These outdoor pillows are cord trimmed in matching fabric.  This helps to complete the look, as well as, add some elegance.

The Pillow Perfect Outdoor Veranda Turquoise Throw Pillows are weather-resistant and UV-resistant.  Weather-resistant pillows can handle the occasional light rain should you accidentally leave them out during less than desirable weather conditions.  However, we do recommend that you don’t leave these out during heavy rain.  Not even accidentally.

Lastly, if you love these pillows but the color isn’t quite right for you, this company offers many different colors and patterns to choose from.  And, you can browse through those here.

Pros:

The Pillow Perfect Outdoor Veranda Turquoise Throw Pillows are a great pick for someone looking to sink into comfort.  Therefore, these pillows are soft and relaxing.

Furthermore, these pillows are made with ultimate quality, right down to the cord trim.

Cons:

This pick for best outdoor pillows is on the soft side.  So, if you’re looking for more firm support, you may want to try the Greendale Home Fashions Outdoor Accent Pillows above.

best outdoor cushions

8 Best Outdoor Cushions

Searching for the best outdoor cushions is not a one-size-fits-all scenario.  Therefore, we took that into account and found an array of outdoor cushions that vary in size, and in some cases, shape.

Additionally, when it comes to outdoor cushions, some consumers are looking for cushions to fit a loveseat or an outdoor couch.  And, while we didn’t include a full loveseat or couch cushion on our list, the smaller cushions can be paired up to accommodate a loveseat or an outdoor couch.  For instance, you may need purchase 2 cushions to accommodate a loveseat, while a couch generally requires 3 or 4.

And, it is wise to first measure your outdoor furniture before you choose the best outdoor cushions for you.  Furthermore, you should not only measure the length and width, but, make sure you get the depth measurement as well.  There is some furniture that has more depth than others and you will want to choose couch cushions accordingly.

best outdoor cushions

Our next step in finding the best outdoor cushions was finding cushions that are covered with quality material.  And, in addition to quality material, weatherproof material is a must.  We insisted on materials that are water-resistant, UV resistant, mold and mildew resistant, and easy to clean.  It is the outdoors, after all.

Furthermore, when finding the best couch cushions, we wanted comfort.  And, comfort we got.  Therefore, we set our sites on the couch cushions that are over-stuffed.  This is because an overstuffed cushion will last longer and settle better over time.  And, overstuffed cushions aid in the ultimate comfort.

However, if you’re looking for additional comfort in the outdoor arena, adding pillows can provide the comfort and desired coziness many seek.  Therefore, we reviewed the best outdoor pillows which you can check out here.

Finally, we spent a lot of time scouring through reviews.  It was important for us to pick cushions that have satisfied consumers, not only for the short-term, but for the long-term as well.  Therefore, we made sure these cushions are built to last.

 

Best Outdoor Cushions

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Greendale Home Fashions Outdoor Sunbrella Deep Seat Chair Cushion Set
Greendale Home Fashions
Outdoor Sunbrella Deep Seat Chair Cushion Set
Acrylic
100% Recycled Fill
Poly Wrapped Foam
UV Protected
Fade Resistant
Stain Resistant
Water Resistant
Mold Resistant
Color Options
45" x 25" x 5"
Quality Outdoor Living All Weather Deep Seating Patio Chair Set
Quality Outdoor Living
All Weather Deep Seating Patio Chair Set
Polyester
Polyurethane Foam Pad
Fiver Filled
UV Protected
Fade Resistant
Water Resistant
Weather Resistant
Color Options
22" x 25" x 5"
Greendale Home Fashions Deep Seat Cushion Set
Greendale Home Fashions
Deep Seat Cushion Set
Polyester
100% Recycled Fill
Poly Wrapped Foam
UV Protected
Fade Resistant
Stain Resistant
Water Resistant
Color/Design Options
45" x 25" x 5"
SewKer Indoor/Outdoor Patio Deep Seat Cushion Set
SewKer
Indoor/Outdoor Patio Deep Seat Cushion Set
Polyester
Polyester Fiber Fill
UV Protected
Water Resistant
Stain Resistant
Color/Design Options
46" x 24" x 6.2"
Qilloway Outdoor/Indoor Deep Seat Chair Cushions Set
Qilloway
Outdoor/Indoor Deep Seat Chair Cushions Set
Polyester
Poly Fiber Filling
Foam
UV Protected
Water Resistant
Color Options
24" x 24" x 5"
Bossima Indoor/Outdoor Deep Seat Chair Cushion Set
Bossima
Indoor/Outdoor Deep Seat Chair Cushion Set
Polyester
Poly Fiber Filling
Foam
Water Resistant
Color Options
25" x 23.7" x 11"
Eddie Bauer Chair Pad
Eddie Bauer
Chair Pad
Polyester
Polyurethane Foam
UV Protected
Water Repellent Covering
Color/Design Options
17" x 17"
Pillow Perfect Indoor/Outdoor Wicker Seat Cushion
Pillow Perfect
Indoor/Outdoor Wicker Seat Cushion
Polyester
Polyester Fiber Fill
Weather Resistant
Fade Resistant
Color/Design Options
19" x 19" x 5"

 

Best Outdoor Cushions

Greendale Home Fashions Outdoor Sunbrella Deep Seat Chair Cushion Set

Greendale Home Fashions Outdoor Sunbrella Deep Seat Chair Cushion Set

This first pick for best outdoor cushions is covered with some pretty spectacular fabric.  Not only is this 100% acrylic fabric stain-resistant, fade-resistant, water-resistant, mold-resistant and UV protected, it is dyed before woven so it will keep its color for years to come.

The Greendale Home Fashions Outdoor Sunbrella Deep Seat Chair Cushion Set is overstuffed for comfortability.  The seat backs are filled with 100% recycled plastic bottles while the seat cushions are filled with poly wrapped foam.

These outdoor cushions feature trim cording for a touch of elegance.  In addition, these cushions have ties where you can secure them in place while in use.  Furthermore, the seat cushions have a zipper which allows you to remove the cover for cleaning.

The Greendale Home Fashions Outdoor Sunbrella Deep Seat Cushions are 24 inches long, 24 inches wide and 5 inches tall.  And, the seat backs are slightly smaller.

Lastly, these outdoor cushions come in your choice of colors.  Choose between Wheat, Forest, Navy or Jockey Red.

Pros:

The fabric of these outdoor cushions are absolute quality.  And, with this purchase, you are looking at fabric that will last you for years to come.

In addition, the cushions are thick and padded for the ultimate in outdoor comfort.

Cons:

The color options are lacking with these cushions.  And, although the colors they do offer will work for some, others may find these colors to be a bit bold.

Furthermore, the colors represented in the photos don’t quite match up to what arrives.  So, be aware of color distortion in the photos.

 

Quality Outdoor Living All Weather Deep Seating Patio Chair Set

Quality Outdoor Living All Weather Deep Seating Patio Chair Set

We are in love with this particular color in the picture above, however, if it’s not for your backyard, these cushions come in a multitude of colors which you can view here.  Additionally, this company offers t-back chair cushions as well.  And, if you’re looking to outfit a loveseat or an outdoor couch, you can pair a couple of these cushions up to accommodate this scenario.

The Quality Outdoor Living All Weather Deep Seating Patio Chair Set comes in a pack of 2.  The seat cushions measure 22 inches wide, 25 inches deep and 5.5 inches thick.  The seat back cushion measures 23 inches wide, 20 inches tall and 5.5 inches thick.

These outdoor cushions come with weather-resistant, water-resistant, fade-resistant and UV-resistant polyester covers.  And, each cover is filled with a 5.5 inch polyurethane foam pad.  Therefore, with a 5.5 inch polyurethane foam pad, these cushions are overstuffed for longevity and comfortability.

The Quality Outdoor Living All Weather Deep Seating Patio Chair Set is easy to clean.  Simply spot clean with a damp cloth and mild soap.

Pros:

The polyester fabric used is particularly heavy and durable.  Furthermore, this fabric offers a great, denim-like texture.

Cons:

There are a couple of consumers who state that the dimensions are off by approximately an inch.  However, it is important to note that the majority of consumers didn’t have this particular issue.

 

Greendale Home Fashions Deep Seat Cushion Set

Greendale Home Fashions Deep Seat Cushion Set

If you’re looking to spice things up with a pattern, these cushions come in your choice of patterns.  Additionally, these cushions come in solid colors as well.

The Greendale Home Fashions Deep Seat Cushion Set is covered with 100% polyester fabric.  This fabric is UV-resistant, stain-resistant, water-resistant and fade-resistant.  And, this polyester cover houses a seat cushion which consists of poly wrapped foam, while the seat back is filled with 100% recycled plastic bottles.  Furthermore, these cushions are overstuffed for maximum comfortability and durability.

The seat cushion features a zipper to easily remove the cover for cleaning.  In addition, the seat cushion comes with ties to help secure the cushion in place, while both the seat cushion and the seat back are finished with cord trim.

Lastly, the seat cushion measures 25 inches wide, 25 inches deep and 5 inches tall.  The seat back measures 28 inches wide, 22 inches tall and 5 inches thick.

Pros:

These outdoor cushions come in a wide array of colors and patterns.

Additionally, if you’re looking for some deep cushions, these are the deepest on our list.

Cons:

Some consumers state these cushions leave a seat impression after sitting on them.

Furthermore, there have been reports of water marks after being left out in the rain.

 

SewKer Indoor/Outdoor Patio Deep Seat Cushion Set

SewKer Indoor/Outdoor Patio Deep Seat Cushion Set

This pick for best outdoor cushions is handmade and the attention to detail spans to the very last thread.

The SewKer Indoor/Outdoor Patio Deep Seat Cushion Set is filled with 100% polyester fiber.  This polyester fiber is strong, durable and allows for plenty of air flow to keep it fresh.

This outdoor cushion set is covered with 100% polyester fabric.  This fabric is water-resistant, stain resistant and UV protected.  And, if you’re looking for a different color of fabric, this cushion set comes in your choice of colors and designs.  Choose between Dark Blue, Green, Grey, Creamy White, Red Medallion and Bravada Salsa.

The SewKer Indoor/Outdoor Patio Deep Seat Cushion Set features a zipper on both the seat back and the seat cushion.  This makes it convenient to remove the covers for easy cleaning.

Lastly, the seat back measures 22 inches long, 24 inches wide and 7 inches deep.  The seat cushion measures 24 inches long, 24 inches wide and 6.25 inches deep.

Pros:

This outdoor cushion set comes with thick and durable fabric.

Additionally, these seat cushions are overstuffed for maximum comfort.

Lastly, these hold up well in the sun without fading.

Cons:

Some consumers found the cushions were a bit smaller than the measurements shown.  However, it is important to note that the vast majority of consumers have no complaints and are extremely happy.

Furthermore, a few consumers found the colors didn’t match the photos.

 

Qilloway Outdoor/Indoor Deep Seat Chair Cushions Set

Qilloway Outdoor/Indoor Deep Seat Chair Cushions Set

What sets this outdoor cushion apart is the white cord trim.  And, it is available in the Navy Blue with white trim or Red with white trim.  The other options, Coffee, Green, and Dark Khaki, are all solid colors with matching trim.

The Qilloway Outdoor/Indoor Deep Seat Chair Cushions Set is covered with 100% polyester fabric.  This polyester fabric is UV-resistant and water-repellent.

Furthermore, the seat cushions are overstuffed with poly fiber wrapped foam.  And, at 5 inches thick, this foam is dense for longevity, not to mention comfortability.  In addition, the seat backs are filled with 100% polyester fiberfill.

The Qilloway Outdoor/Indoor Deep Seat Chair Cushions Set is handcrafted and easy to clean.  Simply hand wash with a damp towel and mild soap.  And, the seat cushion features a zipper which will allow you to remove the cover for machine washing.

Finally, the seat cushion measures 24 inches long, 24 inches wide and 5 inches tall.  The seat back measures 24 inches long and 22 inches wide.

Pros:

The Qilloway Outdoor/Indoor Deep Seat Chair Cushions Set is well constructed and it shows.

Furthermore, these work great for deep seating outdoor furniture.

Cons:

While most consumers state these cushions are very comfortable, a couple of consumers found them to flatten out rather quickly.

 

Bossima Indoor/Outdoor Deep Seat Chair Cushion Set

Bossima Indoor/Outdoor Deep Seat Chair Cushion Set

This pick for best outdoor cushions offers an array of gorgeous colors and designs.  And, while the colors for some outdoor cushions can come across as cheesy, these colors are anything but.

The Bossima Indoor/Outdoor Deep Seat Chair Cushion Set is covered with 100% polyester fabric.  This fabric is water-repellent and ultra durable.

Furthermore, the seat cushion and the seat back are made with 100% polyester fiber fill.  This fiber fill is thick and dense, which will allow for comfort and longevity.  And, the seat back features a zipper which will allow you to remove the cover for easy cleaning.

Alternatively, it is recommended you spot clean the Bossima Indoor/Outdoor Deep Seat Chair Cushion Set with mild soap and cold water.

Lastly, the seat cushion measures 24 inches long, 24 inches wide and a whopping 6.25 inches tall.  The back rest measures 22 inches long, 24 inches wide and 7 inches tall.

Pros:

Like we stated previously, the colors and patterns offered are absolutely gorgeous.

Furthermore, at 6.25 inches thick, this seat cushion is the most dense cushion on our list.  How’s that for longevity and comfort?

Cons:

This is one pick on our list where the fabric isn’t fade resistant.  Therefore, these would work for someone using a patio that gets little to no sun.

Eddie Bauer Chair Pad

Eddie Bauer Chair Pad

Eddie Bauer is known for quality, therefore, these cushions deserve a spot on our list.  In addition, this outdoor chair pad is made with Sunbrella fabric.  Sunbrella is the leader in durable and quality fabrics.  Furthermore, Sunbrella creates their fabrics to withstand environmental factors.

The Eddie Bauer Chair Pad is covered in polyester and filled with polyurethane foam.  Additionally, the cover is stitched with extra stitching for durability and the interior edges are serged for stronger support.

This chair pad features a UV additive for UV-resistant support.  And, the fill is sealed with a water-repellent for additional water-resistant support.

Lastly, the Eddie Bauer Chair Pad comes in your choice of sizes:  17 inches by 17 inches, 19 inches by 18 inches, 21 inches by 19 inches or 23.5 inches by 19 inches.

Pros:

Consumers rave about Sunbrella fabric.  Therefore, because Eddie Bauer teamed up with Sunbrella, these chair pads are a double threat of quality.

Cons:

This chair pad is only 2.5 inches thick.  For comparison, most of the chair pads on our list average about 5 inches thick.

Pillow Perfect Indoor/Outdoor Wicker Seat Cushion

Pillow Perfect Indoor/Outdoor Wicker Seat Cushion

Our final pick for best outdoor cushions are designed for outdoor wicker furniture.  And, they come in a wide array of colors and designs to choose from.

The Pillow Perfect Indoor/Outdoor Wicker Seat Cushion comes in a set of 2.  These cushions are made with polyester fabric which is resistant to sunlight and stains.  And, speaking of stains, these seat cushions are fairly easy to care for.  Just spot clean with a mild soap and cold water.

These seat cushions are filled with 100% polyester fiber.  And, this filling is 5 inches tall, making these cushions ultra durable and ultra comfortable.

The Pillow Perfect Indoor/Outdoor Wicker Seat Cushion measures 19 inches long, 19 inches wide and 5 inches tall.

Pros:

This pick for best outdoor cushions is very well made.

Furthermore, consumers rave about how comfortable these cushions are.

Cons:

If you’re looking for a back cushion, this pick is seat cushion only.

A few consumers found these seat cushions to be rather lumpy.  However, it is important to note that most consumers are very happy with their purchase.

Best Guillotine Paper Cutters

Best Guillotine Paper Cutters and Trimmers

When reviewing the best guillotine paper cutters and trimmers for you, it is best to first assess your particular needs.  Will you be cutting in bulk or using it to create a collage masterpiece?  Will you need very specific measurments?  And, will a small child be using this paper cutter?

These are just some of the questions to ask yourself before you make your final decision on which of the best guillotine paper cutters are going to work for you.

So, lets tackle these one at a time.  If you need a guillotine paper cutter for bulk products such as flyers, you may want to look at the guillotine cutter that will slice through up to 400 sheets of paper at a time.  If you’re using a guillotine paper cutter for scrapbooking, you may want to go with a guillotine paper cutter that can slice through 12 or 20 sheets at a time.

Best Guillotine Paper Cutters

And, speaking of tasks such as scrapbooking, or even flyers, these are the type of tasks that can require exact measurements.  So, some of our picks have more detailed measurements displayed on the platform.  Therefore, depending on your needs, you may want to go with a guillotine paper cutter that can trim your paper to the exact specifications you need.

The next thing to be wary of is safety measures.  And, this is especially crucial if a young child will be using the paper cutter.  While all of our picks have some kind of safety implementations, some of our picks have more than others.  Therefore, we can’t stress enough that if your paper cutter will be around young children, take all precautions necessary.

Finally, our final picks for best guillotine paper cutters and trimmers have some of the highest reviews on the market.  So, whichever one you decide to go with, these final picks have a lot of satisfied consumers standing behind them.

 

Best Guillotine Paper Cutters

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Swingline Guillotine Paper Trimmer/Cutter
Swingline
Guillotine Paper Trimmer/Cutter
Maple Wood
Die Cast Metal
15 Sheet Max
Finger Guard
Safety Latch
Non Slip Rubber Feet
Self Sharpening
Grid/Ruler
18"
24"
HFS Heavy Duty Guillotine Paper Cutter
HFS
Heavy Duty Guillotine Paper Cutter
Steel
Aluminum
400 Sheet Max
Non Slip Rubber Feet
Safety Guard
Replaceable Blade
Grid/Ruler

12"
Dahle Vantage Paper Trimmer
Dahle
Vantage Paper Trimmer
Metal
15 Sheet Max
Automatic Clamp
Locking Handle
Non Slip Rubber Feet
Grid/Ruler
12"
15"
18"
X-ACTO Commercial Grade Square Guillotine Trimmer
X-ACTO
Commercial Grade Square Guillotine Trimmer
Wood
Steel
15 Sheet Max
Finger Guard
Safety Latch
Non Slip Rubber Feet
Self Sharpening
Grid/Ruler
12"
15"
18"
24"
30"
Westcott TrimAir Titanium Wood Guillotine Paper Trimmer
Westcott
TrimAir Titanium Wood Guillotine Paper Trimmer
Wood
Titanium
30 Sheet Max
Safety Guard
12"
15"
18"

 

Best Guillotine Paper Cutters

Swingline Guillotine Paper Trimmer/Cutter

Swingline Guillotine Paper Trimmer/Cutter

Our first pick on our list for best guillotine paper cutters and trimmers is one that will trim up to 15 sheets of paper at a time.  Therefore, this is a great pick for someone who’s not working with too much bulk.

The Swingline Guillotine Paper Trimmer/Cutter is made of solid maple with a platform that includes a grid and a ruler.  This ruler spans 24 inches and has measurements in inches, centimeters and millimeters.

This guillotine paper trimmer features an 18-inch, self-sharpening blade.  And, this blade has a steel tension spring which keeps the blade in place, no matter what postion it is in.

Furthermore, the Swingline Guillotine Paper Trimmer/Cutter has a safety guard rail which will help protect the fingers.  And, it has a blade latch hook which will keep the blade locked.  This is a great safety feature if you will be having young children around.

This guillotine paper cutter and trimmer comes with non-slip rubber feet which will keep the paper cutter secure when cutting paper.  In addition, these non-slip rubber feet will help to protect the countertops from damage and prevent scratches.

Finally, the Swingline Guillotine Paper Trimmer/Cutter measures 27 inches long, 20.75 inches wide, 4.5 inches tall and weighs approximately 12 pounds.  Additionally, it comes it comes in your choice of an 18 inch or 24 inch.  

Pros:

This is a quality made guillotine paper cutter.  It is made of solid maple, which, according to Real Simple, is an ultra-durable wood and can take a beating.

Furthermore, this guillotine paper cutter has a self-sharpening blade which will increase the longevity of the blade.

Lastly, the additionaly safety measures implemented with this paper cutter is great for those who have young ones around.

Cons:

This paper cutter can only trim 15 pages at once.  While this is perfect for some, it is less desirable for others.

Some consumers have stated this guillotine paper cutter is less than accurate.  However, it is important to note that most consumers are more than satisfied.  And, like one consumer stated, you need to hold the entire sheet of paper down to get an even cut.

 

HFS Heavy Duty Guillotine Paper Cutter

HFS Heavy Duty Guillotine Paper Cutter

This next pick on our list for best guillotine paper cutters is a commercial grade trimmer which can cut up to 400 sheets of paper at once.  The HFS Heavy Duty Guillotine Paper Cutter is a great choice for those looking to get a whole lot done in the shortest amount of time possible.

This guillotine paper cutter features a 12 inch hardened steel blade which can easily be replaced once it wears down.  Furthermore, this blade is easily removeable when it’s time to sharpen.

The HFS Heavy Duty Guillotine Paper Cutter comes with an attached paper clamp which will hold the paper in place while cutting.  This paper clamp helps prevent shifting which often results in uneven cuts.  Furthermore, this guillotine paper cutter has an adjustable fence which acts as a place holder and will allow you to cut multiple stacks of paper all the same length.

And, this guillotine paper cutter offers multiple rulers and a grid on its facade to ensure accuracy.  This paper cutter not only offesr inch, centimeter and millimeter measurements, it offers paper size measurements as well.

The HFS Heavy Duty Guillotine Paper Cutter has several saftety measures implemented within its construction.  The first notable safety measurement is the safety pin mechanism which holds the arm in the up position.  When the safety pin is in play, you will not be able to pull the blade down.  However, once you release the safety pin, you may pull the blade down to cut the paper.

Furthermore, this guillotine paper cutter features a blade guard cover which covers the side of the blade.  This will help protect the fingers and hands from the blade.  And, if need be, for any reason, this blade guard can be removed.

The HFS Heavy Duty Guillotine Paper Cutter comes with rubber feet to prevent the cutter from sliding while in use.  In addition, these rubber feet will help protect the countertops from damage.

Finally, this guillotine paper cutter measures 21 inches long, 15 inches wide and 13.5 inches tall.  And, it weighs roughly 35 pounds.

Pros:

If you work in bulk, this is, hands-down, your best option.  The HFS Heavy Duty Guillotine Paper Cutter is heavy duty, durable, accurate and all set up to get the job done.

Cons:

There are a several consumers who claim this paper cutter is not accurate.  However, one consumer mentioned if you utilize both the fence and the clamp, you should get accurate cuts.

In addition, there have been some complaints that this guillotine paper cutter didn’t come with adequate instructions.

 

Dahle Vantage Paper Trimmer

Dahle Vantage Paper Trimmer

This is another pick on our list of best guillotine paper cutters that enable you to trim up to 15 sheets at a time.

The Dahle Vantage Paper Trimmer is constructed with a metal base and comes with a machine ground blade.  This metal base features guides which include inches, metrics and angles to help you obtain accuracy.

Additionally, this guillotine paper trimmer offers adjustable screened guides to help you achieve your desired alignment.  And, in addition to the screened guides, this paper trimmer features a clamp to secure the paper for even cutting.

For safety purposes, this guillotine trimmer offers a locking handle and a spring action blade to prevent the blade from falling.

And, the Dahle Vantage Paper Trimmer features non-skid rubber feet to keep the trimmer in place while cutting.  Furthermore, these non-skid rubber feet will help protect the countertop from damage and scratches.

Finally, this paper trimmer comes in 3 different cut lengths.  Choose between 12 inches, 15 inches or 18 inches.

Pros:

The Dahle Vantage Paper Trimmer is heavily constructed which helps to keep it secure for accuracy.

Furthermore, speaking of accuracy, this paper trimmer gets high marks for accuracy from many satisfied consumers.

Cons:

While this paper trimmer gets high marks for accuracy, some consumers say they have to compromise a few sheets of paper to achieve this accuracy.  For instance, instead of cutting 15 sheets at a time, in order to achieve accuracy, these consumers cut 7 or 8 sheets at a time.

 

X-ACTO Commercial Grade Square Guillotine Trimmer

X-ACTO Commercial Grade Square Guillotine Trimmer

This X-ACTO Square Guillotine Trimmer is a commercial-grade paper cutter that can cut up to 20 sheets of paper at once.  And, in addition to paper, this guillotine trimmer is constructed to cut film and photographs.

This guillotine paper cutter is constructed with a heavy wood base which enforces stability for accurate cuts.  And, this wood base displays a grid with inch and centimeter measurements.

The X-ACTO Commercial Grade Square Guillotine Trimmer comes with a hardened steel blade which is self-sharpening.  This self-sharpening system will help to ensure consistantly even cuts every time.

This guillotine paper cutter comes with a safety guard and a latch to help prevent injury.  Furthermore, it comes wtih a spring action blade which is designed to prevent the blade from dropping down.

Finally, this guillotine paper trimmer comes in numerous different sizes.  Choose between 12 inches, 15 inches, 18 inches, 24 inches and 30 inches.

Pros:

This is a solid paper cutter.  It is heavy duty and features a much-desired self-sharpening blade.

Furthermore, the blade is incredibly sharp and this paper cutter is noted for accuracy.

Cons:

This pick on our list of best guillotine paper cutters is one that doesn’t have a clamp that will help secure the paper before cutting.  These clamps help to ensure accurate cutting and will enable you to cut without having to hold down the paper.  So, this is a bit of a disappointment.

 

Westcott TrimAir Titanium Wood Guillotine Paper Trimmer

Westcott TrimAir Titanium Wood Guillotine Paper Trimmer

Our final pick on our list for best guillotine paper cutters can trim up to 30 sheets of paper at once.  The Westcott TrimAir Titanium Wood Guillotine Paper Trimmer offers a great capacity for those looking to do larger projects.

This guillotine paper cutter features a titanium bonded blade.  This blade is constructed of materials which will keep the blade sharper for longer.  And, this blade is attached to a comfortable, ergonomic handle.

The Westcott TrimAir Titanium Guillotine Paper Trimmer is made with a natural wood base.  This base features inch, centimeter and grid measurments.

And, for safety purposes, this guillotine paper trimmer comes with a safety guard.  This safety guard will allow you to lock the blade when not in use.

Finally, the Westcott TrimAir Titanium Wood Guillotine Paper Trimmer comes in your choice of sizes.  Choose between the 12 inch, 15 inch or 18 inch.

Pros:

This is a great, basic option for a guillotine paper cutter.  It does the job and it does it well.  Furthermore, the titanium blade is sharp and cuts extremely well.  So well, you may not even realize you’ve just sliced through 20 sheets of paper.

Cons:

The Westcott TrimAir Titanium Wood Guillotine Paper Trimmer doesn’t come with a clamp to hold the paper down.  It does, however, come with a plastic guide in which you can secure the paper under.  Unfortunately, this plastic guide isn’t all that secure for holding the paper down.

Furthermore, although the blade is great and extremely sharp, it is not replaceable.

Best Storage Ottoman

Best Storage Ottoman for Every Decor

In order to find the best storage ottoman, you will need to first assess your decor.  And, this is crucial in order to find the best storage ottoman that works with your style and colors.

Secondly, when you assess your space, you will also want to figure out what maximum dimensions you are willing to work with for the storage ottoman.  The last thing you want is to order a storage ottoman only to have to return it because it is too big.

The next step in figuring out which storage ottoman is going to work for you is the amount of storage space you will need.  Therefore, it is wise to assess what you will be storing and how much you will be storing.  And, a lot of consumers like to go with the maximum amount of storage space because storage is often times pretty limited as it is.

Best Storage Ottoman

So, when we began our hunt for the best storage ottoman, we decided an array of different storage ottomans is a must for our list.  And, we wanted to have a storage ottoman for everyone.  Therefore, we came away with 7 of the best storage ottomans that are as different as the person sitting next to you.  We varied the style, the dimensions and the amount of storage space.

However, we would only allow ottomans on our list that are made of quality and made with durability.  In addition, in order for these ottomans to make our list, it was imperative to have numerous consumers who were completely and utterly satisfied.  So, we relied heavily on reviews and consumer satisfaction.

 

Best Storage Ottoman

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Seville Classics Foldable Storage Ottoman 2 Pack
Seville Classics
Foldable Storage Ottoman 2 Pack
MDF Construction
Polyester Upholstery
Color Options
15.7" x 15.7" x 15.7"
Convenience Concepts 163010BE Designs4Comfort 5th Avenue Storage Ottoman
Convenience Concepts
163010BE Designs4Comfort 5th Avenue Storage Ottoman
Upholstery Options
Wood Feet
Tufted
Hinged Lid
24" x 18" x 18"
Rivet Madison Lift-Top Modern Storage Ottoman
Rivet
Madison Lift-Top Modern Storage Ottoman
Wood Construction
Upholstery Fabric
Tray Top
Color Options
19.7" x 19.7" x 16.5"
Safavieh Amelia Tufted Storage Ottoman
Safavieh
Amelia Tufted Storage Ottoman
Birch Wood Construction
Cotton Upholstery
Color Options
21" x 21" x 19"
BirdRock Home Woven Seagrass Storage Ottoman
BirdRock Home
Woven Seagrass Storage Ottoman
Seagrass
Wooden Legs
Safety Hinges
Style Options
20" x 16" x 12"
OSP Designs Office Star Metro Vinyl 2-Piece Storage Ottoman
OSP Designs
Office Star Metro Vinyl 2-Piece Storage Ottoman
Vinyl
Tray Top
Bonus Cube
Color Options
16" x 16" x 17"
Cortesi Home Mavi Storage Tray Ottoman
Cortesi Home
Mavi Storage Tray Ottoman
Wood Frame
Bonded Leather
Tray Top
Color Options
17.5" x 17.5" x 16"

 

Best Storage Ottoman

Seville Classics Foldable Storage Ottoman 2 Pack

Seville Classics Foldable Storage Ottoman 2 Pack

Our first pick for best storage ottoman is one that folds.  So, ironically, you can can actually store this storage ottoman if need be.

The Seville Classics Foldable Storage Ottoman comes in a 2 pack.  Therefore, like we mentioned above, you can use one and store the other.  Or, you can use both and have storage galore.

These storage ottomans are made of 100% polyester upholstery with MDF construction.  MDF, as explained by the Family Handyman, is a medium-density fiber board which basically consists of sawdust and glue.  And, according to Woodmeister Master Builders, MDF is more stable than solid wood and holds up better to temperature and humidity changes.

The Seville Classics Foldable Storage Ottomans measure 15.7 inches wide, 15.7 inches deep and 15.7 inches tall.  The maximum amount of storage weight these ottomans can hold is 30 pounds.  And, the maximum amount of weight the top of the ottomans hold is 400 pounds.

The Seville Classics Foldable Storage Ottoman comes in your choice of colors and style options.  Choose between Charcoal Grey, Light Grey, Midnight Blue, Black Quilted and Oatmeal Beige.

Lastly, like we mentioned previously, these ottomans are foldable.  This means they also need to be set-up upon arrival.  However, set-up is easy and there are no tools required.

Pros:

Especially for an ottoman that folds, these ottomans are extremely sturdy.  And, they hold a decent amount of storage weight and an extraordinary amount of top weight.

Furthermore, these storage ottomans make great stepping stools.

Cons:

These storage ottomans don’t have any handles for transporting it from one end of the room to the next.  Therefore, it may be awkward to move this storage ottoman, especially if you are storing heavy items.

 

Convenience Concepts 163010BE Designs4Comfort 5th Avenue Storage Ottoman

Convenience Concepts 163010BE Designs4Comfort 5th Avenue Storage Ottoman

If you’re working with a traditional style of decor, this is a great ottoman to consider.  The Convenience Concepts 5th Avenue Storage Ottoman boasts a classic look with a tufted lid and nailhead trim.  In addition, this ottoman features solid wood turned feet.

This storage ottoman is made of faux leather, however, it comes in different types of upholsteries and colors.  You can choose between Black Faux Leather, Blue Faux Leather, Blue Fabric, Dark Espresso Faux Leather, Gray Faux Leather, Gray Fabric, Ivory Faux Leather, Tan Fabric, Velvet Gray or Velvet Taupe.

The Convenience Concepts 5th Avenue Storage Ottoman features a hinged lid which opens to nearly a 90 degree angle.  And, once the lid is open, it will stay open until you decide to shut it.  This feature is great to avoid injury and to give you time to sift through the contents inside.

This storage ottoman measures 24 inches long, 18 inches wide and 18 inches tall.  And, it offers a decent amount of storage space.  This storage space measures 21 inches long, 15 inches wide and 9 inches deep.

Pros:

The Convenience Concepts 5th Avenue Storage Ottoman is quality made and durable.

Furthermore, it is very sturdy, so feel free to lounge on it all you want.

Cons:

Some consumers thought the color they received was darker than what was shown in the picture.  So, before making a final purchase, make sure you will be satisfied if the color is darker than it appears.

 

Rivet Madison Lift-Top Modern Storage Ottoman

Rivet Madison Lift-Top Modern Storage Ottoman

This pick for best storage ottoman is one of our favorites.  And, this is because it has a mid-century modern style that can work with every decor.  So, if you’re working with a country or classic aesthetic, this storage ottoman will blend right in.

The Rivet Madison Lift-Top Modern Storage Ottoman is designed in such a way that it can be used for just about any scenario.  You can place a lamp on top, you can use it as a foot stool, you can use it as an extra seat, and of course, you can use it to store things in.

And, like we mentioned above, you can use it to place a lamp on top.  Simply flip over the top and it turns into a tray.  Therefore, not only can you use it as an end table, you can use it as a tray for drinks or a tray to eat on while you’re watching TV.  The uses are endless.

The Rivet Madison Lift-Top Modern Storage Ottoman is constructed with a wood frame and covered with a durable upholstery fabric.

This storage ottoman measures 19.7 inches long, 19.7 inches wide and 16.5 inches tall.  And, it comes in your choice of colors:  Denim, Grey Storm or Caviar.

Pros:

The flip over tray is a brilliant idea.  And, especially if you’re living in a small space, this tray will make your life and your company’s life so much more enjoyable.

Furthermore, the color options for this storage ottoman are amazing.  Each color is meant to go with just about every color palette out there.

Lastly, assembly is easy.  All you have to do is attach the legs and you’re ready for some company.

Cons:

Although we love the rounded-style of this ottoman, you will have to be selective with what you store in order to maximize the space.  For instance, since it is rounded, filling it with books isn’t the most practical idea.

 

Safavieh Amelia Tufted Storage Ottoman

Safavieh Amelia Tufted Storage Ottoman

If you love the rounded style but need a bit more storage space, this is one to consider.  Furthermore, this one is taller than our previous rounded pick.  Therefore, if you need a taller ottoman, again, this one is a pick to consider.

The Safavieh Amelia Tufted Storage Ottoman is constructed with birch wood and covered with 100% cotton.  Birch is a hard and durable wood.  And, according to Hunker, a quality piece of furniture made from birch is built to last.

This pick for best storage ottoman comes in a multitude of colors which you can check out here.  And, this ottoman measures 21 inches long, 21 inches wide and 19 inches tall.

Lastly, to assemble, you don’t have to.  It will arrive all put together and ready to use.

Pros:

This storage ottoman will last a long time, if not decades.  And, this is in part due to the quality craftsmanship and has a lot to do with the birch wood construction.

In addition, if you’re looking for a large storage space, this pick will deliver.

Cons:

The cushion on top of the ottoman is rather hard.  While this isn’t the most comfortable ottoman to sit on, it makes for a great foot stool and stepping stool.

Furthermore, some consumers have stated that the color of the ottoman was darker than what was presented in the picture.

 

BirdRock Home Woven Seagrass Storage Ottoman

BirdRock Home Woven Seagrass Storage Ottoman

Living at the beach or the sea?  The BirdRock Home Woven Seagrass Storage Ottoman has easy living written all over it.  This is the kind of living where you are surrounded by birds and trails of sand leading out of your back porch.

This pick for best storage ottoman is made with seagrass.  And, according to Home Quicks, seagrass is tough, shiny, smooth and resistant to stains.

The BirdRock Home Woven Seagrass Storage Ottoman features a lift top with safety hinges.  These hinges will keep you safe when the lid is propped open.  Additionally, these hinges make it easy and convenient to sift through your storage without having to physically keep the lid propped open.

This storage ottoman measures 22 inches long, 18 inches wide and 16 inches tall.  And, thankfully, it comes fully assembled.

Pros:

The inside dimensions of this storage ottoman is 20 inches long, 16 inches deep and 12 inches tall.  Therefore, you’re looking at a decent amount of storage space.

In addition, this storage ottoman is very well made and extremely sturdy.

Lastly, the BirdRock Home Woven Seagrass Storage Ottoman comes in your choice of styles.  Choose between the storage ottoman or the storage cube.  

Cons:

Because this ottoman is made from seagrass, it is recommended that you refrain from sitting on it.  Furthermore, you can use it to prop your feet on, however, overtime you may find some denting or some fading.

Furthermore, this ottoman has a curved top.  Therefore, it’s not designed to use as a coffee table.  However, if you go with the storage cube, that has a flat top and will be a much better surface to set things on.

 

OSP Designs Office Star Metro Vinyl 2-Piece Storage Ottoman

OSP Designs Office Star Metro Vinyl 2-Piece Storage Ottoman

If you’re looking for funky, you’re looking right at it.  The OSP Designs Office Star Metro Vinyl 2-Piece Storage Ottoman is a fun and playful addition for a fun and playful space.

Furthermore, this storage ottoman is available in 6 bright colors.  Choose between Blue, Crimson Red, Green, Orange, Pink or Purple.

The OSP Designs Office Star Metro Storage Ottoman is not only fun in style, but it is fun in functionality.  This pick features an additional ottoman cube packed away inside.  This smaller cube measures 12 inches long, 12 inches wide and 12 inches tall.  In addition, this cube makes for a great step stool or additional seating.

And, that’s not all.  This pick for best storage ottoman comes with a tray top.  So, you just flip the top over and you can use it as a side table, a snack table or as a reading table.

The OSP Designs Office Star Metro Storage Ottoman is made of vinyl.  And, according to A. M. Nikos, vinyl upholstery is durable and easy to clean.

Lastly, this storage ottoman measures 16 inches long, 16 inches wide and 17 inches tall.

Pros:

The OSP Designs Office Star Metro Storage Ottoman offers the most functionality out of any ottoman we’ve seen.  Not only does it come with a flip top tray table, it comes with an inner cube which has numerous uses, such as a foot stool and extra seating.

In addition, this ottoman is sturdy and durable.

Cons:

Vinyl is a cheap looking material and there’s no sugar-coating that fact.  Therefore, we wouldn’t recommend putting this ottoman in your main living room.  For a rec room or a dorm room, however, this ottoman would be perfect.  And, you can always use the extra inner cube to accommodate guests in these spaces.

 

Cortesi Home Mavi Storage Tray Ottoman

Cortesi Home Mavi Storage Tray Ottoman

Our final pick for best storage ottoman is another functional option to make your life and your entertaining life a breeze.  The Cortesi Home Mavi Storage Tray Ottoman features a flip top with a hidden serving tray.  Once this top is flipped over, it reveals a tray that can be used for drinks, snacks, a lamp…the possibilites are endless.

This storage ottoman is constructed with a solid wood frame and covered in bonded leather.  According to Live Science, bonded leather consists of leather hides mixed with polyurethane.  And, this is an environmentally friendly option as it makes use of reclaimed and recycled materials.

The Cortesi Home Mavi Storage Tray Ottoman measures 17.5 inches long, 17.5 inches wide and 16 inches tall.  Additionally, it comes in your choice of colors:  Black, Blue, Red, Grey, Orange and White.

Pros:

This storage ottoman is well-constructed and durable.  Therefore, it will be able to take on a lot of weight and a lot of abuse.

Furthermore, it has a tray top.  We rest our case.

Lastly, no assembly required.

Cons:

It is made of bonded leather.  While this is definitely a step up from vinyl, it is still not the quality of 100% leather.  Bonded leather tends to tear easier than real leather.  Therefore, we suggest using this ottoman with care.

best pencil cases

Best Pencil Cases and Pouches

We went on the hunt for the best pencil cases and pouches and gathered 7 stylish and functional cases that will make your life easier and more organized.  Furthermore, our final picks for best pencil cases have some amazing reviews from some very satisfied consumers.

So, what did we look for in the best pencil cases and pouches?  First and foremost, like we mentioned above, functionality is a must.  The best pencil cases and pouches have common sense storage solutions to make finding that one particular pencil quick and virtually thoughtless.  In addition, these pencil cases offer additional space for some of the extras like erasers, sharpeners, note cards, etc.

And, because everyone has their own idea of what the best pencil case is, each one of these picks offers a different storage capacity.  So, we picked out a wide array of options to suit just about every scenario.  Therefore, if you’re looking for a smaller storage solution, the smallest pencil case on our list offers a pencil capacity of 26 pencils.  If you are in need of a large pencil case, the largest pencil case on our list offers a pencil capacity of 202 pencils.  And, the rest of the pencil cases fit somewhere in between those two numbers.

best pencil cases

The next thing we looked for in the best pencil cases and pouches is durability.  What good is purchasing something if it’s just going to fall apart?  Therefore, the final picks on our list of best pencil cases and pouches are built to last.

Furthermore, durability and protection go hand in hand.  So, each one of these picks are designed to protect the precious equipment inside.  And, there are different levels of protection with each case.  If you’re looking for the ultimate protection, we have a pick on our list that’s water-resistant and made with a hard shell.  If you don’t need that much protection and are just looking for something to organize your pencils, we have some soft shell cases on our list.

Lastly, the pencil cases on our list are all classic in design.  One thing we’ve learned through the years and the best piece of fashion advice we’ve ever received was, “you can never go wrong with a classic style.”  Therefore, our final picks for best pencil cases reflect that timeless advice.

 

Best Pencil Cases and Pouches

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Soucolor 120 Slots Canvas Pencil Case
Soucolor
120 Slots Canvas Pencil Case
Canvas
120 Pencil Capacity
Elastic Pencil Slots
Eraser/Sharpener Holder
10.6" x 8.7" x 3"
Kipling 100 Pens Pencil Case
Kipling
100 Pens Pencil Case
Nylon
100 Pencil Capacity
Elastic Pencil Slots
Color Options
Design Options
8.5" x 6" x 2"
ColorIt Large Pencil Case Storage
ColorIt
Large Pencil Case Storage
EVA
100+ Pencil Capacity
Elastic Pencil Slots
Mesh Pocket
Pouch
Water Resistant
8.75" x 6.5" x 2.5"
Homecube Pencil Case
Homecube
Pencil Case
Oxford Fabric
60 Pencil Capacity
Elastic Pencil Slots
Mesh Pocket
Enclosed Pocket
Detachable Divider
Color Options
8.74" x 4.3" x 2.17"
VASCHY Large Pencil Case
VASCHY
Large Pencil Case
Polyester
72 Pencil Capacity
Elastic Pencil Slots
Mesh Pockets
Color Options
9.8" × 7.6" × 2.9"
BTSKY Deluxe PU Leather Pencil Case
BTSKY
Deluxe PU Leather Pencil Case
PU Leather
127 Pencil Capacity
Elastic Pencil Slots
Eraser/Sharpener Holder
Color Options
9.45" x 7.87" 2.56"
qianshan 202 Colored Pencils Pencil Case
qianshan
202 Colored Pencils Pencil Case
Polyester Oxford Fabric
202 Pencil Capacity
Elastic Pencil Slots
Pouch
Color Options
Design Options
10.6" x 8.5" x 3.5"

 

Best Pencil Cases and Pouches

 

Soucolor 120 Slots Canvas Pencil Case

Soucolor 120 Slots Canvas Pencil Case

The first pick on our list for best pencil cases offers a whopping 120 slots for pencils, colored pencils, ball point pens or gel pens.  The Soucolor 120 Slots Canvas Pencil Case is a notebook style holder where you can flip through to find the pencil you’re looking for.  Therefore, each of the 3 layers act like a page which turns.

This pencil case offers individual elastic slots for each pencil.  The elastic allows you to easily remove each pencil and easily add each pencil.  And, the elastic will hold each individual pencil securely so you don’t have to worry about the pencils sliding out upon opening or creating a mess within the case while traveling.  Furthermore, this pencil case offers 2 elastic slots for an eraser and/or sharpener.

The Soucolor 120 Slots Canvas Pencil Case is made of quality canvas which is ultra durable.  In addition, this pencil case comes with a heavy-duty zipper with a convenient canvas pull strap.

Lastly, this pencil case measures 10.6 inches long, 8.7 inches wide and 3 inches thick.  And, to care for this case, simply wipe clean with a damp cloth.

Pros:

If you’re looking to organize your pencils by color, this is definitely a pick to consider.  The Soucolor 120 Slots Canvas Pencil Case will display 20 pencils on each side of the layers.  Therefore, with just a flip of the wrist, you will have all the colors you need right in front of you.

Cons:

If you’re looking to hold anything larger than the standard sized pencil or pen, you may want to go with another option.  This is because you run the risk of stretching the elastic pencil holders out and you also run the risk of not being able to zip the pencil case shut.

 

Kipling 100 Pens Pencil Case

Kipling 100 Pens Pencil Case

Kipling is known for style and quality, so we didn’t hesitate to put this pencil holder on our list.  The Kipling 100 Pens Pencil Case is made of 100% nylon and features a durable zipper which offers a full zip around enclosure.

This pick for best pencil cases and pouches comes with 26 slots for your pencils and pens, and with room to spare.  This case features a center divider which has space underneath for additional pencils, erasers or sharpeners.

The Kipling 100 Pens Pencil Case measures 6 inches long, 2 inches deep and 8.25 tall.  And, to care for this pencil case, simply wipe clean with a damp cloth.

Lastly, and perhaps our favorite aspect, this pencil case comes in just every color imaginable.  In addition, they have some fun designs to brighten things up a bit.

Pros:

Like we mentioned above, Kipling is absolute quality.  And, whether you’re using their luggage, or in this instance, their pencil case, each one of their products is undeniably fashionable and functional.

Furthermore, you get a fuzzy little gorilla key chain.  What more could you ask for?

Cons:

What more could you ask for?  Well, this case is the smallest option on our list, so depending on how much room you need, you could be asking for a lot more.

In addition, this pencil case doesn’t have an enclosed pouch to store extras in.  Instead, this pouch has extra free-floating space that may work for some, while some of us require more concrete organization.

 

ColorIt Large Pencil Case Storage

ColorIt Large Pencil Case Storage

If you’re looking for a heavy-duty pencil case that feels more like a storage unit, this is the ultimate pick.  The ColorIt Large Pencil Case Storage is a smart choice for protecting valuables.  And, as we all know, some of the pens and pencils out there can be quite spendy, so protection is key.

This pencil case boasts a hard outer shell made of EVA.  And, according to Porex, ethylene vinyl acetate (EVA) is an elastic material which is similar to rubber.  Furthermore, according to Happy, EVA feels like velvet and it is one of the least harmful out of all of the synthetics.

In addition, because this case is made out of EVA, it is ultra durable, crack-resistant and water-resistant.  And, it also offers a heavy-duty zipper.

The ColorIt Large Pencil Case Storage holds over 100 pencils and there are three main compartments for the pencils.  The first of these compartments is the interior mesh pocket.  This mesh pocket is a large pocket which will allow the pencils to free float.  And, you can see through the mesh which makes it easy to pick out the pencil you’re looking for.

The next place for storing pencils is the center flap which has 24 elastic slots.  This center flap is the first thing you will see upon opening, therefore, it is a great place to store your most used pencils or pens.

And, the final area for storing pencils is the back console which boasts a bottom pouch and 3 large elastic slots.  These slots and the pouch can be used for larger markers, erasers, rulers or sharpeners.

Finally, this pencil case measures 8.75 inches long, 6.5 inches wide and 2.5 inches deep.  So, if you have some extra room amongst your pencils, this pouch can be big enough to fit a small book inside.

Pros:

This is a great pick for those who want to protect their valuable markers, pencils and pens.  Not only does it have a hard shell, it is water-resistant and will keep the inner contents dry – just as long as you don’t submerge this storage case in water.

In addition, this case is great for all sizes of markers, pencils and pens.

Cons:

A few consumers have complained about the handle breaking within the first few weeks of receiving the pencil case.

Homecube Pencil Case

Homecube Pencil Case

The Homecube Pencil Case is great if you need to carry, not only pencils, but an assortment of items, such as, crayons, erasers, scissors, etc.  But, if you’re looking to hold just pencils, this case can accommodate a total of 60 pens and pencils.

This pencil case features an inner flap which will conveniently hold 4 pencils by the attached elastic bands.  This is convenient in the sense where you can store your very favorite pencils for easy access.

Furthermore, the Homecube Pencil Case features a mesh pocket, an enclosed pocket and a detachable middle divider.  This divider is attached by velcro to keep things organized.  And, if you need a larger space, this divider is easily removable and and you can reattach it just as easy.

This pencil case is made of Oxford fabric which allows for some stretch when filling the case to the max.  Furthermore, this fabric is scratch-resistant, dirt-resistant and easy to care for.

Lastly, the Homecube Pencil Case measures 8.74 inches long, 4.3 inches wide and 2.17 inches tall.  And, it comes in your choice of colors:  Black, Gray and Green.

Pros:

If you’re looking to organize everyday school supplies, this pencil case is the perfect size.  It is roomy without being a burden.

Furthermore, the Homecube Pencil Case is made with quality and it is made with an attractive, stretchy fabric.

Cons:

This case only comes with 4 elastic pencil slots.  So, if you’re looking to organize  a large color selection, you may want to go with another option.

 

VASCHY Large Pencil Case

VASCHY Large Pencil Case

This pick on our list of best pencil cases is one of our favorites simply because of the organizational design.

The VASCHY Large Pencil Case opens up to 3 layers which are set up in a book design.  So, when you’re looking for a particular pencil or color, simply flip through the layers.

Furthermore, each one of these layers has elastic bands attached to store and organize your pencils and even your large markers.  This set up is an exceptional way to color-coordinate your pencils to quickly find the color you need. 

This pencil case has 3 mesh pockets that can hold smaller items such as erasers, sharpeners and the like.  And, these mesh pockets are see-through, so finding what you need is hassle-free.

The VASCHY Large Pencil Case will hold at least 72 pencils or pens.  And, because this case is made with tear-resistant polyester, this pencil case is designed to hold these pencils durably.

Lastly, this pencil case is quite large, measuring 9.8 inches long, 7.6 inches wide and 2.9 inches deep.  And, it comes in your choice of colors:  Black, Burgundy or Turq.  

Pros:

The VASCHY Large Pencil Case is very smartly designed and will help you meticulously organize your pencil collection.

Furthermore, if you’re looking for a larger pencil storage solution, this is one of the largest on our list.

Lastly, this pencil case offers larger elastic bands to hold markers and other larger items.

Cons:

One of the inner mesh pockets does not zip open all of the way.  Therefore, it’s rather difficult to store bulkier items in this pocket.

 

BTSKY Deluxe PU Leather Pencil Case

BTSKY Deluxe PU Leather Pencil Case

This pick for best pencil case looks more like a large pocket book.  And, it comes with a handle to conveniently and comfortably wrap around your wrist for easy transportation.

The BTSKY Deluxe PU Leather Pencil Case features 127 elastic pencil slots which will hold your pencils and pens securely.  In addition, because this pencil case acts more like a book, these slots span across the “pages” of this case.  And, this format is great for color coordinating colored pencils, charcoals, markers and pens.

On the back panel, there are 3 larger elastic slots which will hold erasers or sharpeners securely in place.  And, if you have larger markers, you can store them here as well.

The BTSKY Deluxe Pencil Case is made of PU leather and comes equipped with a heavy-duty zipper.

Lastly, this pencil case measures 9.45 inches long, 7.87 inches wide and 2.56 inches wide.  And, it comes in your choice of colors:  Black, Brown, Green, Grey, Purple or Rose Red.

Pros:

The BTSKY Deluxe Pencil Case offers a great format for color-coordinating your pens, pencils and markers.

Furthermore, we like how this pencil case looks more like a pocket book.  So, if your pencil case is basically an extension of you, this is a great way to keep it low-key.

Cons:

This doesn’t offer any additional pockets like some of our other picks.  Therefore, if pockets are a requirement for you, you may want to check out another option on our list.

 

qianshan 202 Colored Pencils Pencil Case

qianshan 202 Colored Pencils Pencil Case

The final pick on our list for best pencil cases and pouches can hold a whopping 202 pencils or 136 gel pens.  The qianshan 202 Colored Pencils Pencil Case has a book-like format where you can flip through the layers to find the pencil you need quickly and easily.

Furthermore, this format allows you to perfectly color-coordinate your pencils and pens.  Each one of the layers has elastic holders which will securely line the pencils up side by side.

The qianshan 202 Colored Pencils Pencil Case features an outer pouch which can hold your erasers, sharpeners and other smaller items you may need.

This pencil case is made of a polyester Oxford fabric.  This fabric is durable and will stretch just enough when the case is filled to the max.  This will give you some leeway to zip the pouch shut when you need it the most.

The qianshan 202 Colored Pencils Pencil Case measure 10.6 inches long, 8.5 inches wide and 3.5 inches deep.  And, it comes in your choice of color and design combinations:  Birds202, Cats202, Coffee Cat202, Fresh202, Purple202, Sketch202 and Blossom202.

Pros:

This pencil case is extremely functional for those looking to color coordinate their pencils and pens.

Furthermore, this layout works great for quickly finding that one pencil you’re looking for.

Cons:

The elastic straps for the pencils are on the smaller side.  So, don’t be surprised if some of your pencils or pens won’t fit.

best ice buckets

7 Best Ice Buckets for Entertaining

We’ll have to admit, we had a lot of fun searching for the best ice buckets.  This is because we love design and ambience.  And, a lot of the ice buckets on the market are a work of art.  In addition, unlike most household items that are functional, ice buckets have an elegance to them.  They speak of sophistication and relaxation.  So, with that being said, when picking out the best ice buckets on the market, we had design in mind.

The next thing we looked for in the best ice buckets was functionality.  If the ice bucket doesn’t keep the ice frozen for long periods of time, what good is it?  So, we paid close attention to ice buckets that were made of materials that retained the content’s temperature.  Furthermore, we paid close attention to ice buckets that were double-walled for maximum insulation.

best ice buckets

Once assured that the ice buckets we picked out were great to look at and would keep the contents cold, we made sure they came with a matching lid.  We also made sure they came with matching tongs or the option to purchase matching tongs.  This helps complete the look for the ultimate entertaining solution.

The final step in finding the best ice buckets was sifting through reviews, reviews, reviews.  The best ice buckets either need to come from a company known for ultimate quality and/or they need to have a lot of consumers backing them up.

So, in the end, we were left with our picks for the top 9 best ice buckets on the market.  These ice buckets checked off each and every one of our requirements.  And, there are a couple of ice buckets on our list with some surprising extras that will only enhance the entertaining process.

 

Best Ice Buckets

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Oggi Stainless Steel Ice Bucket with Tongs
Oggi
Stainless Steel Ice Bucket with Tongs
Stainless Steel
Double-Walled
Handles
Lid
Tongs
7.8" x 7" x 8.8"
GSCW Small Ice Bucket with Tongs
GSCW
Small Ice Bucket with Tongs
Stainless Steel
Double-Walled
Strainer
Handle
Lid
Tongs
Tong Storage
7.4" x 6.4" x 6.4"
Lenox Tuscany Classics Stainless Steel Ice Bucket
Lenox
Tuscany Classics Stainless Steel Ice Bucket
Stainless Steel
Double-Walled
Handles
Lid
8" x 8" x 9"
Woodard & Charles Acadia Wood Ice Bucket
Woodard & Charles
Acadia Wood Ice Bucket
Acadia Wood
Double-Walled
Lid
8" x 8" x 8.5"
Old Dutch "Churp" Hammered Double Walled Stainless Steel Ice Bucket
Old Dutch
"Churp" Hammered Double Walled Stainless Steel Ice Bucket
Stainless Steel
Double-Walled
Lid
Tongs
6" x 6" x 8"
OXO Good Grips Double Wall Ice Bucket with Tongs
OXO Good Grips
Double Wall Ice Bucket with Tongs
BPA Free Plastic
Double-Walled
Handle
Lid
Tongs
Garnish Tray
Water Reservoir
7.7" x 7.8" x 8.7"
Nambe Mikko Ice Bucket with Tongs
Nambe
Mikko Ice Bucket with Tongs
8 Metal Alloy
Acacia Wood
Tongs
Tong Holder
8.25" x 8" x 6"

 

Best Ice Buckets

Oggi Stainless Steel Ice Bucket with Tongs

Oggi Stainless Steel Ice Bucket with Tongs

Our first pick on our list for best ice buckets is simple, classy and perfect for entertaining.  And, it is a great size if you’re looking to entertain a lot of people.

The Oggi Ice Bucket with Tongs is approximately 7 inches in circumference and 9 inches tall with the lid on.  Furthermore, you can expect to hold about 10 cups of ice.

This ice bucket is made of stainless steel and comes with double-walled insulation.  This insulation will help keep the ice frozen for longer.  And, you can expect your ice to stay frozen for about 5-6 hours.

The Oggi Stainless Steel Ice Bucket is equipped with a lid and tongs.  The tongs are capable of picking up 2 regular-sized ice cubes at a time.

Finally, to care for this ice bucket, simply hand wash with a mild soap and towel dry.

Pros:

This ice bucket will hold a good amount of ice.  And, it’s a great size whether you’re entertaining 2 people or a group of people.

Furthermore, this ice bucket has handles on either side for easy movement.

Lastly, this ice bucket produces little to no condensation.

Cons:

The Oggi Stainless Steel Ice Bucket used to come with a strainer for the melted ice.  Now, it no longer does and consumers seem to be rather unhappy about that aspect.

In addition, the lid is not a tight-fitting lid.  However, some might find this to be a positive for the convenience factor.

 

GSCW Small Ice Bucket with Tongs

GSCW Small Ice Bucket with Tongs

This next pick for best ice bucket is a great pick for entertaining a small group of people.  The GSCW Small Ice Bucket with Tongs has a inner capacity of 5.5 inches by 5.5 inches. 

This ice bucket is made of stainless steel and features a stainless steel chrome finish.  Furthermore, this ice bucket is double-walled to keep your ice colder for longer.

The GSCW Small Ice Bucket comes with a tight-fitting lid with tong storage.  So, once you’re finished with the tongs, they slide right into the lid.

Furthermore, this ice bucket comes with a bin strainer which will keep the melted ice away from the frozen ice.

Lastly, when it’s time to clean this ice bucket, just some mild soap and hand-washing will do.

Pros:

The GSCW Small Ice Bucket with Tongs is a perfect size for 2-4 people.  And, it has all the necessities for a hassle-free evening.

In addition, because this ice bucket has a tight-fitting lid, the ice will stay frozen for longer with some consumers stating around 8 hours.

Cons:

Like we mentioned above, this is a great size for a small group of people.  However, this ice bucket is too small if you’re looking to chill a bottle of wine with ice.  If only they made it just a tad bigger…

 

Lenox Tuscany Classics Stainless Steel Ice Bucket

Lenox Tuscany Classics Stainless Steel Ice Bucket

The Lenox Tuscany Classics Ice Bucket is a tasteful pick for upscale events or an elegant gift.

This ice bucket measures 8 inches wide by 9 inches tall.  So, this is going to work for larger parties and gatherings.  In addition, this ice bucket will allow you to comfortably chill a bottle of wine.

The Lenox Tuscany Classics Ice Bucket is made of stainless steel with a tarnish-free, sheen finish.  And, it has double-walled insulation and comes with a lid to keep the ice frozen for longer.  

Lastly, and thankfully, this ice bucket is dishwasher safe.

Pros:

The Lenox Tuscany Classics Ice Bucket leaves no condensation.  Therefore, you don’t need to worry about a slippery ice bucket or leaving water marks on the tablecloth.

Furthermore, if you’re looking for a matching set, this ice bucket coordinates with Tuscany Classics Stemware and Barware Collection.  And, you can find those matching items here.

Cons:

Although this ice bucket is double-walled, the lid is hollow.  However, this ice bucket will still keep ice frozen for hours.

In addition, this ice bucket isn’t equipped with tongs.  But, Tuscany Classics does offer a gorgeous bar tool set which includes an ice scooper.  You can find that set here.  Or, you can just go for the Tuscany Classics Ice Scoop here.

 

Woodard & Charles Acadia Wood Ice Bucket

Woodard & Charles Acadia Wood Ice Bucket

We love the casual, yet, classy look of this ice bucket.  The Woodard & Charles Ice Bucket is made of Acadia wood and handcrafted in Thailand.  And, according to Quercus Living, Acadia wood is incredibly durable and hard.  Furthermore, it is long-lasting and water-resistant, making it the perfect wood for an ice bucket.

This ice bucket is a great size to accommodate a larger gathering.  In addition, at 8 inches by 8.5 inches, it will comfortably chill a bottle of wine.

The Woodard & Charles Acadia Wood Ice Bucket features double-walled insulation and comes with a lid.  With this combination, it will keep the ice frozen for longer.

Finally, to care for this ice bucket, simply wipe clean with a damp cloth and towel dry.  And, occasionally, it is recommended to rub mineral oil on the wood to keep it from drying out.

Pros:

This is a great option for a garden gathering.  It’s elegant, but has a definite touch of nature.

Furthermore, this is a perfect size for a small or large gathering.  And, it’s the perfect size to chill a bottle of wine.

Cons:

The Woodard & Charles Acadia Wood Ice Bucket doesn’t come with any extras.  And, this includes handles, tongs or an ice scoop.  However, there are plenty of options to find tongs that coordinate with this ice bucket.  You can find the tongs we recommend here.

As far as the handles go, or rather, no handles, the Acadia wood will allow for a slip-free grasp.

 

Old Dutch "Churp" Hammered Double Walled Stainless Steel Ice Bucket

Old Dutch “Churp” Hammered Double Walled Stainless Steel Ice Bucket

This pick on our list for best ice buckets makes a gorgeous gift or it will make for a beautiful sun-porch afternoon filled with cocktails.

The Old Dutch “Churp” Ice Bucket is made of stainless steel and comes with a hammered finish.  Furthermore, it is double-walled which will help insulate the contents for hours.

This ice bucket is perfect for 2 to 3 people as it has a capacity of 3 quarts.  In addition, it measures 6 inches in circumference and it is 8 inches tall.

The Old Dutch “Churp” Hammered Double Walled Stainless Steel Ice Bucket comes with tongs and a lid which features a beautiful bird handle.

Finally, to care for this ice bucket, simply wash with a mild soap and towel dry.

Pros:

This ice bucket has a unique design which will surely garner compliments.

Furthermore, it is well-built and will keep ice chilled for hours.  It also resists condensation, so you won’t have to deal with slipping and sliding or a wet countertop.

Cons:

The Old Dutch “Churp” Ice Bucket doesn’t have handles.  However, like we mentioned above, it does resist condensation.  So, if you have to pick it up and move it, it will be slip-resistant.  In addition, the hammered finish will allow for a better grip.

Lastly, this ice bucket is on the smaller side.  Therefore, you won’t be able to chill a bottle of wine.

 

OXO Good Grips Double Wall Ice Bucket with Tongs

OXO Good Grips Double Wall Ice Bucket with Tongs

This ice bucket is the most functional ice bucket on our list.  The OXO Good Grips Double Wall Ice Bucket with Tongs offers everything you need to make the perfect cocktail.

This ice bucket comes with a removable ganish tray which hangs on the inside of the bucket.  So, you can store your lemons and limes and keep them chilled at the same time.

Furthermore, the OXO Good Grips Double Wall Ice Bucket with Tongs features a reservoir which will hold the water away from the fresh ice.

And, this ice bucket comes with nylon tongs which you can hang on either side of the bucket, right at the base of the handle.  These tongs have sharp teeth which will allow you to easily grab that garnish or that ice cube.

The OXO Good Grips Double Wall Ice Bucket with Tongs has a flip top.  This flip top conveniently opens with a press of a button.  And, once finished, it just as easily snaps down.

This ice bucket is made of BPA free plastic and is double walled to get the most hours out of your ice.  Furthermore, because the garnish tray sits inside the ice bucket, you will also keep your fruits and vegetables fresher for longer.

Finally, to care for this ice bucket, simply hand wash with a mild soap and towel dry.  However, the garnish tray and the tongs are dishwasher safe.

Pros:

What doesn’t this ice bucket offer other than spirits?  It has everything you need to keep the drinks topped off.  Of course, except for the alcohol.

And, because this is made of BPA free plastic, this ice bucket is perfect for a picnic, a day on the lake…or even a hike.

Cons:

This is the least elegant pick on our list.  However, sometimes life is not so elegant.  Like we mentioned above, a picnic or a hike is a more casual occasion where this ice bucket would work perfect.

 

Nambe Mikko Ice Bucket with Tongs

Nambe Mikko Ice Bucket with Tongs

Our final pick for best ice bucket is, to put it simply, a work of art.  The Nambe Mikko Ice Bucket with Tongs is designed by world-renowned designer Neil Cohen.  He is the recipient of the AIGA’s Objects of Design Award and has been featured in The New York Times and New York Magazine.

Furthermore, this ice bucket comes from a company which has been producing award-winning designs for over 60 years.  This company works with top designers and has had its designs exhibited in galleries such as The British Museum and MOMA in New York.

This ice bucket is perfect for entertaining large groups, as well as, small groups.  And, because it measures 8.25 inches in length, 8 inches in width and 6 inches deep, it can easily chill a bottle of wine.

The Nambe Mikko Ice Bucket with Tongs is made of alloy with an Acacia wood lid.  Alloy is resistant to rust and corrosion, which is a great metal for an ice bucket.  In addition, this alloy is a mixture of 8 different metals which will keep the inside temperature either hot or cold for long periods of time, depending on the contents.

And, Acacia wood, according to Home Guides, is a very durable wood.  Furthermore, since it grows plentifully, this is a sustainable wood.  Therefore, it’s eco-friendly.

This ice bucket comes with alloy tongs which conveniently fit right on top of the lid.  This makes it convenient for storing the tongs and for remembering where they are in-between drinks.  In addition, these tongs have sharp teeth which makes picking out your ice easier.

Finally, to care for this ice bucket, simply hand wash with mild soap and water.

Pros:

If you’re looking to impress, this is the ice bucket to get.  It’s absolutely gorgeous.

Furthermore, because this ice bucket is made of alloy consisting of 8 different metals, this will keep your ice cold for long periods of time.

Lastly, this is a great size for an ice bucket.  It can accommodate large and small gatherings, as well as, a bottle of wine.

Cons:

The Nambe Mikko Ice Bucket is very basic as far as functionality goes.  It doesn’t come with a strainer or handles.  However, we think the design more than makes up for it.

best silicone baking mat

Best Silicone Baking Mat

Silicone baking mats make baking life so much quicker and hassle-free.  This is because there’s very little cleanup.  And, what cleanup there is, it takes little to no effort.  So, this is why we went on the hunt for the best silicone baking mat.  To make our lives easier and yours as well.

However, we wanted to make sure silicone baking mats were safe to use.  And, this was our first inquiry into finding the best silicone baking mat.

Are silicone baking mats safe?

According to LIVESTRONG, chemical contamination isn’t a major issue with silicone bake-ware.  In addition, most silicone baking mats can withstand heat as high as 450 degrees Fahrenheit.  So, as long as you keep your baking under this range, you will avoid chemical transfer.

And, according to Wellness Mama, dangers of silicone are anecdotal and not scientifically backed, which doesn’t prove the safety of silicone.  Furthermore, the potential of hazards occur when the silicone reaches high temperatures.

Therefore, at this point in time, as long as the silicone stays within the recommended temperature range, there is no evidence that silicone is harmful.

How durable are silicone baking mats?

The next question we had was, how durable are silicone baking mats?  Well, they don’t rust, they don’t break, and like we stated above, they withstand extreme high temperatures.  And, as long as you don’t sharpen your knife on them or use them as a cutting board, a quality silicone baking mat will last you a long time.

So, once we got our 2 major questions out of the way, we were ready for some cookies.  So, we searched for the top rated silicone mats on the market and narrowed them down to the top 7 best silicone baking mats money can buy.

And, when we narrowed these picks down, we made sure to have a wide array of mats on our list.  The best silicone baking mat for you may have measurements displayed on its facade.  And, this is especially helpful when baking pies or needing a quick reference guide for conversions.  Or, the best silicone baking mat for you may be a blank surface to utilize your creativity.

Finally, like we mentioned previously, our final picks have the highest reviews on the market.  These reviews are from fellow bakers who know the ins and outs of a kitchen and who know what constitutes a really good silicone baking mat.

So, without further ado, it’s time for some cookies.

 

Best Silicone Baking Mat

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
di Oro Living Pro Silicone Baking Mat
di Oro Living
Pro Silicone Baking Mat
Dishwasher Safe
BPA Free
FDA Approved
480° F Max Temp
Storage Band
16.5" x 11.625"
Sili Bake The Original Silicone Pastry Baking Mat with Measurements
Sili Bake
The Original Silicone Pastry Baking Mat with Measurements
Dishwasher Safe
BPA Free
FDA Approved
450° F Max Temp
Measurements
Storage Roll
23" x 15"
Silchef Silicone 3 Piece Non Stick Baking Mats
Silchef
Silicone 3 Piece Non Stick Baking Mats
Dishwasher Safe
BPA Free
FDA Approved
LFGB Approved
482° F Max Temp
Ruler
16.5" x 11.625"
16.5" x 11.625"
11.5" x 8.5"
Silpat Premium Non-Stick Silicone Baking Mat
Silpat
Premium Non-Stick Silicone Baking Mat
Dishwasher Safe
BPA Free
FDA Approved
NSF Approved
Kosher Certified
482° F Max Temp
16.5" x 11.625"
KITZINI Silicone Baking Mat Set of 2
KITZINI
Silicone Baking Mat Set of 2
Dishwasher Safe
BPA Free
FDA Approved
450° F Max Temp
16.5" x 11.625"
Folksy Super Kitchen Non-Slip Silicone Pastry Mat
Folksy
Super Kitchen Non-Slip Silicone Pastry Mat
Dishwasher Safe
BPA Free
FDA Approved
LFGB Approved
470° F Max Temp
Measurements
28" x 20"

 

Best Silicone Baking Mat

di Oro Living Pro Silicone Baking Mat

di Oro Living Pro Silicone Baking Mat

If you’re looking for baking motivation, this pick for best silicone baking mat has it as clear as that chocolate chip cookie you’ve been dreaming about.  The di Oro Living Pro Silicone Baking Mat keeps things clear and concise with the words “BAKE IT” plastered on the front.

This silicone baking mat is professional grade with a 1 mm silicone and glass fiber platform.  This is one of the thickest silicone baking mats on our list.  And, a thicker mat tends to be stronger and last longer than their thinner counterparts.  Furthermore, with the addition of glass fiber, this will provide extra durability.

The di Oro Living Pro Silicone Baking Mat is BPA free and FDA approved.  Additionally, to keep things safe, this silicone baking mat can handle temperatures from -40 degrees Fahrenheit to 480 degrees Fahrenheit.  This means you can freeze this silicone mat and you can bake just about anything.

This silicone baking mat is stain resistant and warp resistant.  And, of course, it is non-stick and dishwasher safe.  So, cleanup is a breeze.

Lastly, the di Oro Living Pro Silicone Baking Mat comes in a 2-pack and measures 16.5 inches long and 11.625 wide.  And, these mats come with a silicone snap band storage system where you can roll these mats up and secure them for storing.

Pros:

The di Oro Living Pro Silicone Baking Mats gets high reviews for quality and for being non stick.  Consumers rave about how cookies slide right off of these mats.

In addition, consumers love how well these mats cleanup.

Cons:

There’s not much bad you can say about these mats.  Furthermore, the lack of negative reviews speaks volumes.

However, our job is to find something negative.  So, if you’re looking for a silicone mat that has measurements, these mats are lacking a display of measurements.

Sili Bake The Original Silicone Pastry Baking Mat with Measurements

Sili Bake The Original Silicone Pastry Baking Mat with Measurements

This next pick for best silicone baking mat displays the highly desirable measurements.  These measurements include rulers in centimeters and inches which line all four sides of the mat.  In addition, the center of the mat has pie measurements from 5 inches to 10 inches.

Furthermore, The Original Silicone Pastry Baking Mat by Sili Bake displays weight, oven temperature and liquid measurement conversions.  And, that’s not all.  The front of this mat displays a delicious sugar cookie recipe and a pie dough recipe.

This silicone baking mat is constructed of food grade silicone.  This silicone is nontoxic, FDA approved and BPA free.

The Original Silicone Pastry Baking Mat by Sili Bake is safe to use at a temperature of up to 450 degrees Fahrenheit.  In addition to using it in the oven, this silicone mat is also safe to use in the freezer.  And, can we say dishwasher?  Yes, this mat is dishwasher safe.

This silicone baking mat measures 25 inches long by 15 inches wide.  And, it is 0.4 millimeters thin.  So, if you’re looking for a thin silicone baking mat, this is one to consider.

Lastly, once you’re finished baking, The Original Silicone Pastry Baking Mat by Sili Bake rolls up and fits inside a reusable protective case for easy storing.

Pros:

This silicone baking mat has just about everything you need for baking, including the recipes and the measurements.  If only it came with the flour, sugar and eggs, though.  However, that might be asking for too much.

In addition, this silicone baking mat will always lay flat, no matter if it’s been rolled up for the past year.

Cons:

This mat is very thin at 0.4 millimeters.  So, it can be rather floppy and not as durable as some of our other picks.  However, sometimes a thin silicone mat is a baker’s preference.  So, what works for one, may not work for another and vice versa.

 

Silchef Silicone 3 Piece Non Stick Baking Mats

Silchef Silicone 3 Piece Non Stick Baking Mats

Silicone mats are like potato chips.  You can’t have just one.  So, it’s a great consideration to go for a pack of baking mats.

The Silchef Silicone 3 Piece Non Stick Baking Mats comes with 2 half-sheet mats and a 1/4-sheet liner.  The half-sheet mats will line standard baking trays, while the 1/4-sheet liner will fit a baking tray intended for a toaster oven.  However, with these mats, you can mix and match all sorts of different ways.  For example, you can use a half-sheet mat with the 1/4-sheet liner for a batch of cookies.  Of course, depending on the amount of cookies you will be baking.

These silicone baking mats are nontoxic, BPA approved, FDA approved and LFGB approved.  Therefore, these mats are approved by both the US and German food handling laws.

And, the Silchef Silicone 3 Piece Non Stick Baking Mats are 1 millimeter thick.  So, these mats will be more durable and last longer than their thinner counterparts.

These professional-grade silicone baking mats are constructed of silicone-coated fiberglass mesh.  The fiberglass mesh will allow for better airflow and even heat distribution.

The Silchef Silicone 3 Piece Non Stick Baking Mats can reach temperatures as high as 484 degrees Fahrenheit and as low as -40 degrees Fahrenheit.  This means you can go from the oven, to the freezer and to the dishwasher without transferring any toxins.

Finally, the 2 half-sheet mats measure 16.5 inches long and 11.625 inches wide.  And, the 1/4-sheet liner measures 11.5 inches long and 8.5 inches wide.

Pros:

These are one of the highest reviewed silicone mats on our list with thousands of consumers raving about these mats.  And, more specifically, they rave about how non stick they are and how well they clean up.

Cons:

While these mats do have rave reviews, there are a good amount of consumers who state that these mats don’t last very long.  And, after a few months of use, they’ve experienced some heavy discoloration.

 

Silpat Premium Non-Stick Silicone Baking Mat

Silpat Premium Non-Stick Silicone Baking Mat

Ever dreamt of being a French pastry extraordinaire?  Well, here’s your chance to practice with a high-quality, French silicone baking mat.  Furthermore, this company claims they are the originators of the non-stick baking mat.  So, looks like it’s a win-win.

The Silpat Premium Non-Stick Silicone Baking Mat is made of food-grade silicone with a fiberglass mesh.  This fiberglass mesh will help improve airflow and promote even heat distribution.  Furthermore, this fiberglass mesh will increase longevity since it increases the durability of the baking mat.

This pick for best silicone baking mat is FDA, NSF and Kosher certified.  It is also nontoxic and BPA free.

The Silpat Premium Non-Stick Silicone Baking Mat is safe to use between -40 degrees Fahrenheit and 482 degrees Fahrenheit.  Therefore, you can feel free to bake at your luxury and use in the freezer when it entails.  Furthermore, this baking mat is dishwasher safe.

Lastly, this silicone baking mat measures 16.5 inches long and 11.625 inches wide.  And, with this measurement, it works great for a pan that’s 18 inches long and 13 inches wide.

Pros:

According to chefs, this silicone baking mat is the gold standard in professional kitchens, bakeries and patisseries.  Furthermore, when cared for properly, most consumers found that these baking mats lasted for years.

Cons:

There are quite a bit of reviews from consumers stating they received knockoffs.  However, we did our investigative work and this is the real McCoy.

KITZINI Silicone Baking Mat Set of 2

KITZINI Silicone Baking Mat Set of 2

This pick for best silicone baking mat is .75 millimeters thick.  So, while it’s not the thickest mat on our list, it still has a decent thickness which will hold up nicely.

The KITZINI Silicone Baking Mat comes in a set of 2 which measure 16.5 inches long and 11.625 inches wide.  And, these are sized to fit standard half sheet baking pans.

These silicone baking sheets are made with food grade silicone with a fiber glass core.  This fiber glass core promotes durability and longevity.  In addition, it will help to keep the surface evenly heated.

The KITZINI Silicone Baking Mat can withstand temperatures of up to 450 degrees Fahrenheit and temperatures as low as -40 degrees Fahrenheit.  This temperature range makes these mats safe for the oven, as well as, the freezer.

Finally, and perhaps most importantly, these mats are BPA free and FDA approved.

Pros:

The KITZINI Silicone Baking Mats get high ratings for how non stick they are and how easy they are to clean.

Cons:

Like most silicone baking mats, they tend to leave a greasy film after baking.  And, sometimes it’s hard to remove.  That being said, some consumers don’t like how greasy these feel after use.

 

Folksy Super Kitchen Non-Slip Silicone Pastry Mat

Folksy Super Kitchen Non-Slip Silicone Pastry Mat

This pick for best silicone baking mat is a pie baker’s dream.  The Folksy Super Kitchen Non-Slip Silicone Pastry Mat displays pie crust measurements from 5 inches to 16 inches.  And, this makes it easy to roll out your dough for the perfect pie crust.

This food grade silicone baking mat is BPA free, FDA certified and LFGB certified.  This means it complies with the food handling laws of the US and Germany.

The Folksy Super Kitchen Non-Slip Silicone Pastry Mat is 0.7 millimeters thick.  And, while this isn’t the thickest mat on our list, it’s not the thinnest, either.  Therefore, if you’re looking for an in between, this is a great mat to consider.

This silicone baking mat is made with high quality silicone with a fiberglass mesh.  This fiberglass mesh will transfer heat evenly and ensures the durability of the mat.  Furthermore, the fiberglass mesh promotes airflow.

The Folksy Super Kitchen Non-Slip Silicone Pastry Mat can handle temperatures from -30 degrees Fahrenheit to a maximum of 470 degrees Fahrenheit.  And, this mat is freezer and dishwasher safe.

Lastly, this silicone baking mat measures 28 inches long and 20 inches thick.  Therefore, if you’re looking for an extra-large sized silicone baking mat, this is definitely one to consider.

Pros:

The size of this is amazing.  And, it’s not going to make you feel cramped or restricted.

Furthermore, it has a nice thickness to it.  It’s not too thick, nor is it too thin.  Just right.

Finally, consumers state that this mat is skid resistant which makes for a great platform for rolling out dough.  And, it’s non stick and easy to clean as advertised.

Cons:

The major con of this mat is it doesn’t fit standard sized baking sheets and it is also larger than standard sized restaurant baking sheets.  Therefore, for the majority of us, this mat would best be used on the countertop for prepping ingredients.

best hollywood lighted makeup mirror

Best Hollywood Lighted Vanity Mirror

Lights, glamour and makeup!  And this is what best describes what these mirrors are all about.  So, if you’re looking for the best Hollywood lighted vanity mirror and you have your sights set on the stars, we are here to help you achieve this ultimate luxury.

Therefore, we set out to find the best Hollywood lighted vanity mirror on the market and found the top 5 most sought after Hollywood mirrors.  These mirrors are all made with quality craftsmanship and durability.  So, whichever mirror you choose, it’s going to last you through countless makeup sessions and wardrobe changes.

best hollywood lighted vanity mirror

Furthermore, when we reviewed these mirrors, there is one particular aspect we focused in on which is the reflection of the mirror.  A quality mirror is going to give you a near perfect reflection.  A cheaper mirror tends to reflect similar to a funny mirror you will see at the local amusement park.  And, there’s no glamour with these types of mirror.  Very simply, they create body disphoria.  Therefore, it is crucial to our mind-set that we see ourselves through the reflection of a quality mirror.

So, how do you ensure you’re picking out a quality reflection?  Well, according to Apartment Therapy, the best mirrors are ones that are not bent or warped.  And, when you purchase a thicker mirror, it will be less prone to distortion.

That being said, our picks for best Hollywood lighted vanity mirror are made with thick plated glass that will most reveal our true selves.

In addition, these mirrors are all lined with the traditional Hollywood bulbs, which are strategically placed to prevent shadows.  And, this is the ultimate environment for perfect makeup application.  

Finally, each one of these mirrors offer different characteristics.  So, if you’re looking for audio capabilities, you may want to focus in on the picks that offer bluetooth capability and speakers.  If you’re looking for a mirror that memorizes your lighting specifications, you may want to focus in on the picks that have memory capability.  

Happy hunting!

 

Best Hollywood Lighted Vanity Mirror

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Chende Frameless Hollywood Lighted Makeup Vanity Mirror
Chende
Frameless Hollywood Lighted Makeup Vanity Mirror
Stainless Steel
Wood
Rotary Dimmer Switch
Electrical Outlet
LED Bulbs
31.5'' x 2.64" x 23.62''
Diamond X TableTop Hollywood Vanity Audio Mirror
Diamond X
TableTop Hollywood Vanity Audio Mirror
Dimmer Switch
Bluetooth
Speakers
LED Bulbs
35.43" x 10.23" x 23.62"
Aoleen Frameless Hollywood Makeup Lighted Vanity Mirror
Aoleen
Frameless Hollywood Makeup Lighted Vanity Mirror
Stainless Steel
Dimmer Switch
Electrical Outlets
LED Bulbs
19.69" x 2.36" x 25.6"
ReignCharm Hollywood Vanity Bluetooth Mirror
ReignCharm
Hollywood Vanity Bluetooth Mirror
Wood
Dimmer Switch
Bluetooth
Speakers
Electrical Outlets
USB Ports
LED Bulbs
22" x 9.5" x 29"
Geek-House Lighted Vanity Hollywood Style Mirror
Geek-House
Lighted Vanity Hollywood Style Mirror
Varnished Tinplate
Touch Control
Memory Function
Dimmer
10x Magnification
Adjustable
LED Bulbs
14.5" × 3.5" × 18.9"

 

Best Hollywood Lighted Vanity Mirror

 

Chende Frameless Hollywood Lighted Makeup Vanity Mirror

Chende Frameless Hollywood Lighted Makeup Vanity Mirror

This first pick for best Hollywood lighted vanity mirror is one of the most popular mirrors on the market and this is why it sits at the number one spot.

The Chende Frameless Hollywood Lighted Makeup Vanity Mirror is made with a stainless steel and wood frame.  And, stainless steel is known to be resistant to rust and corrosion while both stainless steel and wood make for an extremely durable frame.

This Hollywood lighted makeup mirror features 12 strategically placed LED bulbs.  These soft-lighted bulbs are situated in a way where shadows are eliminated and offers the most ideal lighting for makeup application.  Furthermore, this mirror will also allow for the most ideal lighting when used during the day or in the dark.  And, these lights are dimmable with a turn of the on/off rotary dimmer switch.

The Chende Frameless Hollywood Lighted Makeup Vanity Mirror comes with a US standard plug which can be used to charge your phone or for using the blow dryer or hair straightener.

This Hollywood lighted vanity mirror measures 31.5 inches long, 2.64 inches wide, 23.62 inches tall and weighs roughly 40 pounds.  And, it comes in your choice of colors or styles:  Frameless, White Frame or Black Frame.

Lastly, if you’re set on the quality of this mirror like we are but are looking for a different shape or size, Chende has plenty of options to choose from.  You can take a look at their different styles of Hollywood mirrors here.

Pros:

Like we stated previously, this mirror is one of the most sought after Hollywood mirrors on the market.  And, for good reason.  It is very well constructed, reflects beautifully and is absolutely gorgeous.

In addition, this mirror is very easy to assemble and all you need is a screwdriver.  However, it is on the heavy side, so it is advisable you have an extra person on hand to help.

Cons:

If you’re looking to mount this mirror on the wall, it is not mountable.  It is rather heavy at approximately 40 pounds and mounting hardware is not included.

Furthermore, a couple of consumers have stated that the lights will go out sometimes if you use too much electricity with the built-in electrical outlet.  So, be sure when using this outlet, keep the voltage low to avoid this or just limit the time using certain electrical items like a blow dryer.

Lastly, a few consumers received cracked mirrors upon arrival.  And, this does happen, especially with a heavier mirror such as this.  It’s just such a let down and a hassle, though.

 

 

Diamond X TableTop Hollywood Vanity Audio Mirror

Diamond X TableTop Hollywood Vanity Audio Mirror

This pick for best Hollywood lighted vanity mirror is very similar to the Chende above, however, it has 14 bulbs instead of 12.  In addition, the bulbs are placed on all four sides of the mirror, giving you an even more shadowless palette to work with.

The Diamond X TableTop Hollywood Vanity Mirror is constructed of MDF material.  According to Addicted 2 Decorating, MDF is similar to particle board but much denser and much stronger.  And, it’s so dense that it doesn’t reveal wood grain or voids.  Therefore, this is a very durable material for a Hollywood vanity mirror.

This lighted Hollywood mirror comes with bluetooth technology and 2-50 Watt waterproof transducer speakers.  So, you can simply play your favorite pre-funk song by enabling the bluetooth through your phone.

And, like we stated above, the Diamond X TableTop Hollywood Vanity Mirror comes with 14 LED bulbs which all work via dimmer switch located on the right hand side of the mirror.

This Hollywood lighted vanity mirror measures 31.49 inches long, 2.16 inches deep and 23.62 inches tall.  In addition, the included base measures 35.43 inches long and 10.23 inches deep.  And, with this mirror, you have your option of purchasing a warm light mirror or a daylight mirror.

Lastly, if you like this particular mirror but are looking for a different style, Diamond X offers a multitude to choose from.  You can browse through those gorgeous picks here.

Pros:

This pick for best Hollywood lighted vanity mirror is very well-built and sturdy.  Furthermore, it’s sleek, modern and has luxury written all over it.

In addition, this mirror features bulbs on all sides which achieves the ultimate palette for makeup application.

Lastly, can we say music?  Yep, time to tune in to your favorite song to get the party started.

Cons:

While this mirror appears to have it all, it is lacking a couple of options some of the other mirrors have.  For instance, it doesn’t come with an electrical outlet or a USB charger.  However, it does come with music.  So, choose your electives wisely.

 

Aoleen Frameless Hollywood Makeup Lighted Vanity Mirror

Aoleen Frameless Hollywood Makeup Lighted Vanity Mirror

This pick is a great one for those who would like the option of a vanity mirror or one that can be mounted to the wall.  The Aoleen Frameless Hollywood Makeup Lighted Vanity Mirror comes with a detachable base and comes ready to mount.

This Hollywood lighted vanity mirror is constructed of stainless steel.  And, stainless steel is resistant to rust, corrosion and is known to be durable and sturdy.  Therefore, this is a great mirror to consider if you will be using it in the bathroom.

The Aoleen Frameless Hollywood Makeup Lighted Vanity Mirror comes with 12 dimmable LED bulbs with 2 extra bulbs thrown in for good measure.  These bulbs offer a soft and warm white light which will help accentuate your reflection for the most desirable outcome.

This Hollywood lighted mirror features a rotating dimmer switch which comes with a memory function.  Therefore, it will remember your last used dimmer setting for your next makeup application.

Finally, the Aoleen Frameless Hollywood Makeup Lighted Vanity Mirror comes in your choice of sizes.  The one pictured above measures 19.69 inches long, 2.36 inches deep and 25.6 inches tall with the base included.  The other option to choose from is a larger size at 31.5 inches long, 2.36 inches deep and 25.6 inches tall.

Pros:

This mirror gives you the advantage of placing it on a vanity or mounting it to the wall.  Furthermore, this mirror is easy to install.

Lastly, these mirrors can be pretty spend-y.  So, this particular mirror is set at a lower price than some of the competing mirrors on the market.

Cons:

The Aoleen Frameless Hollywood Makeup Lighted Vanity Mirror is set at a decent price and is good quality.  However, if you’re not on a budget, we would play it safe and go with one of our picks above as they have more consistent reviews from a lot of happy consumers.

 

ReignCharm Hollywood Vanity Bluetooth Mirror

ReignCharm Hollywood Vanity Bluetooth Mirror

This particular mirror is the most technologically savvy mirror on our list.  The ReignCharm Hollywood Vanity Mirror features bluetooth controlled dual audio speakers, dual USB outlets, dual power outlets and an LED display.  This LED display will inform you of the date, time and the temperature.

In addition, you can control the dual audio speakers with the touch control panel located beneath the LED display.  This touch control panel will also allow you to set the date and time.

The ReignCharm Hollywood Vanity Bluetooth Mirror is constructed with a resin wood frame.  And, according to The Chair Guys, resin wood is an overall better material to use than wood.  It’s more durable, resistant to impact and hides scratches well.

This pick for best Hollywood lighted vanity mirror features 12 LED bulbs and an adjustable dimmer control.  These bulbs are placed strategically around the mirror to ensure even lighting and to eliminate shadows.  Furthermore, for your safety, these light bulbs are cool to the touch.

The ReignCharm Hollywood Vanity Bluetooth Mirror allows you the capability to use it as a vanity mirror or a wall mounted mirror.  And, in order to achieve either of these, this mirror comes with a base, as well as, a wall mounting kit.

Finally, this mirror measures 22 inches long, 9.5 inches deep and 29 inches tall with the base.  And, if you want to check out some of their other styles of Hollywood mirrors, you can find them here.

Pros:

This pick for best Hollywood lighted vanity mirror is made with resin wood which will ensure its durability and longevity.

In addition, this mirror has dual outlets and dual USB ports.  So, if you’re going to be using multiple devices and accessories while you’re getting ready, this is a mirror to consider.

Cons:

It’s hard to find anything bad about this mirror.  However, at the time of researching this mirror and writing this post, there are a couple of handfuls of positive reviews.  Whereas, some of our other picks have hundreds.  So, how this mirror functions in the long run has yet to be determined.

 

Geek-House Lighted Vanity Hollywood Style Mirror

Geek-House Lighted Vanity Hollywood Style Mirror

This last pick for best Hollywood lighted vanity mirror is a great option if you’re set on getting one of these highly sought after mirrors but you’re on a serious budget.

The Geek-House Lighted Vanity Hollywood Style Mirror is constructed with varnished tinplate metal.  And, put simply by Wikipedia, tinplate consists of sheets of steel coated with a thin layer of tin.

This Hollywood style mirror offers a 180 degree adjustable tilt.  This will help to ensure every angle is perfected.

This Hollywood style mirror comes with 12 LED bulbs which offer over 50,000 hours of light.  And, these bulbs can be controlled via the smart touch control system.  In addition, with these controls, you can switch the bulbs from a warm yellow light to a white light.  You can also adjust the brightness and it will hold this setting for your next use.

The Geek-House Lighted Vanity Hollywood Style Mirror offers a 180 degree adjustable tilt.  This will help to ensure every angle is perfected.

Lastly, this Hollywood style lighted vanity mirror measures 14.5 inches long, 3.5 inches deep and 18.9 inches tall.  And, it comes in your choice of colors:  White, Black or Pink.

Pros:

This mirror offers a whole lot for a whole little.  You have the LED bulbs, the capabilities of a dimmer, the ability to switch from white to warm lighting and a much desirable tilt.

Furthermore, this Hollywood style mirror has a lot of rave reviews.  So, they’re doing something right.

Cons:

Some consumers found the mirror to be on the small side.

Furthermore, the lights are closer together than some of the other Hollywood mirrors on the market.  This makes it a little harder to see clearly.  However, most consumers seem very happy with their purchase.

best egg crate mattress topper

Best Egg Crate Mattress Topper

If you’re looking for a good night’s rest, look no further than these top 6 picks for best egg crate mattress topper.  These mattress toppers are the most beloved and highest rated egg crate mattress toppers amongst consumers.

Now, besides being the highest rated egg crate mattress toppers on the market, what makes these stand out from the rest?  Well, first and foremost, each one of these egg crate mattress toppers are made of memory foam.  And, once your body comes in contact with memory foam, it takes an extraordinary amount of pressure away from the aches and pains.  Furthermore, memory foam will mold to the contours of your body, creating a near-perfect match for ultimate comfort.

And, according to Explain That Stuff, memory foam is technically called viscoelastic.  And when sleeping on viscoelastic, your weight is spread more evenly and pressure is relieved at the shoulders and hips.  In addition, Explain That Stuff states, that theoretically, when sleeping on viscoelastic, your entire body is always perfectly supported and your spine remains straight.

best egg crate mattress topper

So, does this sound like a great night’s sleep?  It does to us.

Furthermore, a few of the picks on our list for best egg crate mattress topper stand out from the others in that it they have cooling technology.  This cooling technology will help keep you cool throughout the night and help to eliminate night sweats.  Therefore, if you’re prone to getting hot during the night, you may want to zone in on these picks.

Lastly, in order to pick the best egg crate mattress topper for you, you will want to consider the width of the mattress topper.  If you’re using an uncomfortable mattress, we recommend a thicker egg crate mattress topper.  If you sleep on a comfortable mattress but want the extra benefits of an egg crate mattress topper, you may want to consider an egg crate mattress topper that is on the thinner side.

 

Best Egg Crate Mattress Topper

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Beautyrest 3-inch Sculpted Gel Memory Foam Mattress Topper
Beautyrest
3-inch Sculpted Gel Memory Foam Mattress Topper
Memory Foam
Cooling Gel
Ventilation
Twin
Queen
King
Milliard 2-Inch Egg Crate Ventilated Memory Foam Mattress Topper
Milliard
2-Inch Egg Crate Ventilated Memory Foam Mattress Topper
Memory Foam
Ventilation
Twin
Full
Queen
King
LUCID 2-inch 5-Zone Lavender Memory Foam Mattress Topper
LUCID
2-inch 5-Zone Lavender Memory Foam Mattress Topper
Memory Foam
Ventilation
Lavendar Scented
Twin
Twin XL
Full
Full XL
Queen
King
California King
Linenspa 3 Inch Convoluted Gel Swirl Memory Foam Mattress Topper
Linenspa
3 Inch Convoluted Gel Swirl Memory Foam Mattress Topper
Memory Foam
Ventilation
Twin
Twin XL
Full
Queen
King
California King
Best Price Mattress Egg Crate Memory Foam Mattress Topper
Best Price Mattress
Egg Crate Memory Foam Mattress Topper
Memory Foam
Suspension
Lavendar Scented
Twin
Full
Queen
King
Sleep Philosophy Flexapedic Gel Memory Foam Mattress Protector
Sleep Philosophy
Flexapedic Gel Memory Foam Mattress Protector
Memory Foam
Cooling Gel
Antimicrobial
Twin
Full
Queen
King
California King

 

Best Egg Crate Mattress Topper

 

Beautyrest 3-inch Sculpted Gel Memory Foam Mattress Topper

Beautyrest 3-inch Sculpted Gel Memory Foam Mattress Topper

Our first pick for best egg crate mattress topper has cooling technology which works by regulating your body temperature.  This technology, which uses rejuvenating cooling gel, will help keep you cooler throughout the night and help to eliminate night sweats.

The Beautyrest Sculpted Gel Memory Foam Mattress Topper is constructed of 3 inches of memory foam.  So, if you are looking for a mattress topper that will help mask the uncomfortable state of your mattress, this is one of the thickest mattress toppers on our list.

And, as indicated by the product name, this egg crate mattress topper is made of memory foam.  This memory foam will ease pain and tension in your muscles and joints.  Furthermore, it will help to disperse your weight evenly, which helps to align the spine.

The Beautyrest 3-inch Sculpted Gel Memory Foam Mattress Topper is available in Twin, Queen or King sizes.  Furthermore, it comes with a bonus sleep mask and earplugs.

Finally, before using this product, it is recommended that you lay it out flat until it returns to its original shape.

Pros:

This pick for best egg crate mattress topper is great for those who tend to get too hot during the night.  Like we stated above, it helps to regulate the body temperature and will help eliminate night sweats.

Furthermore, if you’re looking for a thick egg crate mattress pad, this one is a whopping 3 inches thick.  And, this will give you the maximum amount of cushion.

Cons:

Some consumers feel the foam is rather soft.  While this may work great for some, others may need something a bit firmer.

So, if you’re looking for an egg crate mattress topper that is on the firmer side, we suggest going with the Best Price Mattress Egg Crate Memory Foam Mattress Topper or the Sleep Philosophy Flexapedic Gel Memory Foam Mattress Protector.  

 

Milliard 2-Inch Egg Crate Ventilated Memory Foam Mattress Topper

Milliard 2-Inch Egg Crate Ventilated Memory Foam Mattress Topper

This next pick for best egg crate mattress topper offers 2 inches of memory foam.  So, if you’re working with a comfortable and supportive mattress, this may be one to consider.

The Milliard 2-Inch Egg Crate Ventilated Memory Foam Mattress Topper features open cell technology and ventilation channels which introduces air flow while you sleep.  Furthermore, this ventilation will help to regulate your body temperature, keeping you cooler at night.

This egg crate mattress topper is made of 100% memory foam which is hypoallergenic and anti-microbial.  And, this is especially great when outfitting a child’s room.

Furthermore, the Milliard Egg Crate Memory Foam Mattress Topper is CertiPUR-US certified.  This means this is an eco-friendly pick which is made without ozone depleters, made without mercury, lead and other heavy metals, made without formaldehyde, made without flame retardants and made without phthalates.

Finally, this egg crate mattress topper comes in the following sizes:  Twin, Full, Queen or King.

Pros:

The Milliard Egg Crate Memory Foam Mattress Topper is CertiPUR-US certified, so this pick eliminates a lot of toxins that other mattress toppers possess.

Cons:

Some consumers say this mattress topper has a potent smell.  Our advice is to air it out for a bit before using.

In addition, one consumer stated that the queen size was a little on the small size in comparison to their queen bed.

 

LUCID 2-inch 5-Zone Lavender Memory Foam Mattress Topper

LUCID 2-inch 5-Zone Lavender Memory Foam Mattress Topper

While this isn’t necessarily an egg crate mattress topper, nevertheless, it offers amazing support and it would be a travesty if we left this off of our list.

The LUCID 2-inch Lavender Memory Foam Mattress Topper features 5-zones of comfort strategically targeting different areas of the body.  And, when these areas are targeted, this will help maximize your comfort level and help prevent tossing and turning.

Furthermore, this egg crate mattress topper features ventilation which helps to increase airflow and will help keep you cool throughout the night.  In addition, this airflow will help to eliminate night sweats.

The LUCID 2-inch 5-Zone Memory Foam Mattress Topper is infused with lavender.  And, according to Organic Facts, Lavender induces sleep and is a natural treatment for insomnia.

Lastly, this mattress topper comes in your choice of sizes:  Twin, Twin XL, Full, Full XL, Queen, King and California King.

Pros:

This pick for best egg crate mattress topper comes in just about every size imaginable.  So, the chances of you getting the perfect fit is very high.

Furthermore, this mattress topper has high comfortability ratings amongst consumers.

Cons:

It does come lavender-scented and this isn’t for everyone.  Some people love scents, while others may have various reactions towards it.

In addition, at first, the lavender scent is rather strong.  So, be sure to air this mattress topper out well before use.

 

Linenspa 3 Inch Convoluted Gel Swirl Memory Foam Mattress Topper

Linenspa 3 Inch Convoluted Gel Swirl Memory Foam Mattress Topper

This is another thick egg crate mattress topper.  The Linenspa Convoluted Gel Swirl Memory Foam Mattress Topper is 3 inches thick, however, this is also available in a 2 inch.

This egg crate mattress topper features open cell memory foam which is breathable and will help to keep you cool at night.  Furthermore, this open cell technology will help to eliminate night sweats.

The Linenspa 3 Inch Convoluted Gel Swirl Memory Foam Mattress Topper comes in your choice of sizes:  Twin, Twin XL, Full, Queen, King and California King.

And, it’s important to note that this egg crate mattress topper is true to size.  Therefore, it will lay flush along with the sides of the mattress.

Pros:

This mattress topper has high ranks for comfortability and support.  In addition, many consumers say this helped relieve their joint pain.

Furthermore, this mattress topper comes in a 2 inch and a 3 inch.  So, if you’re already working with a comfortable mattress, we suggest going with the 2 inch.  If you’re working with an uncomfortable mattress or an older mattress, we suggest going with the 3 inch.

Lastly, unlike other mattress toppers, this pick doesn’t contain a potent, chemical smell.  It does have a slight smell, but nothing near what other mattress toppers possess.

Cons:

Some consumers state that this mattress topper makes them hotter at night.  However, it’s important to note that some consumers notice a cooling effect.  Body temperature regulation is a tricky business, so what works for one may not work for another.

 

Best Price Mattress Egg Crate Memory Foam Mattress Topper

Best Price Mattress Egg Crate Memory Foam Mattress Topper

This next pick for best egg crate foam mattress topper is constructed of 3 inches of memory foam.  Therefore, if you want the maximum amount of body-forming comfort, this is a mattress topper to consider.

The Best Price Mattress Egg Crate Memory Foam Mattress Topper is CertPUR-US certified.  And, like we stated above, this means this mattress topper is made without the following toxins:  ozone depleters, mercury, lead, formaldehyde, flame retardants and phthalates.

This egg crate mattress topper is infused with lavender which will help to induce sleep and help relax your body and your mind for a full night’s rest.

Lastly, the Best Price Mattress Egg Crate Memory Foam Mattress Topper comes in your choice of sizes:  Twin, Full, Queen or King.

Pros:

This is another fantastic mattress topper that is CertPUR-US certified.  And, consumers state it doesn’t have any chemical odor.

Furthermore, this mattress topper has high ratings for comfortability amongst consumers.

Cons:

Some consumers find this mattress topper to be on the firm side and a little too firm.  However, most consumers found this egg crate mattress topper to be comfortable, yet, supportive.

 

Sleep Philosophy Flexapedic Gel Memory Foam Mattress Protector

Sleep Philosophy Flexapedic Gel Memory Foam Mattress Protector

Our final pick is infused with cooling gel to help keep your body regulated throughout the night.  And, thankfully, this will help to eliminate those horrendous night sweats.

The Sleep Philosophy Flexapedic Gel Memory Foam Mattress Protector is constructed of 3 inches of memory foam.  Therefore, this pick is one to consider if you’re working with a not so comfortable mattress.

This egg crate foam mattress is naturally resistant to dust mites and is antimicrobial.  So, it makes a great topper for everyone, however, for those suffering from allergies, this is a God-send.

Finally, the Sleep Philosophy Flexapedic Gel Memory Foam Mattress Protector comes in your choice of sizes:  Twin, Full, Queen, King or California King.

Pros:

If you’re looking for a firm, yet, supportive mattress topper, this is great option.

Furthermore, it is also antimicrobial and resistant to bed mites.

Cons:

Out of all of the picks on our list, this one doesn’t have quite so many reviews.  So, it’s a bit hard to gage how well this egg crate mattress topper holds up.  However, according to the reviews on hand, so far so great.

Best Easel

Best Easel for Painting

When searching for the best easel for painting, there are a few things to look for.  First and foremost, stability is key.  And, this goes pretty much without saying.  However, we will go ahead and say it.  A stable easel will give you total control over your painting.  With a wobbly easel, you don’t have so much control.  Although, it might make for an interesting painting.

The next thing to look for when choosing the best easel is size.  If you typically work with a smaller canvas, a smaller sized easel will do you just fine.  If you typically work on a large canvas, a large-sized easel is imperative.

Best Easel

Then, you will want to decide which easel is right for you.  And, when we reviewed the best easels on the market, we took into account all the different scenarios that can occur when you are a creative spirit.

So, will you be using your easel strictly at home, in the studio or in the classroom?  Or, will you be taking your easel to the highest peak or to the nearest waterfall?  And, we have a few of picks on our list for best easel that will grant you the freedom of a stagnant easel, as well as, one up for your adventures.

Therefore, we have three categories on our list for best easel:

 

Best Standing Easel

The standing easel is an easel that is constructed for use at home, in the studio or in the classroom.  Therefore, if these are the places you will be using your easel, you may want to focus on this category.  However, we do have one pick on this list that will grant you more freedom.  And, this is the classic A-frame easel which can be transported quite easily.  We don’t recommend hiking with this particular easel but it is easier to transport from place to place.

Furthermore, there are 2 different types of standing easels.  One is the H-frame easel and the other is the classic A-frame easel we mentioned above.  So, to get a better idea of which easel would be the best easel for painting, we reached out to internationally renowned artist Tommmervik.  And, he reiterated that it was really all about personal preference.  However, his preference is the H-frame easel because it garners him more stability.  Furthermore, he prefers to paint at a 90 degree angle and the H-frame easel has a better design to accommodate that particular angle.

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Jack Richeson Lyptus Wood Dulce Easel
Jack Richeson
Lyptus Wood Dulce Easel
H-Frame
Lyptus Wood
Laminated Quad Base
Locking System
Adjustable
Foldable
21" x 24" x 95"
Mont Marte Floor Easel with Tilt
Mont Marte
Floor Easel with Tilt
A-Frame
Beech Wood
Artist Ledge
Adjustable
Foldable
37.5" x 22" x 94.5"
US Art Supply Malibu Extra Large H-Frame Deluxe Adjustable Wood Studio Easel
US Art Supply
Malibu Extra Large H-Frame Deluxe Adjustable Wood Studio Easel
A-Frame
Beech Wood
Artist Ledge
Locking System
Rolling Casters
Adjustable
37.5" x 22" x 94.5"

 

Best Tabletop Easel

The tabletop easel is for those who will be painting on a table or a desk.  And, these easels are highly transportable.  You can even take them on a 3-day hike if you so choose.  However, the one concern here is you will want to find stable ground in order to create your masterpiece.

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Art Alternatives Ravenna Table Easel with Drawer
Art Alternatives
Ravenna Table Easel with Drawer
Hardwood
Artist Drawer
Adjustable
Handle
16.3" x 17.8" x 27"
US Art Supply Tall Tabletop Adjustable H-Frame Wood Studio Artist Easel
US Art Supply
Tall Tabletop Adjustable H-Frame Wood Studio Artist Easel
Beech Wood
Rubber Feet
Adjustable
13.5" x 14.5" x 53"
Mont Marte Table Easel Tabletop
Mont Marte
Table Easel Tabletop
Pine Wood
Adjustable
37.5" x 22" x 94.5"

 

Best Portable Easel

Portable easels can be used at the park, in the Grand Teton or on the streets of Paris.  The portable easel packs up in a small box and extends to a full size easel.  So, if you are versed in going from the studio to the river, this may be the easel for you.

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
US Art Supply Coronado French Style Easel & Sketchbox
US Art Supply
Coronado French Style Easel & Sketchbox
Beech Wood
Leather Handle
Adjustable Strap
Wooden Palette
Artist Drawer
Adjustable
28.5" X 45" X 71"
Bianyo Traveling French Style Wooden Art Easel & Sketchbox
Bianyo
Traveling French Style Wooden Art Easel & Sketchbox
Beech Wood
Telescoping Handle
Shoulder Strap
Wooden Palette
Artist Drawer
Adjustable
13.5" x 14.5" x 53"
Qinuker Portable Art Easel for Painting
Qinuker
Portable Art Easel for Painting
Paulownia Wood
Alluminum Alloy
Leather Handle
Adjustable Strap
Wooden Palette
Artist Drawer
Adjustable
22.9" x 16.7" x 68"

 

Now that you should have an idea of what easel is best suited for you, we have reviewed the best easels in each of the following categories:  Standing Easel, Tabletop Easel and Portable Easel.  These easels have the highest positive reviews amongst artists and are made of the highest quality.

In addition, these easels range from different price points so there is an easel for everyone.

 

Best Standing Easel

 

Jack Richeson Lyptus Wood Dulce Easel

Jack Richeson Lyptus Wood Dulce Easel

Our first pick for best easel is an H-style easel made of Lyptus hardwood.  The Jack Richeson Dulce Easel is constructed of solid Lyptus which comes from eucalyptus trees in South America.  And, because eucalyptus trees are relatively fast growing trees, this easel makes for an eco-friendly choice.

Furthermore, according to Wood Magazine, Lyptus wood is on par with Maple and Mahogany in terms of the hardness and grain.  So, this easel is made of material meant to last.

The Jack Richeson Lyptus Wood Dulce Easel measures 21 inches in length, 24 inches wide and 95 inches tall when adjusted to its tallest height.  And, when adjusted to its tallest height, this easel can accommodate a canvas 7 feet tall.  When adjusted to its smallest length, this easel can accommodate the smallest painting imaginable.  Furthermore, this easel has a weight capacity of 38 to 48 pounds.

This pick for best easel features a laminated quad base for extra support and stability.  In addition, it has a slide and lock adjustment system which will help secure the canvas.  In addition, if you’re looking for an easel that tilts, this easel tilts at approximately a 45 degree angle.  

Finally, this easel folds flat for easy storage and the occasional transport.

Pros:

If you’re looking for a high quality easel that’s going to last a while, this easel is a clear winner.  This pick for best easel is well-built with quality materials and the stability you get with this easel is unmatched.

Cons:

We wish this easel would come with casters to allow for easy movement around the studio.  However, it does slide rather easy.

 

Mont Marte Floor Easel with Tilt

Mont Marte Floor Easel with Tilt

This pick for best easel is the classic A-frame.  Therefore, like we stated above, because it is an A-frame easel, it is easier to transport.

The Mont Marte Floor Easel with Tilt is made of beech wood.  And, according to Wood Magazine, the benefits to beech wood is it’s hard and strong.  So, you’re looking at an easel that’s going to last you awhile.

This easel features durable steel fittings which will help with stability.  In addition, this easel has a center column which adjusts to conveniently hold your canvas in place.  And, you can also adjust the tilt backward or forward within the same center column.

The Mont Marte Floor Easel comes with an artist ledge for your paints and brushes.  This artist ledge is comfortably placed at the base of where the canvas rests.  Furthermore, this ledge is adjustable.

When this easel is fully extended, it measures 37.5 inches long, 22 inches wide and 94.5 inches tall.  If you want to use this easel in a seated position or if you want to purchase this for a child, it can adjust to as low as 14.5 inches.  In addition, this easel can accommodate a canvas up to 31 inches tall.

Finally, the Mont Marte Floor Easel is foldable for easy storage and transport.

Pros:

This is a well-built, quality easel.  Furthermore, it is highly adjustable for the little ones, as well as, the adults.

In addition, because this is an A-frame easel, it is much more transportable than the other standing easels on our list.

Cons:

This pick for best easel can be rather difficult to assemble.  Therefore, consumers recommend looking up a Youtube video to make your life easier.

 

US Art Supply Malibu Extra Large H-Frame Deluxe Adjustable Wood Studio Easel

US Art Supply Malibu Extra Large H-Frame Deluxe Adjustable Wood Studio Easel

Our last pick for best standing easel is another easel made of beech wood.  And, like we mentioned previously, beech wood is noted for being hard and strong.

The US Art Supply Malibu H-Frame Deluxe Adjustable Wood Studio Easel is one of the larger easels on the market and can extend to 139 inches tall.  However, if you’re interested in this particular brand and typically work with smaller canvases, you can find a less daunting easel here.

This easel features a quick and easy adjustment system which features four point knobs.  Furthermore, this easel will adjust with a backward tilt, as well as, a forward tilt.

The US Art Supply Wood Studio Easel comes with casters to help scoot you around the studio.  In addition, these casters feature a locking system which will help keep the easel stationary.

Finally, the total extended size of this easel is 27.5 inches long, 26 inches wide and 80 inches tall. 

Pros:

This easel comes with casters which makes for great mobility around the studio.

Furthermore, this easel is highly adjustable, and has the ability to adjust from both ends of the easel.

Cons:

Unlike our other picks for best standing easel, this easel does not fold flat.  So, forget about storing it or figuring out an easy, transportable solution.

In addition, while this easel will adjust to 139 inches tall, it will only adjust down to 26.5 inches from the floor.

 

Best Tabletop Easel

 

Art Alternatives Ravenna Table Easel with Drawer

Art Alternatives Ravenna Table Easel with Drawer

Our first pick for best tabletop easel is one that is highly transportable.  Not only for transporting the easel but transporting your paints and brushes as well.

The Art Alternatives Ravenna Table Easel with Drawer is made of seasoned hardwood.  Furthermore, it is fully adjustable from top to bottom and features a wide-ranging tilt.  However, if you’re looking to paint at a 90 degree angle, this easel will accommodate that as well.

This tabletop easel folds down easily for travel and also includes a convenient carrying handle.  In addition, this easel weighs approximately 7 pounds which is enough weight for a quality easel, yet light enough to carry with ease.

Finally, the Art Alternatives Ravenna Table Easel with Drawer measures 16.3 inches long, 17.8 inches wide and 27 inches tall when fully extended.   And, it can accommodate a canvas up to 34 inches tall.

Pros:

This is our favorite tabletop easel because of the drawer.  You can easily and conveniently transport your supplies and easel in one small package.

In addition, this easel is very well constructed and built to last.

Cons:

The drawer is placed on the right side.  While this is great news for the right-handers, it’s not so great for us left-handers.

 

US Art Supply Tall Tabletop Adjustable H-Frame Wood Studio Artist Easel

US Art Supply Tall Tabletop Adjustable H-Frame Wood Studio Artist Easel

This next pick for best tabletop easel is constructed of seasoned beech wood.  And, as we mentioned above, beech wood is noted for being hard and strong.

The US Art Supply Tall Tabletop Adjustable H-Frame Wood Studio Artist Easel features an adjustable knob system to easily adjust the height and angle.  And, this easel will allow for angle adjustments from a 90 degree angle all the way down until it’s flat.  However, if you’re looking for a forward tilt, you may want to check out the Art Alternatives Ravenna Table Easel with Drawer above.

The US Art Supply Tabletop Artist Easel measures 13.5 inches long, 14.5 inches deep and 33 inches tall when it is fully extended.  And, it can accommodate a canvas up to 26 inches tall.

Finally, this pick for best easel features rubber feet to protect the surface you’re working on and create a stable environment to paint with.

Pros:

The US Art Supply Tabletop Artist Easel is highly portable and folds flat for transport.

In addition, it is very well-built, adjusts fabulously and the rubber feet is a nice addition for stability.

Cons:

This tabletop easel doesn’t tilt forward.  So, like we mentioned above, you may want to check out the top pick on our list for best tabletop easel.

 

Mont Marte Table Easel Tabletop

Mont Marte Table Easel Tabletop

This Mont Marte Table Easel is a great option for those just getting their fingers wet or for those who paint occasionally.  That being said, this is as basic of an artist easel as you’re going to get.

This tabletop easel is made of seasoned pine and constructed with stainless brass-plated hinges and latches.  And, because it is made of pine, this easel is very lightweight and easy to transport.  Furthermore, because it is so lightweight and it folds flat, this is a great easel to take on an overnight backpacking trip.

The Mont Marte Table Easel measures 12 inches long, 16.1 inches wide and 23.6 inches tall when fully extended.  It can hold a canvas approximately 23 inches tall.  In addition, it adjusts to 7 different angles.

Pros:

This is a great beginners easel but can also work well for more seasoned artists in the right environment.  Like we mentioned above, since it is lightweight, this is a great backpacking companion.

Cons:

If you’re looking for an easel for some serious painting, you would be better off with an easel made with something other than pine.  Pine is known to be soft and to dent rather easily.

Furthermore, pine is a lightweight wood so stability is somewhat compromised.

 

Best Portable Easel

 

US Art Supply Coronado French Style Easel & Sketchbox

US Art Supply Coronado French Style Easel & Sketchbox

Our first pick for best portable easel is made of beech wood which is hard and strong.  In addition, this portable easel is constructed with brass hardware and comes with an adjustable shoulder strap and leather handle.

The US Art Supply Coronado French Style Easel & Sketchbox features a 12 inch sliding drawer with compartments to organize, store and transport your supplies.  In addition, it comes with an 11 by 18 inch removable wooden color palette.

This portable easel measure 28 inches long, 45 inches wide and 71 inches tall when fully extended.  When broken down, this easel measures 17 inches long, 6.5 inches wide and 22 inches long.  And, this easel can accommodate a canvas as large as 34 inches.

Finally, if you’re looking to transport wet canvas, this easel comes with brass hooks so you can transport the canvas without smudging it.

Pros:

The US Art Supply Coronado Easel & Sketchbox can be used in just about every scenario.  Take it from the studio, to the lake and to the tabletop.

Furthermore, the angle can be adjusted in either direction.  So, if you’re looking for a forward tilt, you’re in luck.

Cons:

Some consumers say the legs are stable and some consumers say they are wobbly.  However, since it needs to be assembled, make sure all of the screws are tightened securely.

 

Bianyo Traveling French Style Wooden Art Easel & Sketchbox

Bianyo Traveling French Style Wooden Art Easel & Sketchbox

The Bianyo Traveling French Style Wooden Art Easel & Sketchbox is absolutely gorgeous.  The craftsmanship alone is unspeakable and this easel will transport you back to the 15 century.

This pick for best easel is constructed of beech wood topped with an oiled walnut finish.  And, it is built with brass-plated hardware.  Furthermore, it comes with an artist cabinet to store paints, brushes and an included wooden palette.

The Bianyo Traveling Wooden Art Easel & Sketchbox is easy to set up and extends to 13.5 inches long, 14.5 inches wide and 53 inches tall.  Once it’s broken down, it measures 17 inches long, 9 inches wide and 22 inches tall.  And, it features a shoulder strap to easily and conveniently transport it from one place to the next.

This portable easel adjusts to nearly every angle and tilt you desire.  Furthermore, it will also accommodate nearly every size of canvas.

Pros:

This pick for best portable easel is lightweight, yet, extremely durable.  So, if you’re looking for the most transportable easel, this is definitely one to consider.

Cons:

Since this is a lightweight portable easel, it can feel rather flimsy.  Therefore, this may work out well for some and not so well for others.

 

Qinuker Portable Art Easel for Painting

Qinuker Portable Art Easel for Painting

Our last pick for best easel in the portability category is made of Paulownia wood.  And, according to woodcraft.com, Paulownia wood is fine-grained, soft and warp-resistant.  In addition, it is lightweight which makes for easy transportation.

The Qinuker Portable Art Easel for Painting features high quality metal hardware.  It comes with a built-in drawer which will help keep your paints and brushes stored and organized.

This portable easel can be used as a standing easel or a tabletop easel.  And, when extended to its full size, this easel measures 22.9 inches long, 16.7 inches wide and 68 inches tall.  When it’s folded to its portable size, it measures 1.8 inches wide and 16.5 inches tall.

Finally, when you’re ready to transport the Qinuker Portable Art Easel and your recent masterpiece, you can carry it away with the attached, adjustable leather strap.

Pros:

The Qinuker Portable Art Easel is fully adjustable and can be used as a tabletop easel.

Furthermore, instead of a drawer, this easel has a stagnant storage space for your supplies.  This eliminates some of the awkward movement that occurs when using a drawer.

Cons:

This pick is made with Paulownia wood which is lightweight and great for transporting.  However, it is a soft wood.  Therefore, you may want to handle this easel with care.  Or, the other alternative is to go with a heavier portable easel, like the US Art Supply Coronado above.

 

Best Electric Egg Cookers

Best Electric Egg Cookers 2018

When searching for the best electric egg cookers, it helps to get the inside scoop from connoisseurs.  And, we are proud to admit that we are self-proclaimed connoisseurs of the electric egg cooker.

So, about a couple of months ago, we went on a camping excursion where our hosts cooked us up some soft-boiled eggs, every morning, from an electric egg cooker.  And, we were completely blown away by how perfectly soft-boiled these eggs turned out.  Was it really that quick, easy and delicious?

In addition, not only did these eggs turn out exactly how you set them to cook, they were the best eggs we have ever divulged in.  Especially the soft-boiled eggs…they were like a glass of fine wine and we find the appropriate word here to be smooth.  It seems sort of weird to describe eggs as smooth but that is exactly how they turned out.

Best Electric Egg Cookers

And, with this new-found discovery, we sadly came back home to an electric egg cooker-less house.  Therefore, we needed to get an egg cooker right away to soothe our morning appetite.

So, we started searching for the best electric egg cookers and narrowed the results down to the most highly reviewed electric egg cookers on the market.  And what was important to us in the reviews were a few things.  Namely, deliciously cooked eggs time and time again.

This means, we payed close attention to the reviews that are heavy on the results side.  We wanted perfect eggs cooked consistently.

Then, we further focused in on the user reviews where durability is a factor.  We don’t want to be stuck with a burnt-out electric egg cooker when we need it the most.

Finally, we were on a budget with this new purchase – it took us by surprise so we didn’t calculate this new-found luxury.  Therefore, we chose a budget model for our electric egg cooker.

However, we also chose some other models that are on our dream list.  So, whether you’re on a budget or you’re looking for a high-end electric egg cooker, you can find what you need on our list of best electric egg cookers.

 

Best Electric Egg Cookers

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Elite Platinum EGC-207 Maxi-Matic Egg Cooker
Elite Platinum
EGC-207 Maxi-Matic Egg Cooker
7 Egg Capacity
Measuring Cup
Piercer
Egg Tray
Poaching Tray
Automatic Shutoff
Color Options
7.7" x 6.7" x 7.7"
Cuisinart CEC-10 Egg Central Egg Cooker
Cuisinart
CEC-10 Egg Central Egg Cooker
10 Egg Capacity
Measuring Cup
Piercer
Egg Tray
Omelet Tray
Poaching Tray
Automatic Shutoff
Audible Alert
Built-in Cord
Color Options
6.3" x 7.3" x 7.8"
KRUPS F23070 Egg Cooker with Water Level Indicator
KRUPS
F23070 Egg Cooker with Water Level Indicator
7 Egg Capacity
Measuring Cup
Piercer
Egg Tray
2 Poaching Trays
Automatic Shutoff
Audible Alert
7.7" x 6.4" x 5.5"
Dash Deluxe Rapid Egg Cooker
Dash
Deluxe Rapid Egg Cooker
12 Egg Capacity
Measuring Cup
Piercer
Egg Tray
Omelet Tray
Automatic Shutoff
Audible Alert
Color Options
9" x 10" x 8"
SimpleTaste Electric Egg Cooker
SimpleTaste
Electric Egg Cooker
7 Egg Capacity
Measuring Cup
Piercer
Egg Tray
Poaching Tray
Automatic Shutoff
7.4" x 6.3" x 6.3"

 

Best Electric Egg Cookers

Elite Platinum EGC-207 Maxi-Matic Egg Cooker

Elite Platinum EGC-207 Maxi-Matic Egg Cooker

So, this is the electric egg cooker we chose and we couldn’t be happier with it.  The Elite Platinum EGC-207 Maxi-Matic Egg Cooker cooks perfect eggs every time.  And, like we mentioned above, we were on a budget so this egg cooker is priced to sell.

This pick on our list of best electric egg cookers can boil up to 7 eggs at a time on the egg tray.  Furthermore, you can cook these eggs hard, medium or soft.  However, this electric egg cooker can also whip up some omelets or poached eggs.

The Elite Platinum EGC-207 Maxi-Matic Egg Cooker is easy to use.  Simply fill the measuring cup to the desired amount of water allocated for the desired cooked eggs.  This measuring cup is labeled to get the exact measurement for hard, medium or soft eggs.  Then, pour the water on the bottom of the egg cooker and place the egg tray on top.  You will then want to pierce the eggs with the egg piercer.  You will find the piercer attached to one end of the measuring cup.  Place the eggs on the tray, pierced-side up and cover with the lid.  Turn the button on and the red cooking light will turn on.  Once the eggs are done, the cooking light will turn off and you will hear a small click.  This is to signify the eggs are ready.

So, it’s really as simple as this.  Just make sure that once the eggs are done, you run the eggs under cold water.  This will prevent the eggs from further cooking.  And, this will also make the eggs easier to handle and easier to peel.

The Elite Platinum EGC-207 is made of stainless steel and features a see-through plastic cover so you can view the eggs while they’re cooking.  In addition, this electric egg cooker comes with a tray where you can poach or scramble the eggs.

Lastly, we love the design of this electric egg cooker.  So much so, that we just leave it on the counter.  And, we think it adds to the kitchen and the aesthetic instead of taking away.  Furthermore, and to really indulge with your aesthetic, this electric egg cooker comes in your choice of colors:   Black, Black/Stainless Steel, Green, Red, Teal and White.

Pros:

Every morning, without fail, we get perfectly cooked, soft-boiled eggs.  And, it’s a been a few months and no mishaps and no real big issues.  Just consistent deliciousness every time.

Cons:

The cooking light is not that bright.  Therefore, sometimes it’s hard to tell when the eggs are ready.  Furthermore, there’s a small, subtle click that happens when the cooking light shuts off.  You can hear this click if you’re by the egg cooker.  However, it’s difficult to hear once you step away.

Therefore, if you need an egg cooker that gives you an audible alert, we suggest going with another pick.  And, this is also to stay on the safe side.  There are a few times we lost track of time and overcooked our eggs.  As a result, this is the one feature we are quite disappointed about.

Cuisinart CEC-10 Egg Central Egg Cooker

Cuisinart CEC-10 Egg Central Egg Cooker

If you’re looking to feed a large family, this pick for best electric egg cookers is one of the larger ones on the market.

The Cuisinart CEC-10 Egg Central Egg Cooker will handle up to 10 eggs and will cook them hard, medium or soft.  In addition, this electric egg cooker can cook a 3 egg omelette or poach 4 eggs at once.

This electric egg cooker is another pick that’s easy to use.  Simply measure the water in the 180 millilitre measuring cup, pour the water into the bottom of the egg cooker and place the egg tray on top.  Pierce the eggs on one end and place on the tray, pierced side up.

Next, place the lid on top and flick the switch to on.  Once the eggs are finished cooking, you will hear an audible beep and the egg cooker automatically shuts off.  Just don’t forget to immediately run the eggs under cold water so they will stop cooking.

The Cuisinart CEC-10 Egg Central Egg Cooker is made of brushed stainless steel and comes with a BPA free egg tray, poaching tray and omelet tray.

Finally, this pick for best electric egg cookers comes with a built-in cord so it can easily be stored.

Pros:

This is the best pick for those looking to feed a large family.  It is very similar to the one we chose, just on a larger scale.

In addition, this electric egg cooker makes delicious eggs morning after morning.  Therefore, it’s consistent and reliable.

Lastly, it has an unmistakable beep when the eggs are finished cooking.

Cons:

I know we said this egg cooker has an automatic shutoff.  However, that is partially true.  It actually has stand-by mode where it will stop cooking the eggs.  But, you will need to flick the switch to off in order to shut completely shut down the egg cooker.

Furthermore, the inside parts are all plastic, including the egg tray.  And, while it’s somewhat of a relief the plastic parts are BPA free, it’s still plastic.

KRUPS F23070 Egg Cooker with Water Level Indicator

KRUPS F23070 Egg Cooker with Water Level Indicator

This next pick on our list of best electric egg cookers is about as high-end as you can get.  The KRUPS F23070 Egg Cooker comes from a company who has produced quality products for more than 150 years.

This electric egg cooker can cook up to 7 eggs at a time.  And you can cook these eggs from soft-boiled to hard-boiled and anywhere in between.

Furthermore, this electric egg cooker comes with 2 poaching trays so can make poached eggs, scrambled eggs or omelets.

Using this electric egg cooker is easy.  First, you measure the water according to how you want your eggs done.  Pour the water in the base of the egg cooker and place the egg tray on top.

Next, pierce the eggs with the egg piercer which you will find on one end of the measuring cup.  Place the eggs, pierced side up, on the egg tray and cover with the lid.  Turn the dial to the right and the eggs will start cooking.  Once finished, you will hear an audible tone to let you know the eggs are ready.  If you want the eggs to sit, you can turn the dial far left and this will allow the eggs to keep warm.  And, this is great if you’re using the poaching trays.  If you are cooking the eggs on the egg tray, we suggest running them under cold water as soon as they are finished cooking.

The KRUPS F23070 Egg Cooker is made with a metal base and comes with a BPA free plastic egg tray, 2 poaching trays, a plastic lid and measuring cup.

Pros:

KRUPS have always produced consistent, quality products.  And, this electric egg cooker is no different.  So, if you’re looking for an electric egg cooker to last you a long time, this is a well-made product.

Cons:

We can’t, for the life of us, understand why they felt the need to include plastic parts.  However, it seems with even high-end products, plastic has sadly taken over.

Dash Deluxe Rapid Egg Cooker

Dash Deluxe Rapid Egg Cooker

If you like the double-decker style of egg cooker and you want to watch your eggs cook, this is a great alternative to the Cuisinart.  In addition, this is a 12 egg capacity egg cooker, so if you’re looking to cook a lot of eggs at once, this is a great pick to consider.

The Dash Deluxe Rapid Egg Cooker will boil hard, medium or soft eggs.  And, it will also make poached, scrambled eggs or omelets.

This electric egg cooker works much like the ones above.  It comes with a measuring cup where you can measure the water for your desired style of eggs.  Once measured, pour the water into the base of the egg cooker and pierce the eggs with the piercer located at one end of the measuring cup.  Place the eggs on the egg tray, place the lid on top and press the cook button.

Once the eggs are finished, you will hear an audible buzz and the egg cooker will automatically shut off.  And, to prevent overcooking, be sure to run the eggs under cold water immediately after the cooking session is over.

The Dash Deluxe Rapid Egg Cooker is made of metal and comes with a BPA free plastic egg tray, large omelet tray and lid.

Finally, this pick on our list of best electric egg cookers comes in your choice of colors.  Choose between Black or Red.

Pros:

If you’re looking for the best electric egg cooker with a large egg capacity, this is a great option.  And, it cooks eggs consistently every time.

Cons:

Ok, the buzzer is a little annoying.  Or, maybe it’s really annoying.  This all depends on your tolerance level.  But, at least it has a buzzer, right?

In addition, the company recommends cooking no less than 6 eggs.  And, if you cook less than 6 eggs, they may not turn out how you want them to.

SimpleTaste Electric Egg Cooker

SimpleTaste Electric Egg Cooker

If you’re really on a budget, this is the least expensive on our list of best electric egg cookers.

The SimpleTaste Electric Egg Cooker will cook up to 7 eggs at a time.  And, it will prepare poached eggs or an omelete.

This electric egg cooker features a stainless steel cooking plate, a BPA free egg tray and a BPA free poaching tray.  However, the lid does contain small traces of BPA.

The SimpleTaste Electric Egg Cooker is easy to use.  Use the plastic measuring cup to measure the precise amount of water for soft, medium or hard-boiled eggs.  Pour the water into the cooking base, puncture one end of the egg with the piercer and place the egg on the egg tray.  Then, cover with the lid and push the on button.  You will see a red light when the eggs start cooking.  Once the eggs are done, the red light goes dim and the egg cooker shuts off automatically.

Finally, this electric egg cooker comes with a clear top so you can keep an eye on the prize.  And, this is especially convenient when poaching eggs or making an omelete.

Pros:

This pick on our list of best electric egg cookers is a good bang for your buck.  It’s simple in design, easy to use and consistently produces great results.

Cons:

The lid has traces of BPA.  Personally, for us, this is a deal breaker.  And, this model is very similar to the one we chose, minus the BPA.  So, if you are on a serious budget, for a few more dollars you can choose the one without BPA.  And, you can find this pick at the top of our list.

In addition, this doesn’t have an audible sound to alert you when your eggs are done cooking.  Therefore, it’s you who’s going to have to be on alert.

Best Fruit Fly Trap

Best Fruit Fly Trap 2018

When we received the assignment to find the best fruit fly trap, we couldn’t have had a better opportunity to share our own experience while writing this article.

And, this is because we had a fruit fly infestation.  While our infestation may have been different from yours, it is still crucial to cross your T’s and dot your I’s when it comes to ridding your home of these annoying pests.

How to Get Rid of Fruit Flies

So, when we had a fruit fly infestation, we set out homemade traps.  These traps were made of an apple cider vinegar and dish soap concoction.  And, because we used clear glass jars, these traps were unsightly, to say the least.  Furthermore, we thought the more traps we set out, the higher probability we would get rid of the fruit flies.

Therefore, with an apartment full of fruit fly traps, company was limited.  Or, if company did visit, they were bombarded with apologies.

And, while these fruit fly traps managed to trap hundreds of fruit flies, it was an ongoing issue where we were left with no alternative.

So, begrudgingly, we side-eyed our beautiful plant in the corner of our apartment.  Oh, but it can’t be that gorgeous plant we purchased upon move-in.  There’s no way.

Best Fruit Fly Trap

And so, we waited.  And we waited.  Until we couldn’t handle an apartment full of homemade fruit fly traps anymore, let alone the fruit flies.  So, we took the plant and had a burial in the dumpster.

Now, I’m not sure that this plant couldn’t be saved.  However, we were at our wits end.  It’s either us or the plant.  Therefore, the plant had to go.

So, why are we telling you this story?  Well, in case the easiest means to an end is just ridding of the plants.  Then you don’t have to deal with fruit fly traps that won’t work anyway because the source of the fruit flies is still in your home.

Therefore, before you purchase a fruit fly trap, try to rid the source first.  And, sources can vary.  According to The Bug Squad, the kitchen is the first place to investigate.  But, other places like the toilet, and like we mentioned, plants, need your private eye.

However, there can be other scenarios other than having an infestation.  If you don’t have a nest hiding somewhere and it’s just an environmental factor, then you’re a great candidate for these top 6 best fruit fly traps.

Or, if you have done everything possible to find the source to no avail, and you need some traps, you’re another great candidate.

So, without further ado, we know you want to get rid of the flies yesterday, so we’ll let you browse through to find the best fruit fly for your situation.  These picks for best fruit fly traps are not a one-sizes-fits-all solution.  Each one has its own individualistic way of trapping these buggers and it’s up to you to pick the right one for your household.

 

Best Fruit Fly Trap

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
KATCHY Electric Insect Trap
KATCHY
Electric Insect Trap
UV Light
Glue Boards
Chemical-Free
Pesticide-Free
Built-In Fan
Electrical/USB
5.4" x 5.4" x 9"
Trapro WS108 Wall Sconce Fly Light Trap
Trapro
WS108 Wall Sconce Fly Light Trap
UV Light
Reflective Coating
Glue Boards
Chemical-Free
Pesticide-Free
Electrical
6-Foot Cord
13" x 5.5" x 7.5"
FlyFix Fruit Fly Trap
FlyFix
Fruit Fly Trap
Scent Vents
Funnel
Reusable
Color Options
3.5" x 3.5" x 3.5"
Gardner Fly Web Fly Trap
Gardner
Fly Web Fly Trap
UV Light
Glue Card
Chemical-Free
Pesticide-Free
Electrical
14.4" x 5.9" x 2"
Safer Brand 5025 Houseplant Sticky Stakes Insect Trap
Safer Brand
5025 Houseplant Sticky Stakes Insect Trap
Stakes
Sticky Traps
Chemical-Free
Pesticide-Free
Adjustable
Disposable
7.4" x 5.5" x 0.7"
Terro 2-Pack Fruit Fly Trap
Terro
2-Pack Fruit Fly Trap
Food-Based Liquid Lure
Vapor Chamber
Reusable
2.1" x 5.4" x 6.4"

 

Best Fruit Fly Trap

KATCHY Electric Insect Trap

KATCHY Electric Insect Trap

Our first pick for best fruit fly trap will attract fruit flies in areas of up to 320 square feet.  The KATCHY Electric Insect Trap uses UV light to lure in flies, insects and bugs.  Once these buggers are lured in, they are trapped by a glue-board which is located inside the catcher.

Furthermore, since this fruit fly trap uses an ultraviolet fluorescent bulb to attract the flies, you don’t have to deal with pesticides or insecticides.  In addition, because it doesn’t use these chemicals, this trap is odorless.

The KATCHY Electric Insect Trap comes with 4 replaceable glue boards.  And, if you need additional glue boards, you can find them here.

This fruit fly trap uses a built-in fan to suck the flies and insects into the trap.  Once they’re inside the trap, they are attached to the glue boards.

However, you’re also able to use this trap without the glue boards.  But, this is best for larger flies and insects.  Smaller flies and insects, such as fruit flies, have a better chance of escaping.  So, it is recommended you use glue boards for fruit flies.

The KATCHY Electric Insect Trap can be used in an electrical outlet or a USB port.  This means, you can use this trap without electricity, as long as you have a battery with a USB port attached.  This can be as simple as plugging it in to your computer or using a portable battery charger.

Lastly, this fruit fly trap is ultra quiet.  So, there’s no annoying zapping sound and no loud fan to deal with.

Pros:

The KATCHY Electric Insect Trap has a unobstrusive design.  Therefore, it doesn’t scream “I have flies!”  So, when company comes over, no one is going to know you’re hunting for insects.

In addition, this fruit fly trap works extremely well.  And, it works with or without electricity, which is great for using it at home or in the sticks.

Cons:

This fruit fly trap works best in the dark.  So, it may give you peace of mind during the evening hours, but the day light hours may be somewhat of a nightmare.

It is important to note, though, this pick for best fruit fly trap has high ratings for catching fruit flies amongst consumers.

Trapro WS108 Wall Sconce Fly Light Trap

Trapro WS108 Wall Sconce Fly Light Trap

This next pick for best fruit fly trap can cover an area of up to 900 square feet.  So, if you have a larger space to deal with, this is a fruit fly trap to consider.

 The Trapro WS108 Wall Sconce Fly Light Trap uses UV light to attract flies, insects and other bugs.  In addition, this UV light features an inner reflective coating which further attracts the fruit flies to their demise.  This will also help to trap flies equally as well in the daytime as it does in the nighttime.

This fruit fly trap is non-toxic and pesticide free.  Furthermore, since it uses UV light to trap flies and insects, it is odorless.

The Trapro WS108 Wall Sconce Fly Light Trap uses glue boards so the flies and insects have no chance of escaping.  And, it comes with 6 glue boards in total.  If you need additional glue boards, you can find the replacements here.

Finally, this pick for best fruit fly trap is designed to mount on the wall.  It is recommended you mount the trap approximately 6 feet above the floor.  And, since it has a 6 foot cord, it is best to mount it approximately 5 feet away from the nearest outlet.

Pros:

This pick is fantastic for those who are working with a larger space.

Furthermore, most fruit fly traps that use UV light usually work best when it’s dark.  However, since this fruit fly trap features reflective coating along with the UV light, you can breathe a sigh of relief during the daytime.

Cons:

Their older model had a better design, and we think with this model, they went a step backwards.  But, with this current design, it is meant to blend in with the surroundings, especially if you’re working with white walls.

FlyFix Fruit Fly Trap

FlyFix Fruit Fly Trap

If you’re looking to trap the sporadic fruit fly, this is a pick to consider.  However, if you have a larger, ongoing problem, we suggest going with another one of our picks.

The FlyFix Fruit Fly Trap lures the fruit flies with your choice of attractant.  And, we recommend going with a non-toxic pick to keep things safe around the home.  Our favorite natural, non-toxic attractant is the Eco Defense Fruit Fly Lure which you can find here.  However, you can also whip up some homemade fruit fly lure by using apple cider vinegar and a couple of drops of dishwashing soap.

The fruit flies are lured by way of the scent vents.  Then, they enter through a funnel which prevents their escape.  And, once in the funnel, they make their way down to the base which obscures their view.  So, there’s no chasing the guests from the house or ruining anyone’s appetite.

The FlyFix Fruit Fly Trap is reusable.  Once the bottom base is ready to empty, just twist the water icon and fill with water.  Then, twist it again to unlock and clean.  And, to reuse this fruit fly trap, it’s as easy as adding the lure and re-attaching the two parts.

Finally, with this pick for best fruit fly trap, you get your choice of color combinations.  Choose between Blue/White, Green/White, Red/Gray or Yellow/White.

Pros:

The FlyFix Fruit Fly Trap does a great job at catching and trapping fruit flies.  In addition, it does just as well at concealing them.

Furthermore, this is a great budget solution before deciding if you should spend money on a more expensive device.

Cons:

Some consumers have issues with the fruit flies escaping.  However, because this is a budget option, it makes it easier to fork over the money to see if it will work your situation.

In addition, with this fruit fly trap, you will need to provide your own attractant.  While this isn’t the biggest deal in the world, sometimes it’s easier to go with just replacing a glue board than making sure you have a concoction on hand.

Gardner Fly Web Fly Trap

Gardner Fly Web Fly Trap

If you’re working with a smaller space, this compact fruit fly trap is one to check out.

The Gardner Fly Web Fly Trap attracts fruit flies by way of the UV light.  And, once these flies are lured in, they are trapped on the FlyWeb adhesive glue card.  However, this fruit fly trap only comes with 1 glue card so we highly recommend ordering replacements upon purchase.  You can find those replacements here.

And, like we mentioned, this fruit fly trap uses a UV light. Once this light goes out, you are also able to replace it.  You can find the replacement light here

The Gardner Fly Web Fly Trap attaches to a standard household outlet.  And, once plugged in, it automatically turns on.  Furthermore, this pick for best fruit fly trap looks like a night-light, therefore, it’s unobtrusive.

Finally, because this uses UV lighting, this fruit fly trap works best during the nighttime hours.

Pros:

This pick for best fruit fly trap is unobtrusive.  In addition, it will not only look like a night-light, it will double as a night-light.

Furthermore, many consumers have had real success with this pick.

Cons:

Like we mentioned above, it is intended to work in the dark.  So, if you want a UV light fruit fly trap that works 24 hours, we suggest going with the Trapro WS108 Wall Sconce Fly Light Trap.

 

Safer Brand 5025 Houseplant Sticky Stakes Insect Trap

Safer Brand 5025 Houseplant Sticky Stakes Insect Trap

If you have an issue with fruit flies invading your plants, this pick for best fruit fly trap may work for you.  The Safer Brand 5025 Houseplant Sticky Stakes Insect Trap features a stake which can easily be inserted into soil.  Furthermore, these stakes are adjustable, so matter what type of pot you’re working with, they will fit most sizes.

This fruit fly trap uses natural pest control which is chemical-free and pesticide-free.  And, it uses the color yellow and glue to attract and trap the fruit flies.

With the Safer Brand 5025 Houseplant Sticky Stakes Insect Trap, you will receive a total of 14 stakes and 14 traps.  Once the traps are filled up, you just wrap them in paper and throw them away.

Pros:

This is a great way to prevent your plants from being infested with fruit flies.  In addition, if your plants do have fruit flies, this a great way to rid of the fruit flies.

Cons:

These stakes are reusable, however, for the life of us, we can’t find the replacement traps in order to reuse the stakes.  Therefore, since these are relatively inexpensive, it’s not that big of a deal.

Terro 2-Pack Fruit Fly Trap

Terro 2-Pack Fruit Fly Trap

Our final pick for best fruit fly trap works well on the kitchen counter.  The Terro 2-Pack Fruit Fly Trap will completely hide the trapped flies while looking as if it is just a kitchen ornament.

This fruit fly trap uses a non-toxic, food-based liquid to lure the flies into the trap.  Once the flies enter the trap, there is no escape.

The Terro 2-Pack Fruit Fly Trap is easy to use.  Simply pull the lid off of the base to expose the vapor chamber.  Then, place it near the source of the problem or in a high-traffic, fruit fly infested area.

Finally, this trap is reusable.  Once the trap is full, unscrew the top, empty the contents and clean.  Then, just add apple cider vinegar, a couple of drops of dish soap and screw the 2 pieces back together.

Pros:

This is another pick that is unobtrusive.  So much so, you can be eating next to it and have no idea that it’s a fruit fly demise.  Therefore, this is a perfect option if you tend to have a lot of company.

Furthermore, they are small in size so they won’t take up much space.

Cons:

While this is one of the most highly reviewed fruit fly traps on the market, there were a concerning amount of consumers whom this didn’t work for.  So, you have to wonder, is it the product or did they have different types of insects as opposed to fruit flies?

Best Steam Mop 2018

5 Best Steam Mops for 2018

If you’re looking for the best steam mop, you’ve come to the right place.  And, this is because we searched and reviewed the top steam mops on the market and narrowed our findings down to the top 5 best steam mops money can buy.

However, before we started this process, we wanted to know what makes a steam mop so much different from a regular mop?  The answers we received changed the way we mop floors.

Steam Mop Benefits

First of all, we err on the side of being health-conscious and the less chemicals we use the better.  And, with a steam mop, there is no need for chemicals.  Instead of chemicals, a steam mop uses hot steam to kill germs and remove stains.  Ok…this blew us out of the water.  You mean to tell us that you can kill germs and rid stains without chemicals?  So, with this new-found knowledge, we discovered our new favorite product.

Best Steam Mop 2018

Some of the other steam mop benefits are, with a steam mop, the floors will dry quicker.  And, there is no need to scrub the floors when using a steam mop because the steam is strong enough to remove ground-in dirt and tough stains all on its own.  Furthermore, there are steam mops where you can clean the countertops and bathroom tiles.  And, the steam mop works great on tiles as it will clean the hard-to-reach grout.

So, now that we have the benefits out of the way, what’s going to be the best steam mop for you?

First, you may want to visualize the space you will be mopping.  Does it have a lot of corners and hard to reach areas?  If this is the case, you may want to search for a particular design that is best suited for the space you are working with.  And, perhaps a steam mop shaped as a triangle will be the best solution for you.  Or, you may work best with a steam mop that has a detachable head where you can easily reach into tight spaces.  So, when reviewing our picks for best steam mop, keep your space in mind.

The other thing to ask yourself when choosing the best steam mop is, what size of space are you working with?  And, this is because these tanks vary with the amount of water they can hold.  So, the last thing you want to do is refill the water when you’re almost done with the chore.  So, be sure to choose a tank size according to your space size.

Best Steam Mop for Hardwoods, Tile and Laminate Floors

One concern some consumers have when choosing the best steam mop is the type of floor they’re working with.  And, some people go on the hunt for the best steam mop for hardwoods or the best steam mop for tile.  However, with our final picks, these steam mops treat all sealed, hard-surfaced floors with the ultimate respect.

In addition, this is a huge bonus for those of us who have multiple types of flooring in our households.  So, if you want to steam mop the hardwoods, you can then go right to the bathroom tile with the same mop.

If you’re looking to use a steam mop on carpets, we do have a couple of picks that come with carpet gliders which will enable you to do just that.  Therefore, you can go from the kitchen to the bathroom and right to the carpet with the same machine.

So, now you should have an idea of what you’re looking for.  And, the next step is to review the top 5 best steam mops on the market and find your perfect fit.

 

Best Steam Mop 2018

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Shark Steam Mop S1000A
Shark
Steam Mop S1000A
Swivel Mop Head
2 Mop Pads
Removable Water Tank
30 Second Heating Time
18 Ft Cord
Locks Upright
11" x 7.4" x 46.1"
Shark Lift-Away Pro Steam Pocket Mop
Shark
Lift-Away Pro Steam Pocket Mop
Swivel Mop Head
2 Mop Pads
Removable Water Tank
Adjustable Steam Levels
Handheld Steamer
Steam Blaster
20 Second Heating Time
18 Ft Cord
12" x 12" x 51.2"
Light N Easy Steam Mop
Light N Easy
Steam Mop
Swivel Mop Head
Carpet Gliders
1 Mop Pad
Removable Water Tank
Adjustable Steam Levels
Handheld Steamer
Flexible Hose
20 Second Heating Time
20 Ft Cord
Locks Upright
11.8" x 6.8" x 46.4"
O-Cedar Microfiber Steam Mop
O-Cedar
Microfiber Steam Mop
Triangle Mop Head
Swivel Mop Head
Carpet Gliders
2 Mop Pads
20 Second Heating Time
18 Ft Cord
Locks Upright
10" x 6" x 27"
Bissell PowerFresh Steam Mop
Bissell
PowerFresh Steam Mop
Swivel Mop Head
Built-In Easy Scrubber
1 Mop Pad
1 Scrub Mop Pad
Fragrance Discs
Removable Water Tank
Adjustable Steam Levels
30 Second Heating Time
23 Ft Cord
Color Options
11.6" x 7.1" x 28.6"

 

Best Steam Mop 2018

Shark Steam Mop S1000A

Shark Steam Mop S1000A

Shark produces some of the most beloved steam mops on the market, so it’s no surprise we have 2 shark steam mops on our list.  And, topping our list is this lightweight Shark Steam Mop S1000A.

This pick for best steam mop is perfect for those who are looking for hassle-free cleaning.  This steam mop is simple and there’s no frills about it.  So, if you’re someone who’s looking for a steam mop for everyday type of household chores, this is one to consider.

The Shark Steam Mop S1000A is just plug-and-go.  Once this steam mop is plugged in, the steam reaches its heat level within 30 second and the steam is released by movement of the mop.  Therefore, there’s no On/Off button to finagle with.

Once you get the mop moving, the 12 inch mop head maneuvers in a swivel fashion to reach the corners and other angled areas.  And, with an 18 foot cord, you’re more than likely able to steam mop a large-sized room without having to switch outlets.

The Shark Steam Mop S1000A features an extra-large tank which means less refills.  Furthermore, this tank is easily removable and fill-able.

This steam mop comes with 2 mop pads which are machine washable.  And, it is recommended you replace each pad after approximately 3 months of use.  You can find the top replacement pads for this particular model here.

Finally, once the deed is done, the Shark Steam Mop S1000A is easy to store.  It features a compact size and conveniently locks upright.

Pros:

No hassle, no frills and floors that are spick n’ span.  This pretty much sums up the best features of this mop.  And, like we mentioned above, this is an excellent choice for everyday household cleaning.

Furthermore, this steam mop heats up in 30 seconds, so when we say it’s just plug-and-go, it’s literally plug-and-go.

Cons:

Some consumers need some frills.  And, with this steam mop, there isn’t any.  So, if you’re looking for a detachable head to clean bathroom tile or need more angle to your mop head, you may want to consider some of the other steam mops on our list.

In addition, the mop pad is not intended to pick up dirt.  Therefore, you want to make sure your floors are clear of dust and loose dirt before using.

Shark Lift-Away Pro Steam Pocket Mop

Shark Lift-Away Pro Steam Pocket Mop

Our second pick for best steam mop is another great Shark option.  However, unlike the other Shark steam mop on our list, this is for consumers who are tackling a lot more than just your normal, everyday household cleaning.

The Shark Lift-Away Pro Steam Pocket Mop is able to dust while mopping and scrubbing.  And, this is all thanks to the dual-sided dirt grip pads.  These grip pads are machine washable, reusable and replaceable.  Furthermore, when detaching the grip pad from the mop, there is no need to touch the pad.  Simply press the button and the pad comes off on its own.

This steam mop offers a 2-n-1 solution.  It works as a steam mop and it converts to a handheld steamer for hard to reach areas or above-the-floor cleaning.  And, this cleaning may include the bathroom walls, kitchen countertops, curtains, ceiling fans, baseboards…you name it. 

The Shark Lift-Away Pro Steam Pocket Mop is easy to use.  Simply set the desired level of steam:  Standby, Low or Hot.  And, within seconds, the steam is heated to the desired temperature and you can mop away.  Furthermore, if you’re looking to clean tougher stains, this steam mop features a steam blaster where you can add additional steam to get the job done.

This steam mop has a 220 millilitre tank which converts to roughly 1 cup.  And, it offers an 18 foot cord which will allow you to steam mop most large rooms without the need to switch outlets.

Pros:

We can’t rave enough about the portable attachment this steam mop comes with.  And not only does it work great for above-floor cleaning, you can also steam clean your clothes with it.  The possibilities are endless.

Furthermore, the Shark Lift-Away Pro Steam Pocket Mop offers a steam blaster which tackles the toughest of stains effortlessly.

Lastly, this steam mop comes with a triangle-shaped mop head which can clean hard to reach nooks and crannies. 

Cons:

This pick for best steam mop is not able to stand on its own.  And, it has trouble leaning against a counter.  Therefore, you may find yourself laying it on the ground between intervals.

In addition, when using the handheld steamer, you will need to hold the button down to produce continuous steam.  And, for large projects, this can get tiring.

 

Light N Easy Steam Mop

 

Light N Easy Steam Mop

Shark steam mops tend to take all the glory, however, this particular brand is another beloved steam mop amongst consumers.  And, with all the cleaning this steam mop can conquer, it easy to see why.

The Light N Easy Steam Mop is a 5-n-1 mop, and is able to clean floors, carpet, clothes, windows, glass…just to name a few.  And, of course, it’s also able to steam clean all sealed, hard-surfaced floors.

This steam mop has 3 steam modes that control the level of steam produced.  You can choose between Low, Medium and High.  Once the mop is in the upright, locked position, the mop will go into idle mode and no steam will be produced.

Furthermore, once you set your level of steam, within seconds, the steam will start producing and you just start mopping.  It’s as easy as that.  And, the Light N Easy Steam Mop will swivel to ensure corners and crevices are clean.  

This steam mop comes with a built-in, handheld steam cleaner which is great for steaming clothes and curtains.  In addition, it also comes with a flexible hose for hard-to-reach areas.

The Light N Easy Steam Mop features a 340 millilitre tank which will run for about 20 to 25 minutes on the lowest steam setting.  And, this steam mop comes with a 20 foot cord so you should be able to steam mop most large rooms without the need to switch outlets.

Finally, you will receive one mop head along with your purchase.  This mop head is machine washable, reusable and replaceable. 

Pros:

This pick for best steam mop is lightweight, sturdy and well-built.

Furthermore, the Light N Easy Steam Mop is able to clean just about everything.  Now, we caution ourselves when saying that but with the handheld steam cleaner and flexible hose, it’s not too far off from the truth.

Cons:

This steam mop only comes with one mop head.  So, if you’re in the middle of a job and need to replace the mop head before finishing, you may have to wait for the washing machine first.  However, if you purchase additional mop heads when ordering this steam mop, this problem is solved.

Some consumers state that this steam mop doesn’t produce the amount of steam it takes to deal with tough stains or ground-in dirt.  So, this may be a pick that is more for everyday-type of household cleaning.

 

O-Cedar Microfiber Steam Mop

O-Cedar Microfiber Steam Mop

This next pick for best steam mop is designed to reach just about every nook and cranny.  The O-Cedar Microfiber Steam Mop features a triangle mop head which easily maneuvers around furniture and reaches into those hard to clean corners.

This steam mop comes with a continuous dial where you can adjust your level of steam.  Once the steam level is set, it will start steaming in approximately 20 seconds.  And, when you’re ready to mop, just start mopping.  There is no button to hold, therefore, no cramping hands.

The O-Cedar Microfiber Steam Mop comes with a snap-on carpet glider.  This carpet glider will allow you to steam clean your carpets easily and swiftly.

This steam mop comes with 2 removable, machine washable and replaceable mop heads.  These mop heads are made of microfiber which is ultra gentle on floors, especially wood floors.

In addition, this steam mop comes with an 18 foot cord which should allow you to mop a large room without the hassle of switching outlets.

Finally, the O-Cedar Microfiber Steam Mop comes with a plastic cup to fill the 200 millilitre tank since the tank is not detachable.  And, when it’s time to dump the water from the tank, just hold the steam mop upside down over the sink and the water will run out.

Pros:

We really like the angled head on this steam mop as it easily maneuvers around furniture.  Furthermore, the mop heads are made of microfiber, which, in our opinion, is the best material to mop hard wood floors with.

In addition, this steam mop comes with carpet gliders so you can go from mopping the kitchen floors to steaming the area rug.

Cons:

The angled head has rounded corners.  And, while this is great for mopping without damaging the walls and furniture, it doesn’t quite get into the corners as much as we would like.

Furthermore, the tank is not removable.  While this isn’t the biggest hassle, we just don’t care for the whole process of flipping the mop upside down over the sink.

 

Bissell PowerFresh Steam Mop

Bissell PowerFresh Steam Mop

This steam mop has thousands of positive reviews.  And, it’s most notable for how well it cleans and how easy it is to use.

The Bissell PowerFresh Steam Mop features a built-in easy scrubber.  This built-in easy scrubber flips down to assist in tackling the most difficult of jobs.  Therefore, not only can this mop steam your floors, it can also scrub them.  Furthermore, this built-in easy scrubber is designed to reach into crevices such as grout.

In addition to the built-in easy scrubber, this steam mop comes with a microfiber mop pad and a mop pad with scrubbing strips.  These mop pads are reusable, machine washable and replaceable.

This steam mop comes with adjustable steam levels ranging from low to hot.  And, once you have your steam level set, this steam mop is ready within 30 seconds.

The Bissell PowerFresh Steam Mop comes with a 23 inch cord which is the longest cord on our list of best steam mops.  And, with a 23 inch cord, you should easily be able to mop a large-sized room and then some.

This steam mop features a removable water tank and this water tank is relatively large with a 12 ounce capacity.

Finally, and this is a fun note to end on, this steam mop comes in your choice of colors.  Choose between Blue, Orange and Purple Pet.  Furthermore, this mop also comes with Spring Breeze fragrance discs.  And, although these discs are optional, some consumers like to have that clean, fresh feeling.

Pros:

With this steam mop, consumers love how hot the steam gets.  So, if you’re looking for extra hot steam, this is definitely a steam mop to consider.

Furthermore, this steam mop cleans grout extraordinarily well.  And, this is partly due to the hot steam and partly due to the built-in easy scrubber.

Cons:

Because the steam gets ultra hot, it is recommended you wear shoes or socks when operating this steam mop.  In addition, make sure the little ones are safe as well.

And, another steam warning, be ultra careful when pressing your foot down on the scrubber.

Best Popcorn Popper

Best Popcorn Popper – Microwave, Stovetop, Electric and Air

Choosing the best popcorn popper is no easy chore.  There are all types of different poppers on the market.  Some are electric, some are microwavable, some are stove top and some look as if they come straight from the circus.  Therefore, we chose the top rated popcorn poppers in each category. 

So, what did we look for when we searched for the best popcorn popper?  Well, reliability is a must.  When we want popcorn, we want it now.  And, there’s no room in our cupboards for a broken down popcorn machine.

Best Popcorn Popper

The next aspect we look for in the best popcorn popper is convenience.  Popcorn, for us, is one of those things we don’t want to spend a lot of time on.  Usually, when we decide to have popcorn, it’s a split-second decision right before we snuggle up to watch a movie.  Therefore, quick and convenient popcorn also topped our list.

So, after narrowing down the most reliable, quickest and most convenient popcorn poppers, we sifted through hundreds of user reviews and we found the top 6 best popcorn poppers on the market.  And now all you have to do is choose which one is right for you.

But, which type of popcorn popper is best for you?  Like we stated earlier, we have chosen the best Air, Microwave, Electric and Stove Top poppers and there’s a stark difference between all of them.  So, if you’re undecided which one to go with, at the end of this post you will find a “Popcorn Popper Buying Guide” which will take you through the ins-and-outs of each type of popper.

However, If you know what you want, check out are top picks for best popcorn popper below.

 

Best Popcorn Popper

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Excelvan Homemade Air-Pop Popcorn Maker
Excelvan
Homemade Air-Pop Popcorn Maker
Plastic
Stainless Steel
BPA Free
Melamine Free
2-n-1 Bowl
Collapsible
Color Options
10.8" x 10.8" x 11.8"
Aicok Popcorn Maker
Aicok
Popcorn Maker
Plastic
BPA Free
Dishwasher Safe
7.1" x 5.1" x 10.9"
HOTPOP The Original Microwave Popcorn Popper
HOTPOP
The Original Microwave Popcorn Popper
Silicone
BPA Free
PVC Free
2-n-1 Bowl
Cool Touch Handles
Color Options
8" x 8" x 2.2"
West Bend Stir Crazy Electric Popcorn Popper Machine
West Bend
Stir Crazy Electric Popcorn Popper Machine
Plastic
Metal
Non Stick
BPA Free
2-n-1 Bowl
Cool Touch Handles
Built-In Butter Well
Heat Resistant Base
Dishwasher Safe
10" x 10" x 13"
Great Northern Popcorn Company Original Stove Top Popcorn Popper
Great Northern Popcorn Company
Original Stove Top Popcorn Popper
Stainless Steel
Wood
17" x 10" x 8"

 

Best Air Popcorn Popper

Excelvan Homemade Air-Pop Popcorn Maker

Excelvan Homemade Air-Pop Popcorn Maker

Our first pick for best air popcorn popper offers a 2-n-1 solution.  The Excelvan Homemade Air-Pop Popcorn Maker starts off as an air popper and converts to a popcorn bowl.  So, once you finish popping the corn, the bowl detaches from the popper and you can just snack on the popcorn from there.

The Excelvan Homemade Air-Pop Popcorn Maker is made of plastic with a stainless steel liner.  And, these materials are 100% BPA and melamine free.  Therefore, this popcorn popper doesn’t include all the toxins you find in a lot of other plastic products.

This air popper will pop the popcorn quickly and easily.  Simply feed the corn into the popper and it pops right into the bowl.  In addition, because this is an air popper, the Excelvan Air-Pop Popcorn Maker doesn’t require oil in order to pop.  This makes this pick for best popcorn maker one of the healthiest on our list.

Once you’re finished popping one batch of popcorn, it is recommended to let the air popper sit for 15 minutes before popping another batch.  And, this is to ensure the popper doesn’t overheat.

The Excelvan Homemade Air-Pop Popcorn Maker collapses into 4 separate parts.  This makes this air popper easy to clean and easy to store.  However, this air popper is not dishwasher safe so you will have to clean it by hand.

Lastly, this air popper comes in your choice of 2 colors:  Orange and White.

Pros:

We like this pick for best popcorn maker because it is made with 100% BPA and melamine-free materials.  In addition, the inner liner is constructed of stainless steel which is a very safe metal to cook with.

Furthermore, the Excelevan Homemade Air-Pop Popcorn Maker makes fantastic popcorn and it has a bowl you can pop with and eat out of.

Cons:

With this popper, you can only use it in 15 minute intervals.  So, if you’re feeding a large group of people, this may not be your most time efficient choice.

In addition, this popper is not dishwasher safe so you will be cleaning it by hand.  The good news is, it does break down into 4 different pieces, making it rather easy to clean by hand.

Aicok Popcorn Maker

Aicok Popcorn Maker

This next pick for best air popcorn popper is ultra fast.  The Aicok Popcorn Maker is ready within minutes and has a popping rate of a whopping 98%.  So, for every 100 kernels, 98 of them turn into popcorn.

This air popcorn popper is FDA approved and BPA free.  Therefore, you will be popping with non toxic plastic for an even healthier bowl of popcorn.

The Aicok Popcorn Maker is easy to use.  Simply use the included measuring spoon to fill the popcorn maker with corn.  Close the cover and turn on the machine.  And, within 2 minutes, you have a bowl of popcorn ready to go.

This pick for best popcorn popper is not machine washable.  However, the base of this popcorn machine can be wiped down and the top cover and measuring cup can be hand washed.

Pros:

This is another pick which is BPA free.  So, this will make an even healthier bowl of popcorn.  

Furthermore, for the price, this is one quick machine.

Cons:

The Aicok Popcorn Popper can only pop so much popcorn at a time.  And, in between sessions, you need to wait 10-12 minutes to let the machine cool down.  So, this is a great pick for a small-sized family.  A large family, not so much.

 

Best Microwave Popcorn Popper

HOTPOP The Original Microwave Popcorn Popper

HOTPOP The Original Microwave Popcorn Popper

Our pick for best microwave popcorn popper can pop up to 15 cups of popcorn within 4 minutes.  Therefore, if you’re feeding a large family, this pick is extremely time efficient.

The HOTPOP Original Microwave Popcorn Popper is BPA free and PVC free.  And, it is made with 100% food grade silicone.

This microwave popcorn popper allows you to add oil or do without.  So, if you’re one of those who love to slather your kernels with oil, go for it.  If you’re on a health kick, you don’t need oil to get these kernels popping.

The HOTPOP Microwave Popcorn Popper is a 2-n-1 solution.  You can pop the kernels in the bowl and use the bowl for consuming the popcorn.  Furthermore, the bowl has cool-touch handles so you can enjoy as soon as the last kernel is done popping.

This pick for best popcorn popper is dishwasher safe.  And, once it’s clean and dry, you can collapse the bowl down to 2.4 inches tall to wedge it in the fullest of drawers.

Finally, the HOTPOP Microwave Popcorn Popper comes in your choice of 7 colors:  Aqua, Black, Blue, Clear, Green, Purple and Red.

Pros:

Like one consumer stated, “Can’t stop eating popcorn.”  And, that pretty much says it all.  However, we will elaborate.  This popcorn popper makes popcorn super quick and it’s extremely easy to use.  In addition, it’s pretty hard to burn the popcorn so expect every batch to be perfectly popped.

A few more notable features we love about this popper:  it is BPA free, PVC free, it has cool touch handles, it collapses for easy storing and it doubles up as a bowl once you’re done popping.  And, overall, we are highly impressed with this microwave popcorn popper.

Cons:

A few consumers complained that this pick for best popcorn popper didn’t pop the popcorn all the way.  However, the less kernels you use, the better your results will be.

 

Best Electric Popcorn Popper

West Bend Stir Crazy Electric Popcorn Popper Machine

West Bend Stir Crazy Electric Popcorn Popper Machine

For those who prefer an electric popcorn machine, the West Bend Stir Crazy Electric Popcorn Popper Machine is the way to go.  This pick for best electric popcorn popper can pop up to 27 cups of popcorn in under 4 minutes.

This electric popcorn popper features a built-in butter well which will allow the popper to evenly coat your popcorn with butter.  However, it is important to note that with this electric popcorn popper, you don’t need butter or oil to get the job done.  Therefore, this is a healthy option when it comes to the popping world.

The West Bend Stir Crazy Electric Popcorn Popper is a 2-n-1 solution.  Once the popcorn is done popping, the top lid converts to a bowl.  And, this top lid is see-through, so you will be able to see the process unfold while you’re waiting.  Furthermore, this bowl has heat-resistant handles.  So, once the popcorn is done popping, you can dig right in.

And speaking of heat-resistance, this electric popcorn popper features a heat-resistant base to help protect your countertops from heat damage.

For cleaning purposes, this electric popcorn popper has a non-stick surface which makes cleanup a breeze.  Simply wipe down the surface and you can throw the serving bowl in the top rack of the dishwasher.

Last, but definitely not least, the serving bowl is BPA free.  

Pros:

This pick for best popcorn popper is a great solution for those looking to feed a group of people as it pops 27 cups in less than 4 minutes.  However, if you’re looking to use this for just a few cups of popcorn, this will work as well.

In addition, the built-in butter well is a great feature as it will evenly coat the popcorn to your liking.  And, the fact that you don’t have to use the butter well is another nice feature.

Cons:

Some consumers have complained this popcorn leaves a lot of condensation on the popcorn.  What happens is this air popper produces steam while popping, and once done, when flipping the popcorn popper over and removing the bowl, the steam leaves the popcorn damp.  It is important to note that most consumers didn’t have this issue.  However, it may be a case of letting the popcorn sit for a bit and allowing the steam to settle.

In addition, some consumers have had issues with the non-stick coating scraping off.  And, this is a bit concerning as you don’t want to be ingesting the non stick coating!  But, again, most consumers didn’t seem to have this issue, so it may be a default with the particular popcorn popper they received.  Our parting words, proceed with caution.

 

Best Stovetop Popcorn Popper

Great Northern Popcorn Company Original Stove Top Popcorn Popper

Great Northern Popcorn Company Original Stove Top Popcorn Popper

Our last pick for best popcorn popper is all about keeping it simple.  And, sometimes simple is better.  However, just be aware, it’s going to take a little work on your part.

The Great Northern Popcorn Company Original Stove Top Popcorn Popper is a classic popcorn machine where you will manually stir the popcorn while it’s popping.  And, while this turns some people off, for others, it can feel like you’re a part of the process.  Furthermore, it’s fantastic for toning up the arm.

This pick for best stove top popcorn popper is made of stainless steel and has a duplex heat pad to ensure even cooking.  In addition, it comes with metal gears, as well as, wood handles and knobs.

The Great Northern Popcorn Company Original Stove Top Popcorn Popper will make 20 cups of popcorn in minutes.  So, if you’re feeding a large family, this is a great solution to consider.

And, it is important to note that this popcorn popper will require oil in order to pop.  Therefore, if you’re looking to feast on “naked” popcorn, you may want to try one of the other picks on our list.

Finally, this pick for best popcorn popper is one of the easiest to clean.  It’s so easy you may forget all the work you did to stir the kernels.  Just wipe the pan down with a paper towel and it’s ready to store.

Pros:

The Great Northern Popcorn Company Original Stove Top Popcorn Popper is the real deal.  It is built with stainless steel and real wood handles.  Therefore, expect this popcorn popper to handle all the torment of popping popcorn for years to come.

Furthermore, it is a great solution for those looking to treat a lot of people as it will make up to 20 cups of popcorn in just minutes.

Cons:

This pick for best popcorn popper is not to be used on an induction stove.

In addition, some consumers state the stirring rod doesn’t reach to the bottom of the pan far enough.  Consequently, this leaves a lot of kernels yet to be popped.

 

Popcorn Popper Buying Guide

Like we mentioned above, there are stark differences between Air, Microwave, Electric and Stovetop popcorn poppers.  And, we’ve mapped out a detailed buying guide to showcase the differences between these poppers and help you make the best decision for you.

Air Popcorn Popper

Popping popcorn via the air popper has been deemed the healthiest way to consume this snack.  And, as Today suggests, it is the healthiest as long as you make “naked” air-popped popcorn.  Naked air-popped popcorn is popping just the kernels and nothing else.  However, most of us like to dress our popcorn with something.  Therefore, after air popping the popcorn, you can control how much butter and salt you dress it with.  So, with a light salty buttery seasoning, you can still be somewhat healthy with the air popcorn popper.

Using an air popcorn popper is easy.  You just feed the kernels into the popper and within a couple of minutes you’ll have a bowl full of popcorn.  And, to get a general idea of how an air popper works, our friends over at Instructables have a great guide detailing the process.

Microwave Popcorn Popper

A microwave popcorn popper is the easiest way to pop popcorn.  And, it is also the least messy.  Furthermore, with our pick for best microwave popcorn popper, it is just as healthy as using an air popcorn popper.  This is because you can pop the corn without oil and add your desired amount, if any, after the popcorn is in its edible state.

So, if you’re looking for the most hassle-free way to pop corn, we suggest going the microwave route.

Electric Popcorn Popper

With most electric popcorn poppers, you will need to use oil while the kernels are popping.  However, with the best electric popcorn popper on our list, you can pop with or without oil.

So, why would you go with an electric popcorn popper over the other options?  And, it all comes down to preference.  Furthermore, some people prefer to have their popcorn continuously stirred for them throughout the process.

Another reason why you may consider an electric popcorn popper is it will pop the most amount of popcorn in the shortest amount of time.  So, if you’re looking to treat a larger group of people, this is definitely the route to take.

To get an idea on how an electric popcorn popper works, WikiHow takes you through the steps here.

Stove Top Popcorn Popper

Popping popcorn on the stove top is Ok as long as you use stainless steel.  And, according to Non Toxic for Health, sticking with a stainless steel stove top popper is your best bet for non toxic popcorn.  Therefore, you should stay clear of aluminum poppers and those that have plastic parts.

And, with the stove top method, it’s rather quick and easy, not to mention, fun.  In addition, it is manual so you will be stirring the kernels as they’re popping.

It is important to note, though, the stove top method will require oil.  So, this is not the healthiest option on our list.

Best Bathroom Scale

Best Bathroom Scale for Accuracy

We began our search for best bathroom scale by conducting a survey.  And, the findings of the survey garnered accuracy as the top requirement for the best bathroom scale.  Therefore, we began the beginnings of our search for the best bathroom scale with accuracy leading the way.

The next findings of our survey determined durability to be something consumers look for when buying a bathroom scale.  Therefore, a bathroom scale should live through the ups and downs and the loss and gains.  So, we combined accuracy with durability.

And, this pretty much narrowed down our options.  However, our final picks were further based on style and reviews.  So, those that looked great and had very happy consumers topped our final list.

Best Bathroom Scale

However, there are a few individualistic needs which you need to consider.  The first is minimum and maximum weight.  Is this scale going to be able to configure the weight for which you need it for?  Furthermore, if you’re looking for a scale which also detects your weight down to the decibel, this will help narrow down your options on our list.

The next individualistic need to consider is if a non-slip scale will be more appropriate for you.  Some consumers like to jump on the scale after the shower and that may get a little slick.  In addition, if you’re prone to slipping or there are little ones running around, a non-slip scale may be your best bet.

Finally, how’s your eyesight doing?  If you’re one who requires glasses or contacts, look for the largest display you can find.  And, this is because we don’t always have our glasses or contacts in, so a larger display will reduce the squinting it may take to read the darn display.

 

Best Bathroom Scale

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Greater Goods Weight Bathroom Scale
Greater Goods
Weight Bathroom Scale
Tempered Glass
Automatic
LCD Screen
Battery Operated
11.8" x 11.8" x 0.8"
Etekcity Digital Weight Bathroom Scale
Etekcity
Digital Weight Bathroom Scale
Tempered Glass
Automatic
LCD Screen
Battery Operated
12" x 12" x 0.9"
RENPHO Bluetooth Body Fat Scale
RENPHO
Bluetooth Body Fat Scale
Tempered Glass
Automatic
Bluetooth
App Compatible
LCD Screen
Battery Operated
Color Options
11" x 11" x 1"
Detecto D1130 Large Dial Bathroom Scale
Detecto
D1130 Large Dial Bathroom Scale
Metal
Vinyl
Dial
Slip Resistant
11.25" x 11.75" x 3'
Famili 271B Digital Bathroom Scale
Famili
271B Digital Bathroom Scale
Tempered Glass
Automatic
LCD Screen
Battery Operated
Slip Resistant
12" x 13" x 0.8"
Kinzi New Precision Digital Bathroom Scale
Kinzi
New Precision Digital Bathroom Scale
Tempered Glass
Automatic
LCD Screen
Battery Operated
Lbs/Kilos
11.8" x 11.8" x 0.8"
Greater Goods Silicone Digital Bathroom Weight Scale
Greater Goods
Silicone Digital Bathroom Weight Scale
Tempered Glass
Silicone
LCD Screen
Battery Operated
Slip Resistant
Color Options
12" x 12" x 0.9"
Greater Goods Wifi Smart Connected Body Fat Bathroom Scale
Greater Goods
Wifi Smart Connected Body Fat Bathroom Scale
Tempered Glass
Automatic
Wifi Connectivity
App Compatible
LCD Screen
Battery Operated
Color Options
12.6" x 12.6" x 0.9"

 

Best Bathroom Scale

Greater Goods Weight Bathroom Scale

Greater Goods Weight Bathroom Scale

Our first pick for best bathroom scale features an extra-large display, perfect for those who have compromising eyesight.  The Greater Goods Weight Bathroom Scale has an extra-large LCD screen illuminated by a backlight.  This is also great for those weighing-in during low light hours or in darker circumstances.

This bathroom scale is outfitted with a tempered glass top which is able to hold up to 400 pounds.  Tempered glass is ultra durable as it is 5 to 10 times stronger than regular glass.  Furthermore, this scale sits on 4 scratch-resistant and non-slip feet.  This will help protect your floors while keeping the scale stable for accuracy.

The Greater Goods Weight Bathroom Scale will measure weight from 11 pounds to 400 pounds.  In addition, it will measure your weight to the exact decimal point.

To use this scale, simply step right up.  And, it’s this easy because it runs on 2 lithium batteries which are replaceable.

Finally, the Greater Goods Weight Bathroom Scale is a soft grey color.  This subtle, yet sleek scale, will go with any decor without screaming scale.

Pros:

This scale is extremely responsive.  Furthermore, it is very accurate if you’re using it on a level floor.  If you’re using it on a not-so-level floor, you may see a few pounds difference.

In addition, the design and color of this scale make it a favorite amongst consumers as it is highly unobtrusive.

Lastly, this bathroom scale has one of the largest displays on our list.  So, if your eyesight is compromised, this may be one to consider.

Cons:

Although the Greater Goods Weight Bathroom Scale has non-slip feet, the tempered top does not offer any resistance to slipping.  Therefore, this may not be a great option for those with little ones running around or for those who are prone to slipping.

 

Etekcity Digital Weight Bathroom Scale

Etekcity Digital Weight Bathroom Scale

This next pick for best bathroom scale is another one with a tempered glass platform.  The Etekcity Digital Weight Bathroom Scale features 6 millimeters of tempered glass for ultra durability and for a maximum weight of 400 pounds.

This bathroom scale automatically powers off and automatically sets back to zero.  Furthermore, it will alert you when the battery is low and if the weight exceeds the maximum.

And, for those with less than desirable eyesight, this scale features a large, LCD display with a backlight for low-light situations.

The Etekcity Digital Weight Bathroom Scale will read weight from 11 to 400 pounds and down to the decimal.  And, this is calculated by 4 high-precision sensors for ultimate accuracy.

Finally, this bathroom scale runs on 2 1.5V AAA batteries which are included and replaceable.  Furthermore, because this scale automatically powers off, this will help to preserve the life of the batteries.

Pros:

Style-wise, this is another unobtrusive pick.  It is sleek and unassuming but looks fabulous.

In addition, the Etekcity Digital Weight Bathroom Scale is highly accurate, durable and easily readable.

Cons:

Because this scale has black tempered glass, you can see stains fairly easily.  So, to keep it looking pristine, you may be wiping it down often.

Furthermore, this scale has non-slip padding on the bottom.  However, the top platform is not slip-resistant.

RENPHO Bluetooth Body Fat Scale

RENPHO Bluetooth Body Fat Scale

If you’re looking to track your progress, this is a great option to consider.  The RENPHO Bluetooth Body Fat Scale works via Bluetooth with the Apple Health, Google Fit and Fitbit apps.  And, once you’re synced up, you can take your weight and it will connect to the apps without the need for your phone.

This body fat scale will display your body weight while data, like BMI and body fat percentage, is stored on the apps.  Furthermore, RENPHO offers its own app which will track the following 11 different metrics:  Body Weight, BMI, Body Fat Percentage, Water Percentage, Skeletal Muscle, Fat-Free Body Weight, Muscle Mass, Bone Mass, Protein, Basal Metabolism and Body Age.  In addition, the RENPHO Bluetooth Body Fat Scale can track unlimited users.

This body fat scale is made of 5 millimeters of tempered glass with a non-slip base and the maximum weight should not exceed 396 pounds.  This scale also measures in increments of 0.2 pounds, so you will get an accurate reading down to the decimal.

The RENPHO Bluetooth Body Fat Scale features a large LED display with a backlight.  This backlight will illuminate the weight measurement in low-light situations.

Finally, this body fat scale runs on 3 replaceable AAA batteries which are included.  And, the scale comes in your choice of colors:  Black or White.

Pros:

If you’re serious about getting healthy, this is a fantastic place to start.  The app will alert you to your progress, or for some of us, alert us to our transgressions.  Whatever the case may be, this reminder is like a fit buddy and will help us to stay on track.

Furthermore, this body fat scale is highly accurate and durable.

Cons:

For some people, the idea of connecting to an app is beyond comprehension.  However, the good news is, it’s rather easy.  And, once you get it down, it’s done.

That being said, some consumers felt the scale was accurate but the app was anything but.

 

Detecto D1130 Large Dial Bathroom Scale

Detecto D1130 Large Dial Bathroom Scale

If you’re looking to keep things simple, the Detecto D1130 Large Dial Bathroom Scale will allow you to do just that.

This pick for best bathroom scale features heavy-duty construction with a white enamel finish.  The platform consists of non-skid vinyl which will keep the scale stable and help prevent injuries due to slipping.

The Detecto D1130 Large Dial Bathroom Scale will support up to 300 pounds and will configure weight from 0 to 300 pounds.  Furthermore, this scale has a large dial which is easy to read.

Finally, the Detecto doesn’t need any batteries as it works like an old-fashioned scale.  So, just step on to get a reading and it’s all set for the next session.

Pros:

The Detecto D1130 Large Dial Bathroom Scale has a vintage look to it that will easily go with any decor.

Furthermore, we love the non-skid vinyl platform which is great for those who are prone to slipping.  Also, it doesn’t need any batteries which reduces hassle in the long run.

Cons:

Some consumers found the dial hard to read without glasses or contacts.  So, depending on how bad your eyesight is, you may want to take this into consideration.

 

Famili 271B Digital Bathroom Scale

Famili 271B Digital Bathroom Scale

This pick for best bathroom scale automatically turns on when you step on.  And, it automatically turns off once you step off.  The Famili 271B Digital Bathroom Scale runs via 2 AAA batteries which are included and replaceable.

This digital bathroom scale measures weight from 11 to 400 pounds.  In addition, it has a maximum platform weight of 400 pounds.

The Famili 271B Digital Bathroom Scale features a 0.8 inch thick plastic platform which sits on 4 rubber feet.  This plastic platform boasts a round nodule pattern which will prevent slipping.  Furthermore, the rubber feet will help keep the scale stable and from sliding around.

Finally, this digital bathroom scale has a large LCD display which is illuminated with a backlight.  This will help to see the results in low-light conditions.

Pros:

This scale pretty much checks everything off our list:  accuracy, durability, anti-slip, large display and automatic functions.

Furthermore, the Famili 271B Digital Bathroom Scale offers a great texture which is very comfortable to stand on.

Cons:

It seems some consumers received duds which gave inaccurate readings.  However, most consumers agree the customer service in this particular situation was beyond great.

 

Kinzi New Precision Digital Bathroom Scale

Kinzi New Precision Digital Bathroom Scale

This pick for best bathroom scale is one of the highest reviewed scale on our list.  The Kinzi New Precision Digital Bathroom Scale is also one of the thinnest scales on our list.  Furthermore, it comes with removable extension legs.  So, if you choose to add these legs, you can prop it up a bit.  Or, you can just leave it flat on the floor.

This digital bathroom scale measures weight from 9 to 400 pounds.  Therefore, the weight limit with this scale is set at 400 pounds.

The Kinzi New Precision Digital Bathroom Scale automatically turns on once you step on, and it automatically turns off once you step off.  This will help extend the life of the batteries.  And, speaking of batteries, this digital scale runs on 2 included Lithium batteries which are replaceable.

This digital bathroom scale features an extra-large LCD screen with a backlight.  This backlight will assist you in low-light conditions.

Finally, the Kinzi Digital Bathroom Scale is thin, sleek and an unobtrusive color which will work with just about every decor.

Pros:

Consumers love this bathroom scale.  It’s easy to use, features a modern design, it’s accurate and it’s easy to read.

Furthermore, if you’re looking for a bathroom scale which is able to measure other units of weight, the Kinzi New Precision Digital Bathroom Scale will also measure stones and kilograms.

Cons:

Some consumers received scales that gave inaccurate readings.  If this happens to you, be sure to contact the company.

In addition, this digital bathroom scale does not have a non-slip platform.

 

Greater Goods Silicone Digital Bathroom Weight Scale

Greater Goods Silicone Digital Bathroom Weight Scale

This is a fun one.  The Greater Goods Silicone Digital Bathroom Weight Scale comes with a scale and a Slate Gray silicone cover.  However, you can switch up the covers with your choice of the following purchased separately:  Aqua, Raspberry, Rose Quartz, Stone Grey or Wheat Grass.

This scale features a tempered glass platform and a silicone cover.  And, this silicone has a beveled pattern making it non-slip and skid-resistant.

The Greater Goods Silicone Digital Bathroom Weight Scale has a disappearing LED display.  Once you step on the platform, the display will shine through the silicone cover to reveal your weight.  And, once you step off, your weight disappears…if it could only be that easy. 🙂

The Greater Goods Silicone Digital Bathroom Weight Scale is able to measure in pounds or kilograms by a press of a button.  And, it will support and measure a weight of up to 400 pounds.

Finally, this digital bathroom scale runs on 4 AAA batteries which are included and replaceable.

Pros:

We are in love with the design of this scale and the fact that you can switch up the colors.  Furthermore, the silicone top is a nice touch as it offers a firm platform to keep things stable.

In addition, it is able to calculate kilograms and pounds, which very few scales on the US market have that feature.

Cons:

Some consumers claim to have received an inaccurate scale.  However, it is important to note that there are hundreds of satisfied consumers.  And, just be sure when using any scale, that you place it on a level surface.

 

Greater Goods Wifi Smart Connected Body Fat Bathroom Scale

Greater Goods Wifi Smart Connected Body Fat Bathroom Scale

Our final pick for best bathroom scale is another one that is compatible with major fitness apps.  The Greater Goods Wifi Smart Connected Body Fat Bathroom Scale will connect to apps like Apple Health, Google Fit, FitBit, MyFitnessPal, Amazon Echo and more.  And, this scale offers a free Weight Gurus app in which you and 7 other users can view your individual progress.  All you need is WiFi to connect your results to the app.

The Great Goods Wifi Smart Connected Body Fat Bathroom Scale measures weight, body fat, BMI, muscle mass, water weight and bone mass.  And, these results will show up on the scale, as well as the app.

This bathroom scale features a tempered glass platform which can hold up to 400 pounds.  And, it will record precise readings down to the decimal.

Furthermore, the bottom of this scale has non-slip, scratch-resistant feet.  This will help keep the scale stable while protecting the floors.

The Greater Goods Wifi Smart Connected Body Fat Bathroom Scale features an extra-large LCD screen with a backlight.  This backlight will help users see their results in low-light conditions.

Finally, this bathroom scale runs on 4 AAA batteries which are included and replaceable.  And, to preserve battery life, this scale will automatically turn on when you step on and turn off when you step off.

Pros:

Some of us just want the weight, body fat, BMI, muscle mass, water weight and bone mass readings without the app.  And, this scale does just that.  However, the app is fantastic if you want to track your results and give yourself something to celebrate.

Cons:

Some users had trouble getting past the Wifi setup.  And, after further research, it looks like an issue with the Wifi chip they received.  It’s important to note that most consumers received a good chip, however, if you’re one of the unlucky ones, make sure you contact the company.

Best Bean Bag Chair for Adults

Best Bean Bag Chair for Adults

So, you’re a big kid and you’re looking for the best bean bag chair for adults.  We get it, there’s absolutely nothing wrong with living out your childhood dreams.  In fact, it’s rather healthy to tap into your inner child and live out the basic desires we had as a kid.

Therefore, for the kid in all of us, we went on a treasure hunt for the best bean bag chair for adults.  And, we found some incredible picks that are a near-exact replica of the bean bags we grew up with.  However, we also found a few bean bags which are an innovative take on the age-old classic.

But, there are a few things to take into consideration when picking out the best bean bag chair for adults.  And this comes down to, which one is right for you?

First, everyone’s idea of comfort varies.  Therefore, take into consideration what type of lounging you will be doing.  Do you want to sink into the bean bag or do you want a more upright, posture-perfect position?  And the older we get, the less limber our bodies are.  So, depending on how your flexibility is treating you, you should pick out a bean bag accordingly.

Best Bean Bag Chair for Adults

Secondly, the other thing to consider is getting out of the bean bag.  If you’re looking at bad knees or an injury to your back, you may want to go with a bean bag which sits higher up off the ground.  This is so you’re able to get out of the bean bag without further injury yourself or putting unnecessary pressure on some rather sensitive parts.  So, if you’re prone to re-injuries, we do suggest a firmer, more upright bean bag.

Now that we’ve got the adulting out of the way, it’s time to talk about stuffing.  The stuffing is what makes the bean bag the “bean” bag.  However, when it comes to bean bags for adults, you will see a couple of different types of stuffing.  Some have beans while others have a memory foam filling.  So, please be cautious and keep in mind that not all fillings are beans.

Next, when choosing the best bean bag chair for adults, you will have plenty of options with the outer layer.  There are bean bags with a velvety smooth cover, classic cotton, polyester for easy maintenance or vinyl for some added style.  And, what you choose should be a reflection of your decor and the type of comfort you’re looking for.

Lastly, pick out the size that’s right for you.  Our final picks for best bean bag chair for adults come in all different sizes, with some catering to teens and smaller-sized adults, while others can hold 2 or 3 adults at a time.

 

Best Bean Bag Chair for Adults

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Flash Furniture Oversized Bean Bag Chair
Flash Furniture
Oversized Bean Bag Chair
Polystyrene Beads
Cotton Upholstery
Machine Washable
Color Options
42" x 42" x 19"
Lumaland Luxury 5-Foot Bean Bag Chair
Lumaland
Luxury 5-Foot Bean Bag Chair
Memory Foam
Micro Suede Upholstery
Machine Washable
Color Options
Size Options
3' - 7'
BeanBob Bean Bag Chair
BeanBob
Bean Bag Chair
Memory Foam
Polyester Upholstery
Machine Washable
Carrying Handle
Color Options
3' x 3' x 3'
Jaxx 6 Foot Cocoon Large Bean Bag Chair
Jaxx
6 Foot Cocoon Large Bean Bag Chair
Shredded Memory Foam
Micro Suede Upholstery
Machine Washable
Color Options
72” x 72” x 20”
Big Joe Milano Bean Bag Chair
Big Joe
Milano Bean Bag Chair
Polystyrene Beads
Upholstery Options
Color Options
32" x 28" 25"
Gold Medal Large Leather Look Tear Drop Bean Bag
Gold Medal
Large Leather Look Tear Drop Bean Bag
Polystyrene Beads
Vinyl Upholstery
Color Options
35" x 34" x 27"
Majestic Home Goods Classic Bean Bag Chair
Majestic Home Goods
Classic Bean Bag Chair
Polystyrene Beads
Polyester Upholstery
Indoor/Outdoor
UV Protected
Machine Washable
Color Options
28" x 28" x 22"

 

Best Bean Bag Chair for Adults

Flash Furniture Oversized Bean Bag Chair

Flash Furniture Oversized Bean Bag Chair

Our first pick for best bean bag chair for adults is as classic as you can get.  The Flash Furniture Oversized Bean Bag Chair is stuffed with foam beads which consists of breathable polystyrene.

And, this bean bag chair is covered with cotton upholstery which is removable and machine washable.  In addition, you can also wipe down this cotton  upholstery with a damp cloth if need be.

This Flash Furniture Bean Bag Chair is oversized which can accommodate kids and larger adults alike.  Measuring in at 42 inches long, 42 inches wide and 19 inches tall, this bean bag chair for adults can cater to just about everyone in the family.

Furthermore, the Flash Furniture Oversized Bean Bag Chair is rather light at approximately 10 pounds.  And, that makes this bean bag easy to transport from room to room.

Finally, with this bean bag, you get your choice of 16 different colors and some pattern options.  Choose from Camaflouge, Denim, Gray, Green Dot, Hot Pink, Lavender Dot, Light Pink Dot, Mint Green, Navy Blue, Purple, Red, Royal Blue, White Furry, Brown, Green or Pink.

Pros:

This bean bag is well made, comfortable, and for most adults, it is roomy enough to spread out.

Furthermore, it is easily adjustable to garner more back support if need be.

Cons:

While most consumers are happy with this purchase, some state this bean bag needs more filling.  Luckily that issue is easily solvable as you can purchase additional filling here.

Lumaland Luxury 5-Foot Bean Bag Chair

Lumaland Luxury 5-Foot Bean Bag Chair

If you’re looking for soft and luxurious, this is a pick to consider.  The Lumaland Luxury 5-Foot Bean Bag Chair has a micro suede cover that will keep you cozy and coddled.

This micro suede cover is removable to reveal a protective beige polyester cover.  So, while you’re machine washing your outer cover you can continue to lounge away.  Furthermore, this inner cover will allow for extra added protection against spills.

The Lumaland Luxury Bean Bag Chair is large in size and can comfortably fit 2 regular-sized adults.  Or, you can relax and spread out all by yourself.  It measures 48 inches long by 60 inches wide.

However, if you’re looking for something smaller or larger, you have your choice of sizes.  Choose between 3 feet, 4 feet, 5 feet, 6 feet or 7 feet.

This pick for best bean bag chair for adults is filled with high quality foam material designed to keep your body temperature regulated.  In addition, this foam retains memory so it will form to your body for ultimate comfort.  So, if you’re looking for the classic bean feel, you may want to check out some of our other picks.

The Lumaland Luxury Bean Bag Chair comes in 8 color options:  Black, Red, Brown, Navy Blue, Purple, Light Blue, Light Green or Dark Grey.

Pros:

Because this bean bag is made of memory foam, it will form to your shape.  So, if you’re looking for more support, this is one to consider.

Additionally, the Lumaland Luxury Bean Bag Chair comes in multiple sizes, so you may even be able to replace the couch if need be.

Cons:

Some consumers felt the memory foam was too stiff.  However, they may have been expecting the traditional beans.  So, make sure you know what you’re ordering with this one.

Furthermore, some consumers had issues with the dye of the outer cover bleeding onto their carpet and wood floor.  The best bet is to wash the outer cover a few times before using.

BeanBob Bean Bag Chair

BeanBob Bean Bag Chair

This pick for best bean bag chair for adults sits higher off the ground.  So, if you’re looking for an easy in and easy out, this is a contender.

The BeanBob Bean Bag Chair measures 3 feet by 3 feet by 3 feet.  So, it is large enough to fit just about every size of adult.

This bean bag chair for adults is filled with virgin foam.  Virgin foam is made of polyurethane and this particular foam will mold to the shape of your body.  Therefore, this bean bag chair will offer you extra support.

The BeanBob Bean Bag Chair comes with a removable outer cover.  This cover is machine washable to help keep the chair in pristine condition.

Finally, to easily transport this chair from room to room, it comes with a convenient carrying handle.

Pros:

Consumers agree, this bean bag is extremely durable.  In addition, it is a great product, especially for the price.

Cons:

If you’re looking for actual bean filling, you may want to check out some of our other picks.  The BeanBob Bean Bag Chair is filled with memory foam.

Jaxx 6 Foot Cocoon Large Bean Bag Chair

Jaxx 6 Foot Cocoon Large Bean Bag Chair

If you’re looking to spread out, this bean bag chair for adults will allow you to do just that.  However, it also allows you to sit in it like a regular ol’ bean bag by flipping it on its side. So, with this pick for best bag chair for adults, you get the best of both worlds.

The Jaxx 6 Foot Cocoon Large Bean Bag Chair features a micro-suede polyester cover which is removable, machine washable and dryable.  And, this cover is soft and comfy.  Therefore, if you’re looking for a luxurious cozy-feel, this chair is heaven.

This bean bag for adults contains shredded memory foam.  This will allow you to sink in the bag while the bag forms to the curves of your body.  So, if you’re unsure to go with beans or a foam bag, this is a great compromise.

Finally, the Jaxx 6 Foot Cocoon Large Bean Bag Chair comes in your choice of colors.  Choose between Aqua, Black, Camel, Charcoal, Chocolate, Cinnabar, Mandarin or Navy.

Pros:

This bean bag chair can hold up to 2 adults comfortably.  Furthermore, this bag is one of the more comfortable ones on the list due to the shredded memory foam.  This foam will also give you extra support.

In addition, we love that you can use this bag by spreading it out or propping it up in the traditional bean bag style.

Cons:

Some consumers complain that there isn’t enough foam filling.  However, it is important to note that most consumers are extremely happy.  And, as one consumer stated, you need to allow the foam plenty of time to expand after removing it from the packaging.

 

Big Joe Milano Bean Bag Chair

Big Joe Milano Bean Bag Chair

This bean bag chair really emphasises the chair part.  The Big Joe Milano Bean Bag Chair is designed just like a chair but with the bean feel.

This bean bag chair can accommodate children and adults alike.  It measures 32 inches long, 28 inches wide and 25 inches tall.  And, word on the street is it can accommodate larger-sized adults as well.

The Big Joe Milano Bean Bag Chair is outfitted with a soft, plush fabric.  However, there are many options when it comes to this chair.  You can choose between parachute-like material, vinyl-like material, plush and even a shag.  Furthermore, just follow this link and you will find never-ending color options.

This pick for best bean bag chair for adults is filled with UltimaX Beans.  These beans are refillable and you can find the refills here.  UltimaX Beans are made of virgin polystyrene and are 100% recyclable.  Furthermore, these beans are small, dense and long-lasting.  

Finally, the outer cover of the Big Joe Milano Bean Bag Chair is double-stitched and comes with 2 safety locking zippers.  This will help ensure the beans stay where they’re intended to stay.

Pros:

The Big Joe Milano Bean Bag Chair is extremely well made and durable.  And, if you’re looking for back support, this is an excellent option.

Furthermore, since it sits higher off the ground, it’s easy to get in and out of.

Cons:

The cover is not removable, therefore, you can’t machine wash it.  However, this bean bag chair cleans up nicely with a damp cloth.

 

Gold Medal Large Leather Look Tear Drop Bean Bag

Gold Medal Large Leather Look Tear Drop Bean Bag

If you’re into the retro look, the Gold Medal Large Tear Drop Bean Bag is as retro as you’re going to get.  And, this will not only go with the retro type of decor but it can easily slide in with a modern style of decor.

This bean bag is outfitted with vinyl and filled with virgin polystyrene beans.  The vinyl covering is double stitched and comes with a child safe zipper to keep the beans inside the bag where they belong.  Furthermore, the vinyl is durable and cleanup is as easy as wiping it down with a damp cloth.

The Gold Medal Large Tear Drop Bean Bag measures 35 inches long, 34 inches wide and 27 inches tall.  And, because of the tear drop shape, it provides back support and an easier exit than traditional shaped bean bags.

Lastly, you get your choice of colors.  Choose between Black, Cobblestone, Green, Hot Pink, Medium Blue, Navy, Purple, Scarlet or Wine.

Pros:

We love the style of this particular bean bag.  And, we mentioned it can go with retro and modern decor, however, we can also see it fitting right in with a western style of decor and even country.

Furthermore, this bean bag is durable and the vinyl is tough.  So, expect this bag to last a while.

Cons:

Some consumers felt this bag didn’t have enough filling.  However, you can purchase extra filling here.

Majestic Home Goods Classic Bean Bag Chair

Majestic Home Goods Classic Bean Bag Chair

Our final pick for best bean bag chair for adults can work both indoors and outdoors.  The Majestic Home Goods Classic Bean Bag Chair features a UV protected outer cover made of polyester.  Furthermore, the polyester is high quality and ultra durable.  And, the good news is, this outer cover is removable and machine washable.

This bean bag chair also comes with an inner cotton cover.  This cover helps keep the beans in place.  And, speaking of beans, the Majestic Home Goods Classic Bean Bag Chair is filled with polystyrene beans which are 50% recycled.

This bean bag chair best accommodates teens and smaller-sized adults.  The measurements run 28 inches long, 28 inches wide and 22 inches tall.  And, this chair weighs approximately 7 pounds.

Lastly, the Majestic Home Goods Classic Bean Bag Chair comes in your choice of colors:  Sage Green, Black, Chocolate Brown, Gray, Navy Blue, Pink, Yellow, Burnt Orange, Sage Red, Teal Blue or Tiffany Blue.

Pros:

This bean bag chair is a classic choice all around.  In addition, it comes with the classic Chevron print which can add some extra needed pop to any room.

Cons:

Some consumers feel the fabric is rather uncomfortable and the feel of the chair is stiff.  So, if you’re looking for more support, the fact that this chair is on the stiff side may be a good thing.

And, this chair is on the smaller side, with some consumers stating “it’s smaller than expected.”

 

Best Belgian Waffle Makers

7 Best Belgian Waffle Makers

So, how do you like your waffles?  Answering this question will determine which of these 7 best Belgian waffle makers are right for you.  And, just like chefs, each of these waffle makers have their own individualistic style of cooking.

Do you like deep dish waffles?  How about lightly browned waffles with a crispy outer texture?  Or, how about fluffy waffles or flat as a pancake waffles?  Our picks for best Belgian waffle makers has something for everyone.

Best Belgian Waffle Makers

In addition, each of these waffle makers vary on how many waffles you can make at one time.  So, if you’re feeding a family of 6, you may want to consider cooking in bulk and choosing a waffle maker accordingly.  If you’re cooking for one, you may want to consider going with a 2 slice waffle maker or you maybe even want to check out the waffle iron which cooks right on the stove top.

So, whatever your taste may be, you can find it on our list.  Furthermore, each of these picks for 8 best Belgian waffle makers are highly regarded amongst consumers and they have the reviews to back them up.

 

Best Belgian Waffle Makers

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Cuisinart WAF-300 Belgian Waffle Maker
Cuisinart
WAF-300 Belgian Waffle Maker
4-Slice Waffle Plates
4-Slot Pancake Plate
6 Temperature Controls
Indicator Lights
Indicator Alert
Removable Plates
9.7" x 12.2" x 6.3"
KRUPS 8000035972 GQ502D Adjustable Temperature Belgian Waffle Maker
KRUPS
8000035972 GQ502D Adjustable Temperature Belgian Waffle Maker
4-Slice Waffle Plates
5 Temperature Controls
Indicator Lights
Indicator Alert
Removable Plates
12.6" x 6.7" x 16.5"
Cuisinart WAF-F20 Double Belgian Waffle Maker
Cuisinart
WAF-F20 Double Belgian Waffle Maker
2 x 4-Slice Waffle Plates
6 Temperature Controls
180 Degree Rotation
Indicator Lights
Indicator Alert
10.6" x 16.5" x 10.2"
Breville The Smart 4-Slice Waffle Maker
Breville
The Smart 4-Slice Waffle Maker
4-Slice Waffle Plates
12 Temperature Controls
Batter Settings
Indicator Lights
Indicator Alert
15.8" x 8.8" x 18.5"
Oster 1-1/2 Inch Thick Belgian Flip Waffle Maker
Oster
1-1/2 Inch Thick Belgian Flip Waffle Maker
4-Slice Waffle Plates
Temperature Controls
180 Degree Rotation
Indicator Lights
Drip Tray
14.3" x 5.8" x 10.4"
NordicWare 15040 Cast Aluminum Stovetop Belgium Waffle Iron
NordicWare
15040 Cast Aluminum Stovetop Belgium Waffle Iron
4-Slice Waffle Plates
PFOA-Free
17" x 8" x 2"
Hamilton Beach Flip Belgian Waffle Maker
Hamilton Beach
Flip Belgian Waffle Maker
4-Slice Waffle Plates
3 Temperature Controls
180 Degree Rotation
Indicator Lights
Drip Tray
14.9" x 9.9" x 9.1"

 

Best Belgian Waffle Makers

Cuisinart WAF-300 Belgian Waffle Maker

Cuisinart WAF-300 Belgian Waffle Maker

Our first pick on our list for best Belgian waffle makers will whip up some thick and fluffy waffles.  And not only can the Cuisinart WAF-300 Belgian Waffle Maker cook some incredible waffles in a 4-slice Belgian waffle plate.  In addition, it also comes with a 4-slot pancake plate to switch things up a bit.  So, if you have a family of 1 to 4 people, this size of waffle maker should suit you just fine.

The Cuisinart WAF-300 Belgian Waffle Maker features 6 temperature controls.  If you would like your waffles on the fluffier side, use settings 1 through 3.  If you’re looking for a crispier outer layer, use the higher settings.  And, speaking of fluffy, this waffle plate is deep enough to make 1 to 1-1/2 inch thick waffles.

Cooking with the Cuisinart is simple.  Once the waffle maker reaches its cooking temperature, a “Ready to Bake” indicator light will alert you to pour in the waffle or pancake mixture.  And, once its finished cooking according to your desired setting, the “Ready to Eat” indicator will light up and you will hear an unmistakable beep alerting you to some fresh-baked heaven.  Time to dish up.

The Cuisinart WAF-300 features non stick removable plates which are dishwasher safe.  Furthermore, this Belgian waffle maker has an attractive brushed steel outer layer which will fit in flawlessly with any decor.

Finally, for easy storing until the next waffle showdown, this Belgian waffle maker has the capacity to sit upright.  And this works well when storing in cupboards as it saves precious room.

Pros:

Because the Cuisinart WAF-300 Belgian Waffle Maker comes with a pancake plate, this also can be used for grilled sandwiches and paninis.

In addition, this waffle maker cooks rather fast with each waffle taking roughly 2 to 3 minutes.

Cons:

Although this Belgian waffle maker cooks rather fast, it takes almost 3 times as long to heat up.

Furthermore, some consumers felt this Belgian waffle maker looked durable, but found it to be flimsy in construction.

Lastly, the Cuisinart Belgian Waffle Maker doesn’t come with a handle lock so the top can fly open if not handled properly.

KRUPS 8000035972 GQ502D Adjustable Temperature Belgian Waffle Maker

KRUPS 8000035972 GQ502D Adjustable Temperature Belgian Waffle Maker

This next pick on our list of best Belgian waffle makers is for those of us who are craving Belgian waffles that are on the thinner side.  The KRUPS Belgian Waffle Maker can cook up to 4 slices of Belgian waffles at one time.  And, at this rate, this is great for a household of up to 4 people.

This Belgian waffle maker features 5 adjustable browning settings which you can set from light to dark.  And, it has red and green indicator lights to let you know when the waffle maker is on, when it’s ready for the waffle mixture and when it’s ready for consumption.  In addition, each of these stages in the process comes with a beep so you can audibly hear when each stage is complete.

The KRUPS Adjustable Temperature Belgian Waffle Maker comes with removable die-cast plates with non stick coating.  Die-cast is simply the process in which these plates are made.  The metal is poured into a cast under high pressure until it forms into a mold.  These plates are removable and dishwasher safe for easy cleaning.

Finally, this Belgian waffle maker will look great in just about any kitchen as it is made of stainless steel.  And, once you’re ready to store it, it has a convenient cord wrap and a handle lock to keep things secure.

Pros:

This pick on our list for best waffles makers is a great waffle maker for the price.

And, it comes with 5 browning settings so you can get the perfect amount of crispiness.

Cons:

If you’re looking for real Belgian waffles, these waffles might disappoint you as they are much thinner than the real deal.

Cuisinart WAF-F20 Double Belgian Waffle Maker

Cuisinart WAF-F20 Double Belgian Waffle Maker

This Belgian waffle maker was rated the best Belgian waffle maker by America’s Test Kitchen.  Now, we consider ourselves to be experts but America’s Test Kitchen always has the final say.  So, the experts have spoken and this is the best Belgian waffle maker money can buy.

Furthermore, this Belgian waffle maker is made with durability and quality.  The outside of the waffle maker features stainless steel with non stick waffle plates on the inside.  However, it is important to note that these waffle plates are not removable, so cleanup will be a bit more tedious.

The Cuisinart WAF-F20 Double Belgian Waffle Maker can cook 2 4-slice Belgian waffles at once.  So, if you’re looking to feed a lot of people then this is a pick to consider.  

This waffle maker cooks up to 1-inch Belgian waffles with deep pockets.  In addition, it has 6 settings where you can control your desired level of crispiness.

Finally, the Cuisinart features a 180 degree rotation so the waffles bake more evenly.  And, once the desired time is up, there is an indicator light and 3 consecutive beeps to let you know breakfast is served.

Pros:

This pick on our list for best Belgian waffle makers is a fun one.  It makes you feel as if you’re a part of the process as you flip the waffles over to create a more thorough and evenly baked waffle.

Furthermore, the Cuisinart WAF-F20 Double Belgian Waffle Maker bakes 2 waffles at a time.  And, this is great for households both large and small.  If you’re cooking just for yourself, have seconds!  However, if you just want to cook one waffle at a time, you can do that too.

Cons:

The waffle plates are not removable which makes cleanup a bit more difficult.

 

Breville The Smart 4-Slice Waffle Maker

Breville The Smart 4-Slice Waffle Maker

Many consumers agree, this bakes the real McCoy, true deep dish Belgian waffles.  So, if you’re looking for some fluffy heaven-like Belgian waffles, this is a pick to consider.

In addition, The Smart 4-Slice Waffle Maker by Breville has 12 heat settings so you can control, in near detail, your desired amount of crispiness.  And, you can also specify the batter type to achieve an even more custom baking experience.  These batter types include Belgian, Classic, Chocolate and Buttermilk.

This pick for best Belgian waffle maker is made of stainless steel on the outside and non stick cast aluminum waffle plates on the inside.  Furthermore, these plates are surrounded by a moat to catch any overflow.

The baking begins when you close the top lid.  Once the waffles are done, an indicator light and an audible alert will let you know when breakfast is ready.  Once the waffle is done, this waffle maker will stop cooking on its own.

Finally, just like its name, The Smart 4-Slice Waffle Maker by Breville bakes 4 waffles at a time.  So, if you’re hungry or you’re feeding a large family, this is a great option to consider.

Pros:

If you want true Belgian waffles, go to Belgium.  Or, you can purchase The Smart 4-Slice Waffle Maker by Breville.  These are true, deep-dish Belgian waffles.

Furthermore, this pick on our list of best Belgian waffle makers has the most settings.  So, you can achieve your desired crispiness in near detail.

Cons:

The waffle plates are not removable which will make cleanup a bit more tedious.

Oster 1-1/2 Inch Thick Belgian Flip Waffle Maker

Oster 1-1/2 Inch Thick Belgian Flip Waffle Maker

If you’re on a budget, this is a great pick to consider.  The Oster 1-1/2 Inch Thick Belgian Flip Waffle Maker is not only low on price, but it’s also a space-saving waffle maker.  And, when storing this waffle maker, it stands vertically to save precious space in the cupboard.

This Belgian waffle maker is another pick on our list of best Belgian waffle makers that features the flip operation.  This is great for cooking waffles more thoroughly and evenly.

The Oster Belgian Flip Waffle Maker comes with a 1-1/2 inch thick, non stick surface.  And, if you’re looking for thick Belgian waffles, this is one of the thickest on our list.

Furthermore, if you like your waffles crispy, this waffle maker features an adjustable temperature control to cater to your desire.  Once the temperature control is set, this waffle maker heats up quickly.

Lastly, the Oster 1-1/2 Inch Thick Belgian Flip Waffle Maker has a removable drip tray for easy cleanup.

Pros:

For the price, this is a decent machine which cooks exceptional waffles.  So, if you’re not ready to throw down some money on a higher end Belgian waffle maker, this should fuel your appetite in the meantime.

Cons:

The Oster Belgian Flip Waffle Maker is rather difficult to clean as the plates aren’t removable.  Best case scenario, purchase a small soft-head scrub or even a toothbrush to help you reach between the grates.

NordicWare 15040 Cast Aluminum Stovetop Belgium Waffle Iron

NordicWare 15040 Cast Aluminum Stovetop Belgium Waffle Iron

Sometimes simple is better and sometimes cooking Belgian waffles the old-fashioned way is even better.  The NordicWare 15040 Cast Aluminum Stovetop Belgium Waffle Iron comes from a company that was founded in 1946 and who are still manufacturing most of their products in Minneapolis.  And, this company also won the 2015 Minnesota Manufacturing Award for Sustainability.  So, it’s a true salt of the earth company.

The NordicWare 15040 Cast Aluminum Stovetop Belgium Waffle Iron is made of PFOA-free non stick coated cast aluminum.  And, essentially, PFOA means Teflon-free.

This Belgian waffle maker simply works on the stove.  To get the waffles cooking, just preheat the waffle iron on both sides.  Pour in the batter and cook for 30 seconds on one side and 2 to 3 minutes on the other side.  The good news is, the handle stays cool while the waffles are cooking.  Once the waffles are finished, 4 delicious waffles easily go from the iron and onto your plate.

Pros:

This is a definitely a pick to consider, even if you came here looking for an electric Belgian waffle maker.  This company has long-standing values that coincide historically as well as environmentally.  And, they make high quality products.

Furthermore, the NordicWare 15040 Cast Aluminum Stovetop Belgium Waffle Iron cooks up some decadent, crispy waffles that melt in your mouth.

Cons:

This waffle iron takes a little more work than its electric counterparts.  Not much, but a little.  However, these waffles are worth it.

Hamilton Beach Flip Belgian Waffle Maker

Hamilton Beach Flip Belgian Waffle Maker

The final pick on our list of best Belgian waffle makers is one that cooks thick and fluffy waffles.  In addition, the outside will get nice and crispy.

However, what differentiates this flip waffle maker from the others on our list is the waffle plates are removable for easy cleanup.  So, if you’re set on a flip waffle maker but insist on removable plates, this is a contender.

The Hamilton Beach Flip Belgian Waffle Maker is made of stainless steel with non stick waffle plates and a removable drip tray.  Furthermore, the waffle plates and drip tray are dishwasher safe.

This waffle maker has 3 browning settings to help achieve your desired crispiness.  Once the desired cook time is set, a ready light will come on to alert it’s time to add the batter.  Then, lock the batter in place and the waffles are closer to being on your plate.  After about 5 to 8 minutes, depending on how crispy you like your waffles, breakfast is served.

Finally, when flipping the waffles, the Hamilton Beach Flip Belgian Waffle Maker features a cool-touch handle.  And, this cool-touch handle folds down for easy storage.

Pros:

The Hamilton Beach Flip Belgian Waffle Maker is the best flip waffle maker if you require removable trays.  Furthermore, this waffle maker is extra easy to clean as it also comes with a drip tray to prevent overflow.  And, the waffle trays and drip tray are both dishwasher safe. 

Cons:

This waffle maker doesn’t come with an audible alert to let you know the waffles are ready.  So, to prevent overcooking, you will need to keep a close eye on them.

In addition, some consumers felt this waffle maker doesn’t cook waffles very evenly.  Therefore, you may want to flip more times than normal in order to get a more evenly cooked waffle.

Best Spin Mop

Best Spin Mop for Small and Large Spaces

If you’re looking for the best spin mop, there are a variety of options you have when choosing the best spin mop for your lifestyle.  And, we found an array of options that will work for you, whatever your scenario may be.

But first, let’s go over some of the options you have in store.  While most of our picks are manual, we have a battery-operated spin mop that will do the work for you.  Sounds like a great plan, right?

However, if you’re looking for something more basic, we have 6 manual spin mops to choose from.  And, most people tend to choose the best spin mop that’s appropriate for their space.  So, if you’re working with a small space, it’s best to go with a smaller bucket.  If you’re looking to spick and span a larger space, you will want to go with a larger bucket.

Best Spin Mop

In addition, when it comes to the larger buckets, some of our picks come with wheels.  Therefore, its less strain on your back and joints.  So, space is also something to take into consideration when choosing a bucket that has wheels.  If you have a larger space to work with, wheels will probably be the most pragmatic choice.

Another aspect consumers run into when choosing a spin mop is storage space.  So, before biting the bullet and choosing the largest spin mop on our list, make sure you have room to tuck it away when the mopping duty is done.

You may also have a situation where you would like to warn others of the dangers of a wet floor.  Therefore, we included a bucket that has the traditional warning sign letting others know there is danger ahead.

Other options some of our final picks possess are splash guard, foot pedal, soap dispenser and adjustable handle.  However, all of our manual picks offer the much desired built-in wringer.

So, take a browse around and get to the know these tools that are designed to make your life a whole lot easier and cleaner.

 

Best Spin Mop

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
O-Cedar EasyWring Microfiber Spin Mop and Bucket Floor Cleaning System
O-Cedar
EasyWring Microfiber Spin Mop and Bucket Floor Cleaning System
Microfiber Mop Head
Built-In Wringer
Foot Pedal
Easy-Control Water Release
Splash Guard
Angled Mop Head
360 Degree Rotation
Machine Washable
19.5" x 11.7" x 11.5"
5.38 lbs
Hapinnex Spinning Mop Bucket Set
Hapinnex
Spinning Mop Bucket Set
Stainless Steel
Microfiber Mop Head
Built-In Wringer
Self-Balancing
Easy-Press System
Splash Guard
360 Degree Swivel
Latch Lock
Drain Plug
18.1" x 9.1" x 10.2"
3.99 lbs
Bissell Spinwave Cordless Hard Floor Mop
Bissell
Spinwave Cordless Hard Floor Mop
Cordless
Battery Operated
Soft Touch Pads
Scrubby Pads
On-Demand Spray
Swivel Steering
16" x 8" x 45"
14.1 lbs
Finether Single Bucket Spin Mop Cleaning System
Finether
Single Bucket Spin Mop Cleaning System
Microfiber Mop Head
Stainless Steel
Built-In Wringer
2-in-1 System
Easy Pour Outlet
12" x 12" x 12"
7.9 lbs
CycloMop Commercial Spinning Wet & Dry Mop
CycloMop
Commercial Spinning Wet & Dry Mop
Stainless Steel
Microfiber Mop Head
Built-In Wringer
Foot Pedal
Drain Plug
21" x 12" x 11.5"
10 lbs
RoMop Easy to Go Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop
RoMop
Easy to Go Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop
Stainless Steel
Microfiber Mop Head
Chenille Mop Head
Scrub Mop Head
Built-In Wringer
Drain Plug
Wheels
19.5" x 13.8" x 11.5"
7.4 lbs
Mopnado Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop
Mopnado
Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop
Stainless Steel
Microfiber Mop Head
Scrub Mop Head
Built-In Wringer
Soap Dispenser
Wheels
20" x 14" x 11.5"
9.9 lbs

 

Best Spin Mop

 

O-Cedar EasyWring Microfiber Spin Mop and Bucket Floor Cleaning System

O-Cedar EasyWring Microfiber Spin Mop and Bucket Floor Cleaning System

Our first pick on our list for best spin mop is one of the most highly reviewed mops out there.  The O-Cedar EasyWring Spin Mop and Bucket Cleaning System has a pretty impressive list of features that make cleaning much easier.

However, it is important to note that the bucket does not come with wheels.  So, if you don’t mind carrying the bucket from room to room or you’re working with a smaller space, this is an option to consider.  If you’re looking to wheel a bucket around as the task at hand is rather large, you may want to consider some of our other options.

The O-Cedar EasyWring Spin Mop and Bucket Cleaning System features a built-in wringer.  And, this wringer works by simply stepping on the foot pedal.  This foot pedal also controls how saturated you want the mop.  So, if you’re looking for a saturated mop, just push down on the pedal once.  If you’re looking for a damp mop, push down on the pedal 5 times and so on.

And to keep things tidy, the bucket features a splash guard.  So, when you’re ringing out the mop, the water stays where it should – inside the bucket.

This spin mop is made of microfiber which is suitable for all hard surface floors, including wood floors.  Microfiber is gentle enough so it doesn’t scratch the surface of the floor, but it is tough enough to remove dirt and grime.

In addition, this spin mop features a mop head in the shape of a triangle.  This will ensure you reach those corners adequately and efficiently.  And, it has a flexible mop head which rotates in a 360 degree motion to reach just about anywhere.

Finally, this mop head is machine washable and we recommend you let it air dry.  Also, it is recommended you replace the mop head every 3-6 months.  Of course, this depends on how often you will be using the mop.

Pros:

This spin mop is one of the most highly reviewed mops on the market.  And this means thousands of satisfied consumers.  The O-Cedar EasyWring Spin Mop and Bucket Floor Cleaning System has just about every feature you could imagine with a mop.

Cons:

Although most consumers are happy with this product, there are some consumers who state this mop broke after a few months of use.

In addition, if you’re looking for a mop with wheels, this is probably the only feature this mop is lacking.

Lastly, some consumers have complained the mop is rather short in size.  So, if you’re on the tall side, you may want to check out another option.

 

Hapinnex Spinning Mop Bucket Set

Hapinnex Spinning Mop Bucket Set

This spin mop touts a self-balanced bucket.  So, if you are looking for extra security to make sure the water stays inside the bucket as intended, this an option to consider.  And, along with the self-balanced bucket feature, this spin mop also features a detachable splash guard.

The Hapinnex Spinning Mop Bucket Set features a 360 degree swivel head and rotates up to 180 degrees to clean under hard to reach areas.  And, attached to the swivel head is a washable and replaceable microfiber mop head.  Microfiber is gentle enough to work on all hard-surfaced floors including wood floors as it will not scratch the surface.

This spin mop works by way of an Easy-Press system.  Just push down on the handle and this will activate the spinning mechanism.  If you would like to wring the mop out further, just give it another push.

However, the one thing to consider with this particular spin mop is it doesn’t come with wheels.  So, if you’re working with a smaller space, this may be suitable for you.  If you’re working with a larger space, you may want to check out our other picks which offer wheels.

The Hapinnex Spinning Mop Bucket Set is made with plastic and stainless steel.  Therefore, this mop is more durable than their all-plastic counterparts.

And speaking of durability, this spin mop comes with a latch lock.  This will help secure the length of the pole to avoid a rather awkward mopping session.

Finally, the mop bucket features a convenient drain plug which sits towards the bottom of the bucket.  This is a great feature for easy draining, especially when you have a bucket full of dirty water.

Pros:

This pick for best spin mop is a great choice for smaller spaces.  And, because it features a self-balanced bucket, this will greatly reduce the awkwardness when carrying this bucket from point A to point B.

In addition, we love the drain plug included with this bucket.  It makes the job of emptying the bucket so much more fluid.

Cons:

This is another pick which doesn’t come with wheels.  However, for a lot of people, this isn’t necessary.

And, a few consumers have complained that the mop handle fell apart after a few uses.  It is important to note, though, that the majority of consumers are very satisfied with their purchase.

 

Bissell Spinwave Cordless Hard Floor Mop

Bissell Spinwave Cordless Hard Floor Mop

This is perhaps the easiest spin mop you can own.  The Bissell Spinwave Cordless Hard Floor Mop pretty much does the work for you.  It runs on 18 volts of Lithium ion batteries to clean for up to 20 minutes.

And because it runs on batteries, it is cordless.  So no switching outlets, no getting the cord trapped in the doorway, it’s just mop and go.

The Bissell Spinwave Cordless Hard Floor Mop works on all hard-surfaced floors that are sealed.  This includes wood, tile, linoleum and marble floors, to name a few.

This battery-operated spin mop comes with soft touch pads for a gentle clean or scrubby pads for a more thorough cleaning.  Furthermore, these pads are machine washable and dryable.

To operate the Bissell Spinwave Cordless Hard Floor Mop, simply fill the tank with the cleaning solution, spray the desired amount of solution onto the floor by way of the On-Demand spray system and power the mop on.  This spin mop essentially does the rest.

Pros:

This pick for best spin mop is, by far, the easiest way to mop the floors.  And, there’s not even any pushing involved as this mop just glides on its own.

Furthermore, the Bissell Spinwave is lightweight, easy to maneuver and comes equipped with swivel steering.  This will help to mop those hard to reach places.

Cons:

Although this battery-operated spin mop is easy to maneuver, some hard to reach areas are just too hard to reach.  For instance, behind the toilet or in narrower passageways.

In addition, some consumers complain this mop doesn’t apply enough pressure.  So, if you’re mopping up after kids or dogs, you may want to go the more manual route and check out some of our other options on this list.

 

Finether Single Bucket Spin Mop Cleaning System

Finether Single Bucket Spin Mop Cleaning System

This is a great option for those with limited space as it’s the smallest spin mop cleaning system on our list.  So, this would work for those who live in a small-sized apartment and/or for those who have limited storage space.

The Finether Single Bucket Spin Mop Cleaning System is made primarily of stainless steel, so this mop is durable and will likely last you a while.  Furthermore, the stainless steel is rust proof for added longevity.

This spin mop features a 2-in-1 design where the dirty deed of mopping can be done in one basket.  Simply fill the bucket and insert the mop.  Then, push the handle down on the mop until it clicks.  Once the mop is locked into the basket, pull up on the handle and the basket is raised above the water and ready to wring.

The Finether Single Bucket Spin Mop features a microfiber, yarn-like mop which sits at a low-profile position to clean hard to reach areas.  Furthermore, because it is made of microfiber, this is safe to use on all hard-surfaced floors including wood floors.

Finally, once you’re finished mopping, the bucket has an easy pour outlet on the side to rid the dirty water without making a mess.

Pros:

This pick for best spin mop is a great solution for those with a small space.

Furthermore, because this mop is made with rust-proof stainless steel, this spin mop cleaning system should last you a while.

Cons:

A couple of consumers complained about the bucket leaking.  Also, a couple of consumers found this mop not to be user-friendly as it is hard to maneuver it in and out of the bucket.

 

CycloMop Commercial Spinning Wet & Dry Mop

CycloMop Commercial Spinning Wet & Dry Mop

If you’re mopping a space that it utilized by a lot of people, it may be wise to consider giving people a warning that there is wet floor ahead.  The CycloMop Commercial Spinning Wet & Dry Mop features a hard-to-miss caution sign with the traditional yellow color.

And, this commercial spin mop is built-in typical commercial fashion, which is built to last.  The bucket is made of hard plastic with a stainless steel spinner.  And, the mop handle is made of a lightweight metal material.

The CycloMop Commercial Spinning Wet & Dry Mop features a microfiber, yarn-like mop head which is ultra absorbent.  It is also machine washable and replaceable.

To use this commercial spin mop, simply fill the bucket, dip the mop and spin away using the foot pedal.  And, you also have your choice of saturation level.  If you want less water on the mop head, tap the pedal 5 times.  If you want less, just tap once.

Finally, this pick for best spin mop comes with a drainage spout towards the bottom of the bucket.  And this keeps things relatively clean when draining the dirty water after the deed.

Pros:

This spin mop is well made and will last a long time.  Furthermore, this mop bucket gives a clear warning to help prevent accidents.

Cons:

This is one pick that should have wheels but doesn’t.  In addition, some consumers found the bucket rather heavy to lug around.

Lastly, some consumers find the mop isn’t that mobile which makes it hard to clean hard to reach areas.

 

RoMop Easy to Go Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop

RoMop Easy to Go Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop

This is a great pick for those who are on the taller side.  The RoMop Easy to Go Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop adjusts anywhere from 36 inches to 64 inches.  And, this is the longest adjustable handle on our list.  Furthermore, along with having the longest handle, this spin mop set is one of the largest picks on our list.  So, it’s great for those with a large space to work with.  Just make sure you have the adequate space to store it in.

This spin mop features wheels and a convenient handle to roll from one destination to the next.  This will help prevent unnecessary splashing and the awkwardness of carrying a bucket of water around.  In addition, the bucket comes with a water release valve, so when you’re finished mopping, you can easily discard the dirty mop water.  And, this also prevents unnecessary splashing.

The RoMop Easy to Go Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop comes with 2 microfiber mop heads, a chenille mop pad and a scrub brush.  The microfiber heads are great for sealed hard-surfaced floors, including wood floors.  And, the chenille mop pad is great for doing the windows, while the scrub brush is for cleaning tile and grout.  Furthermore, these mops heads are all washable and replaceable.

Finally, this is one of the more durable picks on our list.  The handle and the spin bucket are made of stainless steel while the bucket itself is made of high quality plastic.

Pros:

Consumers rave about the quality of this pick for best spin mop.  So, if you’re looking for one of the highest quality mops, this should be a contender.

In addition, the parts of the bucket are easily removable, which makes cleaning the bucket a breeze.

Cons:

There’s not many negatives to this mop.  A couple of consumers felt it was a little difficult to use, but other than that, the majority of consumers are extremely happy.

 

Mopnado Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop

Mopnado Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop

Our final pick for best spin mop touts an easier spin than all the rest.  The Mopnado Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop features plate gears which help to lighten the force needed to spin the mop.  And, in order to spin the mop, just use the handle as a lever to get that thing rolling.

This spin mop is perfect for those with a larger space to mop.  It comes with wheels and a handle to make it easy to get from one room to the next.  Just make sure when all is said and done that you have the space to store it.

The Mopnado Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop comes with 2 microfiber mop heads which are great for all sealed hard floors including hardwoods, stone, marble, tile and laminate, to name a few.  And, it also comes with a scrub brush to clean grout and tile.

This spin mop features a 180 degree swiveling mop head which will make it easy to reach hard to access areas.  Furthermore, the handle is adjustable up to 56 inches so you can mop out of reach places such as windows.  However, if you’re on the taller side, this may not be enough length for you.  So, you may want to check the RoMop above.

Another notable feature of the Mopnado is it has a built-in soap dispenser.  This soap dispenser is removable and refillable.

Finally, if you’re looking for quality, this is another one of our picks that is built to last.  The mop handle and the spin basket are made with rust-resistant stainless steel, while the rest is made of high quality plastic.

Pros:

The built-in soap dispenser is a great feature and is large enough to last for a few mop sessions.  This all depends on the amount of space you have to mop, though.

In addition, this pick for best spin mop set is made with quality and is built to last.

Cons:

There is no drainage system with the Mopnado Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop.  So, if this is a requirement, we suggest checking out the RoMop above.

Best Weighted Blankets for Adults

6 Best Weighted Blankets for Adults

Weighted blankets just hit the mainstream and its about time.  These blankets have been used for years to help calm the nerves of children with autism and other sensory disorders.  Now, it has been discovered that weighted blankets can help relieve the anxiety that causes restlessness.  And, according to Medical News Today, weighted blankets induce the release of melatonin, the hormone that helps promote sleep and helps to regulate the sleep cycle.  So, with all of this newly discovered information and with our own troubles of falling asleep, we set out to find the best weighted blankets for adults on the market.

And through our search, we found a vert important factor to consider when choosing the right weighted blanket.  Weighted blankets are not a one-weight-fits-all scenario.  Weighted blankets come in an array of different weights, so choosing the correct weight, where it’s not too heavy and not too light, is the first step in order to choosing the best weighted blanket for you.

So, the first question you should ask yourself is, what weight to get for a weighted blanket?

According to the Friendship Circle, a weighted blanket should be about 10% of your body weight.  So, if you weigh 150 pounds, you should be looking for a 15 pound blanket.  If you’re 200 hundred pounds, a 20 pound blanket is what you should be looking for.

Best Weighted Blankets for Adults

What if there isn’t a blanket available that is 10% of your weight?  This will be a personal decision whether you would like to round up or down.  Usually people tend to round upwards.  But, again, this is all up to you.

So, the next step is to determine how big you want your blanket.  And, this is a decision which typically lies on your sleeping arrangements.  If you have a partner who has no trouble sawing Zzz’s, you may consider a blanket that measures half the bed size.  If you’re lucky enough to have the whole bed to yourself, you may consider decorating the entire bed with a weighted blanket.

Which leads us to the final decisions to make, which is style and material.  Our final picks for best weighted blankets for adults are all made with quality material and come in some gorgeous shades.  Furthermore, we made sure that each one of our picks wouldn’t stand out like a weighted blanket, but more like a blanket that was chosen from someone with a good eye for style, which ultimately will be you.

 

Best Weighted Blankets for Adults

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Quility Premium Weighted Blanket
Quility
Premium Weighted Blanket
Cotton
Poly-Filled
Removable Duvet
Non-Toxic
Hypoallergenic
36" x 48" = 5 lbs
41" x 60" = 10 lbs
48" x 72" = 12 lbs
48" x 78" = 15 - 25 lbs
60" x 80" = 15 - 25 lbs
YnM Cooling Weighted Blanket
YnM
Cooling Weighted Blanket
Bamboo Viscose
Poly-Filled
Glass Beads
Cooling
Color Options
48" x 72" = 15 lbs
60" x 80" = 15 - 20 lbs
Luna Weighted Blanket
Luna
Weighted Blanket
Organic Cotton
Poly-Filled
Non-Toxic
Cooling
60" x 80" = 20 lbs
Platinum Health Premium Weighted Blanket
Platinum Health
Premium Weighted Blanket
Minky
Poly-Filled
Glass Beads
Textured
Duvet
Color Options
60" x 80" = 12 lbs
YnM Weighted Blanket
YnM
Weighted Blanket
Cotton
Glass Beads
Duvet
Color Options
48" x 72" = 15 lbs
Kpblis Premium Weighted Blanket
Kpblis
Premium Weighted Blanket
Cotton
Poly-Filled
Non-Toxic
Hypoallergenic
Duvet Options
Color Options
36" x 48" = 5 lbs
40" x 60" = 10 lbs
48" x 72" = 12 - 15 lbs
60" x 80" = 17 - 22 lbs

 

Best Weighted Blankets for Adults

Quility Premium Weighted Blanket

Quility Premium Weighted Blanket

This blanket sits at the top of our list for best weighted blankets for adults for a variety of reasons.  The Qulity Premium Weighted Blanket checks off all of our requirements with some pretty spectacular bonuses.

One of the biggest features of this weighted blanket is it is built for year round use.  The Quility Premium Weighted Blanket has a removable fleece duvet cover which can be removed for the scorching summer months to keep you cool.  Once the chill of the fall nights roll in, simply slide the fleece duvet back on and secure with the 10 buttons that are strategically placed to deliver a traditional duvet look.

The other benefit to this duvet is it will help to keep the weighted portion of the blanket clean for the majority of the year.  And, when it’s time to clean, there’s nothing like throwing the duvet in the wash as opposed to the hassle of dry cleaning – not to mention the cost that comes with that.

The Quility Premium Weighted Blanket is constructed of 100% cotton and filled with non-toxic, hypoallergenic plastic pellets.  And, to keep these pellets in place, this weighted blanket relies on small, stitched squares to help the blanket keep its shape.

Finally, this blanket comes in a variety of weights and your choice of a cotton-feel or a minky feel.

Pros:

The removable fleece duvet is a huge plus.  And, this duvet even has the traditional ties where you can secure the corners of the blanket so it doesn’t get twisted around.

Furthermore, this pick for best weighted blanket is non-toxic and hypoallergenic for an even better rest.

Cons:

Like we mentioned, this blanket has a duvet which can be taken off during the summer months.  However, it doesn’t come with a summertime duvet to protect the blanket.  You may want to consider keeping the duvet on year round or purchasing a separate summer-appropriate duvet.

YnM Cooling Weighted Blanket

YnM Cooling Weighted Blanket

We are in love with the material of the YnM Cooling Weighted Blanket.  This weighted blanket is made of 300 thread count bamboo viscose.  And, according to Cariloha Bamboo, bamboo is a much better choice than cotton as it is stronger and softer.  Not to mention, bamboo is a self-replenishing crop and the benefits to the environment by consuming bamboo are enormous.

The YnM Cooling Weighted blanket is filled with polyfill and glass beads.  These beads are placed in small, stitched squares to keep the fill in place and the blanket in tip-top shape.

This pick for best weighted blankets for adults is great for those who get hot and tend to perspire during the night.  And this is because this blanket is made with SMART fabric and moisture wicking.  This is a breathable fabric that will help to circulate the air and control perspiration.

The YnM Cooling Weighted Blanket comes in your choice of colors:  Dark Grey or Sea Grass.  And, YnM also has a travel blanket up for grabs.  This travel weighted blanket is 10 lbs and comes with a convenient carrying case.

Finally, this weighted blanket is machine washable.  However, because weighted blankets are rather heavy on a wash machine, it is recommended you spot clean or purchase a separate duvet.

Pros:

Keeping things cool is another tactic for a good night’s rest.  So, because this weighted blanket uses SMART fabric and moisture wicking, this blanket will help keep your temperature regulated all night long.

Cons:

It doesn’t come with a duvet, so to keep things clean, you may have to purchase one separately.

And, according to some consumers, this blanket runs on the small side.  So, be sure to size up.

Luna Weighted Blanket

Luna Weighted Blanket

This pick for best weighted blankets for adults is made of 100% organic cotton.  And, this is a very breathable fabric, so if you’re prone to overheating and sweating, this is a weighted blanket to consider.

The Luna Weighted Blanket is filled with high-density plastic poly pellets which are odorless and non-toxic.  And, these are food grade pellets to ensure quality.  Furthermore, this fill comes enclosed in small, stitched squares to help ensure the blanket keeps its shape.

And, thankfully, this weighted blanket is machine washable and can be tumble-dried on low.  However, this all depends on if your wash machine and dryer can handle the weight.

Pros:

First and foremost, this blanket is made with absolute quality.

In addition, we love this weighted blanket for its organic properties.  Furthermore, the fabric is breathable which will help to relieve perspiration throughout the night.

Cons:

This blanket doesn’t come with a duvet cover.  Therefore, you may have to purchase one separately.  If you decide to go without a cover, this weighted blanket is machine washable.  But, like we stated before, this depends if your machine can handle the weight.

Platinum Health Premium Weighted Blanket

Platinum Health Premium Weighted Blanket

If you’re looking for a plush blanket with a luxurious feel, this is one to consider.  The Platinum Health Premium Weighted Blanket features a minky fabric cover.    And, as described by fabric.com, minky resembles the feel of real mink.  It has a short pile and the softness feels like cashmere.

In addition to the mink-like feel, this weighted blanket has a SensaDot™ texture pattern.  This pattern is intended to satisfy those who like to fidget.

Furthermore, this fabric cover is removable for easy cleaning.  Simply machine wash and dry on low heat.

This blanket is intended as a one-weight-fits-all blanket.  Platinum Health claims that most consumers prefer 12 lbs of weight.  So, with their one-weight-fits-all philosophy, they only offer a 12 lb blanket.  However, this is just the beginning.  With this blanket, if you want more weight, simply fold the blanket in half to double the weight.  If you want less weight, use half the blanket and so on.  And, the good news is, this blanket is plenty large in size to accomplish all of this.

Finally, this blanket comes in your choice of color combinations.  Choose from Blue/Green, Purple/Gray, Pink/Gray, Coffee/Cream, Gray/Gray, Mint/Gray or Light Blue/Gray.

Pros:

This one-weight-fits-all philosophy is perfect for those who intend on sharing a blanket.  And, this blanket can accommodate an adult just as easy as a child.

In addition, this is a great blanket for those who get a little chilly at night as this blanket keeps you toasty.  In a good way, of course.

Cons:

Some consumers have had issues with the inner ties securing the blanket.  And, consequently, the blanket gets twisted and turned inside the cover.

Furthermore, this blanket can get pretty toasty.  So, if you’re someone that gets hot during the night, you may want to check out some of our cooling options.

YnM Weighted Blanket

YnM Weighted Blanket

This pick for best weighted blankets for adults is another one from the highly regarded brand YnM.  

This YnM Weighted Blanket is made of 100% cotton with glass bead filling.  These glass beads are hypoallergenic, non-toxic and odorless.  And the benefits to choosing glass beads over plastic beads is glass beads are quieter.  So, if you’re tossing around, these glass beads won’t be keeping your mind churning.

The YnM Weighted Blanket comes equipped with a washable duvet cover.  And, not only is the duvet cover washable, but the blanket as well.  Of course, that is if your washing machine can handle the extra weight.

Finally, the YnM Weighted Blanket comes in your choice of textures, colors and patterns.  Choose from Cotton Blue, Cube and Pure Grey Flannel, Lattice Scroll Flannel and Flamingos.

Pros:

This weighted blanket comes in your choice of textures.  So, you can choose from a softer feel or a more cotton-like feel.  And, this is a win-win for those who get too hot and a win-win for those who get too cold.

In addition, the YnM Weighted Blanket has a removable duvet cover which is a necessity to keep the blanket preserved.

Cons:

Some consumers have complained about the quality of the stitching.  However, it is important to note that most consumers are very satisfied.

Kpblis Premium Weighted Blanket

Kpblis Premium Weighted Blanket

Our final pick for best weighted blankets for adults is our favorite in terms of style.  The Kpblis Premium Weighted Blanket comes in soothing, zen-like colors that are more representative of a home decor magazine.  So, if style is high on your list, without a doubt, this is your blanket.

The Kpblis Premium Weighted Blanket is made of 100% cotton and filled with non-toxic, hypoallergenic poly pellets.  These pellets are sewn into small squares to help ensure the weight is evenly distributed and the blanket keeps its shape.

And, although this blanket doesn’t come with a duvet cover, this blanket offers loops which will help secure the blanket inside of a duvet.  This attests to the quality and the thoughtful details Kpblis used while in the design process.

Furthermore, this company makes its own duvet covers you can purchase separately.  So, if you love the color choices and the style, this is a huge plus.

Finally, speaking of colors, you have your choice of Dark Navy, Grey or Dark Grey.

Pros:

This pick for best weighted blankets for adults gets an A++ for style and color.  In addition, because we love their color choices so much, the fact they make their own duvets, is a huge bonus.

Furthermore, the attention to detail with this weighted blanket is a huge selling point.

Cons:

Some consumers felt the blanket they received was on the small size, therefore, you may want to size up.  Of course, this is if the weight allows.

In addition, if you’re someone who gets hot at night, you may want to check out some of our cooling options.  This blanket tends to get hot and is not recommended for the summer months.

 

Best Small Microwave

Best Small Microwave – Top 6 Countertop Picks

If you’re looking for the best small microwave to fit a particularly small space, we’ve got you covered.  We searched through tons of microwaves and found the most highly regarded and top reviewed small countertop microwaves on the market.

So, what did we look for when we searched for the best small microwave?  First, we took into account small spaces, nooks and crannies.  And not every microwave is a one size fits all ordeal.  Therefore, we wanted a variety of sizes, from extra small to small, that would cater to nearly every consumer out there.

Best Small Microwave

Next, we searched for quality.  And along with quality comes durability.  Our final picks had to withstand the constant abuse we put microwaves through and live through the ordeal to tell about it.  Well, the live through part we made sure of.  A talking small microwave is something we have yet to see in the future.

Then, we wanted bonus options.  Because small microwaves are more compact, they can only have so many options.  So, while not all of our final picks for best small microwave have the same options, they all have something that will cater to our microwave needs.  Whether it’s a turntable, auto defrost, a 30 second option, popcorn button or 10 power levels, these tiny microwaves deliver some much-desired bonuses.

So, to reiterate, our requirements for the best small microwave include:

  • A variety of sizes from extra small to small.
  • Quality and durability.  This includes scouring user reviews to ensure longevity.
  • Bonus options.

 

Best Small Microwave

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Whirlpool Countertop Microwave
Whirlpool
Countertop Microwave
Stainless Steel
Clock
Interior Light
LED Display
Turntable
30 Second Option
Popcorn Button
750 Watts
0.5 Cubic Feet
13.75" x 14.13" x 15.38"
Sharp R-21LCF Medium-Duty Commercial Microwave
Sharp
R-21LCF Medium-Duty Commercial Microwave
Stainless Steel
Dial Timer
Interior Light
1,000 Watts
1.0 Cubic Feet
20.5" x 16" x 12.1"
Daewoo KOR-7LREW Retro Microwave Oven
Daewoo
KOR-7LREW Retro Microwave Oven
4 Automatic Levels
5 Power Levels
2-Way Defrost
Interior Light
LED Display
Zero Standby
Child Safety Lock
700 Watts
0.7 Cubic Feet
12.7" x 17.6" x 10.6"
Panasonic NE-1025F 1000W Commercial Microwave Oven
Panasonic
NE-1025F 1000W Commercial Microwave Oven
Stainless Steel
Dial Timer
Interior Light
1,000 Watts
0.8 Cubic Feet
16.6" x 20.1" x 12"
Sharp ZSMC0912BS 900W Countertop Microwave Oven
Sharp
ZSMC0912BS 900W Countertop Microwave Oven
Stainless Steel
Clock
Interior Light
LED Display
Turntable
30 Second Option
Popcorn Button
Beverage Button
Auto Defrost
900 Watts
0.9 Cubic Feet
12.4" x 8.7" x 13.7"
Westinghouse 600 Watt Counter Top Rotary Microwave Oven
Westinghouse
600 Watt Counter Top Rotary Microwave Oven
Stainless Steel
Dial Timer
Dial Settings
Defrost
Interior Light
Color Options
600 Watts
0.6 Cubic Feet
17.75" x 12.5" x 10.25"

 

Best Small Microwave

 

Whirlpool Countertop Microwave

Whirlpool Countertop Microwave

Our first pick on our list is the smallest at 0.5 cubic feet.  However, the Whirlpool Countertop Microwave is extremely roomy for its size as it will accommodate a dinner plate up to 11 inches in diameter.  Furthermore, because of the height of this microwave, you will have no problems inserting taller mugs or tumblers.

This pick for best small microwave offers a whopping ten power levels, including defrost.  It also features 750 Watts of power, which is extraordinary for a microwave at this size.  The preferred wattage for a microwave is at 1,000 watts.  However, according to Goodhousekeeping, microwaves with less than 700 watts are slower and may not cook evenly.  And, the higher the wattage the better.  So, this microwave hits above the 700 watt range and cooks accordingly.

Other features of this countertop microwave include 10 levels of cooking power which includes defrost, a rotating turntable to assist in cooking evenly, tap touch controls for easy handling and easy cleaning, a 30 second button and a one-touch popcorn button.

The Whirlpool Countertop Microwave offers a blue LED display and a lighted interior so you can keep an eye on your prize while its cooking.

Finally, once your food is ready, this countertop microwave will alert you with 3 consecutive beeps.  Thereafter, it will remind you every 30 seconds.

Pros:

This pick for best small microwave gets an A++ for style.  It has a subtle retro design that can nonchalantly fit with any decor.

Furthermore, for such a small microwave, this unit is stacked.  It has nearly all the wants and needs of a larger microwave.

Cons:

It seems some consumers received a defective product.  While the majority of consumers are happy, just beware you may be testing your luck with this one.

Sharp R-21LCF Medium-Duty Commercial Microwave

Sharp R-21LCF Medium-Duty Commercial Microwave

At 1.0 cubic feet, this countertop microwave is considered a standard size for small microwaves.  The Sharp R-21LCF Medium-Duty Commercial Microwave can accommodate a 13.5 inch dinner plate.  Furthermore, it has plenty of clearance from top to bottom to fit taller-sized items.

The Sharp R-21LCF Medium-Duty Commercial Microwave operates on 1,000 watts.  And like we mentioned earlier, the higher the wattage, the quicker and more evenly the food cooks.  So, 1,000 watts is a great amount of power to get the job done.  Furthermore, with this microwave, it cooks by way of a magnetron.  Magnetrons emit radio waves, so there’s no need for a rotating turntable to ensure even cooking.

This countertop microwave comes with a dial timer which can be set from 10 seconds to 6 minutes.  If you wish to cook longer, just reset the timer once the 6 minutes is up.  To cancel the cooking at any time, simply open the door or turn the dial back to zero.

The Sharp R-21LCF Commercial Microwave features a dim interior light so you can keep an eye on your food while its cooking.  In addition, the dial has an orange light which will flash as the timer counts down.  Once the cooking time is up, the Sharp Commercial Microwave will alert you with a single ring.

Pros:

With this countertop microwave, you can adjust the cook time while you’re cooking, which with a lot of microwaves, you have to go through the whole cancellation process in order to achieve this.

Another feature we love about this microwave is it is easy to clean.  And, this is due to the microwave using a magnetron heating mechanism instead of a rotating turntable.

Lastly, because this is a commercial microwave, it is built to last.

Cons:

This pick for best small microwave is as simple as you can get.  It doesn’t have all of the bells and whistles, and in all actuality, it is pretty bare bones.  There is no defrost and no preset settings.  While this might be a turnoff for a lot of people, simple is sometimes better.

Daewoo KOR-7LREW Retro Microwave Oven

Daewoo KOR-7LREW Retro Microwave Oven

If you’re on a budget, this little machine will serve you well.  The Daewoo KOR-7LREW Retro Microwave Oven offers a lot of bang for a little buck.  At under $100, this pick for best small microwave oven offers 4 automatic cooking levels, 5 power levels and 2-way defrost.

However, because this is a budget pick, you will be using 700 watts of power.  This means there will be longer cook times and chances are, uneven cooking.  The good news is, this countertop microwave comes with a rotating turntable which will assist with cooking your food more evenly and thoroughly.

The Daewoo KOR-7LREW Retro Microwave Oven is eco-friendly as it features a zero standby function.  The zero standby function will reduce your power consumption, thus reducing your carbon footprint.

This pick for best small microwave is on the smaller side of the scale with 0.7 cubic feet of interior space.  This will accommodate up to a 10.5 inch dinner plate.

Finally, other notable features of this microwave are the child safety lock, interior light, LED display and an alert to let you know dinner is ready.

Pros:

We are really digging this microwave for its extra bonus features and its style.  It is a great little machine for those who live in tiny spaces like apartments and dorms.

Furthermore, the zero standby function is a great addition.  It’s nice to know that power is reduced while not in use.  This will not only save on your electric bill, it will also extend the life of the microwave – not to mention take a little toll off the environment.

Cons:

This microwave has only 700 watts of power.  However, at this price range, this is the wattage range you’re going to get.  The good news is, this microwave is outfitted with a rotating turntable to offset the lower watts.

Panasonic NE-1025F 1000W Commercial Microwave Oven

Panasonic NE-1025F 1000W Commercial Microwave Oven

This is another small commercial microwave oven that is worthy of a spot on this list.  However, this microwave oven is even smaller at 0.8 cubic feet.  

But, don’t let the size fool you.  This commercial microwave will fit half-size pans at 6 inches tall with the cover on.  And, to get a better grasp on how roomy this microwave is, a half-size pan measures 12 inches by 10 inches.

The Panasonic NE-1025F Commercial Microwave Oven runs on 1,000 watts of power.  And with this amount of watts, you will see quicker cooking times and more thorough cooking.  Also, this microwave does not use a turntable.  Instead it features an antenna which rotates, ensuring even cooking.

This countertop microwave works by turning the dial anywhere from 10 seconds to 6 minutes.  To adjust the time while you’re cooking, simply turn the knob.  And, if you want to cancel the cooking prematurely, just open the door or turn the dial back to zero.

Finally, the Panasonic NE-1025F Commercial Microwave Oven features a Grab & Go door handle.  This means you can just open the door without messing with any levers or buttons.  This microwave also features an interior light, a lighted dial so you can easily keep track of time and 5 beeps to alert you when your food is ready.

Pros:

For the size of this microwave, it has a lot of power and is very roomy.  And because it is a commercial microwave, it is durably built to last.

Furthermore, since this microwave doesn’t come equipped with a turntable, it is very easy to clean.

Cons:

If you’re looking for extra features, you may want to keep looking at some of the other microwaves on our list.  This microwave is as simple as you can get, no defrost, no turntable, no presets and no clock.

Sharp ZSMC0912BS 900W Countertop Microwave Oven

Sharp ZSMC0912BS 900W Countertop Microwave Oven

This is perhaps our favorite budget pick on our list.  Not style-wise but functionality-wise.  The Sharp ZSMC0912BS 900W Countertop Microwave Oven offers a variety of automatic functions.  This includes auto defrost, auto beverage, auto popcorn and auto reheat buttons.  This countertop microwave also features a convenient 30 second button and one touch buttons to cook up to 6 minutes.

The Sharp Countertop Microwave Oven offers 900 watts of power, so you’re still in the range where you will see quick cook times and even heating.  Furthermore, this countertop microwave oven comes with a carousel turntable to ensure even and thorough cooking.

And, there’s no need to worry about room.  This microwave oven has 0.9 cubic feet of interior space which is enough to accommodate a full-size dinner plate or roughly 11 inches.

Finally, in addition to all of the above, the Sharp Countertop Microwave Oven comes with an interior light and a blue LED display.  And, once your food has finished cooking, you will be alerted by 5 consecutive beeps.

Pros:

It’s not hard to see the positives with this microwave.  It has everything you would expect with a standard-sized microwave.  So, if you’re looking to get your money’s worth, this is, hands down, the right choice to make.

Cons:

We are not in love with the design.  It’s rather basic and microwave-looking.

Furthermore, it seems some consumers have received duds.  While this happens occasionally with appliances, its something to be a little wary about.  However, its important to note that most consumers are happy with this product.

Westinghouse 600 Watt Counter Top Rotary Microwave Oven

Westinghouse 600 Watt Counter Top Rotary Microwave Oven

Our final pick for best small microwave is another one for those on a budget.  And, this is one that is more classic and simple in design.  The Westinghouse 600 Watt Countertop Rotary Microwave Oven features a rotary dial for easy operation.

And, this is one of the smaller microwaves on our list.  So, if you’re looking for the smallest microwave you possibly can, this is one of your contenders.  This microwave features 0.6 cubic feet of interior space with a 9.5 inch turntable.  Therefore, you’re looking at a microwave that accommodates a 10 inch dinner plate.

The Westinghouse Counter Top Rotary Microwave Oven works by simply turning the rotary dials.  The top rotary dial features defrost, medium low, medium, medium high and high power levels.  Once you have your power level set, you can rotate the bottom dial for your desired time, up to 30 minutes.  When the time is up, you will be alerted by an unmistakable ding.

This countertop microwave offers 600 watts of power.  While this isn’t ideal, it is enough power to heat food, albeit at a slower rate.  However, it does come with a rotating turntable to help ensure even and thorough heating.

Finally, with this microwave, you have your choice of colors:  Black or White.

Pros:

If you’re looking to outfit a rather small space without any frills or any gimmicks, this is a great option.

Cons:

We are weary of the low amount of wattage offered by this microwave.  So, if you’re looking for occasional cooking, such as in a dorm or an RV, this may suit you just fine.

Best Area Rugs for Kitchen

8 Best Area Rugs for Kitchen

When searching for the best area rugs for kitchen, there’s not a lot of selection in that particular category.  Therefore, we had to expand our search to other rug categories in order to deliver a selection of the best area rugs for the kitchen that would cater to our high-traffic needs.

And, there were a few requirements we had in mind when choosing these rugs.  First, the kitchen is a bustling place and an area rug in this particular place should be able to handle all the back and forth that goes on throughout the day.  Therefore, this requirement enabled us to set our sights on quality and durability.

Next we searched for the best area rugs for kitchen that would be able to handle the flying crumbs and random spills that are just apart of kitchen life.  So, we made sure our selection of rugs were easy to clean and/or stain resistant.  Furthermore, with some of our picks, we were also able to find mildew-resistant rugs.  And this is crucial for those spills that go unnoticed.

Best Area Rugs for Kitchen

The third requirement we determined to be a necessity is something to keep the rug in place.  The last thing you want to worry about when transporting a pot full of hot water is sliding across the kitchen.  So, each one of our picks is either made of materials that are resistant to slipping, whether it is due to non-slip backing or a particular material the rug is made out of.

And, slipping is not the only thing there is to worry about.  With a lesser quality of rug, we often find the corners to turn upwards which is a trip hazard.  Consequently, the rugs you see on our list will all lay flat or they will have a seemless edge.  

Lastly, and certainly not least, our selection of best area rugs for kitchen need to look good.  Therefore, we chose an array of timeless options that will be sure to go with just about every decor.  And, don’t forget, most of these rugs come in a multitude of colors.  So, if you’re not jiving with the color but love the pattern and texture, you may want to click for further options.

 

Best Area Rugs for Kitchen

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Vanill Kitchen Vinyl Mat Linoleum Rug
Vanill
Kitchen Vinyl Mat Linoleum Rug
PVC
Non-Toxic
Allergin Free
Slip-Resistant
Color Options
35.4" x 23.6"
47.2" x 27.5" - 70.8"
59" x 80.7" - 118"
63" x 23.6" - 31.5"
70.8" x 23.6"
94.5" x 23.6"
Ottomanson Jardin Collection Natural Indoor/Outdoor Jute Rug
Ottomanson
Jardin Collection Natural Indoor/Outdoor Jute Rug
Polypropylene
Low Pile
Shed-Resistant
Stain-Resistant
Mildew-Resistant
Slip-Resistant
Color Options
2'7" x 7'
5'3" x 7'3"
Kangaroo Brands The Original 3/4" Kangaroo Anti-Fatique Comfort Kitchen Mat
Kangaroo Brands
The Original 3/4" Kangaroo Anti-Fatique Comfort Kitchen Mat
Foam
Anti-Fatigue
Non-Toxic
Phthalate-Free
Slip-Resistant
Waterproof
Color Options
32" x 20"
39" x 20"
70" x 24"
Diagona Designs Contemporary Traditional Moroccan Trellis Area Rug
Diagona Designs
Contemporary Traditional Moroccan Trellis Area Rug
Polypropylene
Low Pile
Stain-Resistant
Mildew-Resistant
Slip-Resistant
Fade-Resistant
Color Options
2'7" x 9'10"
5'3" x 7'3"
63" x 87"
6'7" x 9'3"
7'10" x 9'10"
nuLOOM Natural Hand Woven Rigo Jute Rug
nuLOOM
Natural Hand Woven Rigo Jute Rug
Jute
Anti-Static
UV Protected
Slip Resistant
Color Options
2'3" x 4'
2'6" x 8'
4' Round
5' x 8'
6' Round
8' Round
8' x 10'
9' x 12'
Ottomanson Ottohome Collection Persian Heriz Oriental Non-Skid Area Rug
Ottomanson
Ottohome Collection Persian Heriz Oriental Non-Skid Area Rug
Polypropylene
Low Pile
Shed-Resistant
Stain-Resistant
Mildew-Resistant
Slip-Resistant
UV Protected
Color Options
1'10" x 7'
2' x 5'
3'3" x 5'
5' x 6'6"
8'2" x 9'10"
20" x 59"
Kapaqua Rubber Backed Moroccan Trellis Non-Slip Area Rug
Kapaqua
Rubber Backed Moroccan Trellis Non-Slip Area Rug
Polypropylene
Low Pile
Shed-Resistant
Stain-Resistant
Mildew-Resistant
Slip-Resistant
UV Protected
Color Options
2' x 4' - 20'
3' x 5' - 10'
5' x 7'
7' x 10'
8' x 11'
Fab Habitat Reversible Indoor/Outdoor Weather Restistant Floor Mat
Fab Habitat
Reversible Indoor/Outdoor Weather Restistant Floor Mat
Recycled Plastic
Reversible
Mildew-Resistant
UV Protected
3' x 5'
4' x 6'
5' x 8'
6' x 9'

 

Best Area Rugs for Kitchen

Vanill Kitchen Vinyl Mat Linoleum Rug

Vanill Kitchen Vinyl Mat Linoleum Rug

The first pick on our list for best area rugs for kitchen is a great solution for families or a household that happily creates a mess.

The Vanill Kitchen Vinyl Rug is made of high quality PVC, which resists environmental deterioration, is non-toxic and is resistant to dust and allergens.

Furthermore, you will get your use of this rug as PVC is both durable and flexible.    

The Vanill Kitchen Vinyl Mat Linoleum Rug lays completely flat on the floor, once you’ve prepped it for display.  To prep the mat, simply lay it out in the sun so the material softens.  Once it softens, spread it flat and you have the perfect surface to cook on.

The other aspect of this rug that stands out to us is it is comfortable to walk on.  Because it is made of flexible PVC, you will enjoy a slight cloud-like feeling with every step.  In addition, the PVC will allow the rug to naturally stay where its intended to stay.  So, no slipping or sliding around. 

The Vanill Kitchen Rug is easy to clean, simply wipe with a damp cloth.  However, it is recommended you refrain from using harsh cleaners.

Finally, this kitchen rug comes in all sorts of colors and gorgeous designs.  Because there are too many to list, we suggest you take a browse through them here.

Pros:

Vanill makes gorgeous designs for their rugs.  And, their color palettes are perfect for the kitchen.

In addition, the material is perfectly suited for high-traffic kitchens as it is both durable and non-toxic.

Cons:

If you’re looking for the actual texture of a rug, this rug may not be your first choice.  However, the Vanill Kitchen Rugs are soft and comfortable to walk on and the material is perhaps the most logical choice for a kitchen.

 

Ottomanson Jardin Collection Natural Indoor/Outdoor Jute Rug

Ottomanson Jardin Collection Natural Indoor/Outdoor Jute Rug

This pick for best area rugs for kitchen is made to withstand the outdoors.  So, what will withstand the outdoors will surely withstand the kitchen.

The Ottomanson Jardin Collection Natural Indoor/Outdoor Jute Rug is made in Turkey, of polypropylene construction, in a woven jute fashion.

And while jute is typically woven from natural fibers, this rug is woven with polypropylene.  The benefits to this, beyond durability, is it won’t absorb moisture as a typical jute rug would.  In fact, it won’t absorb it at all.  And this makes it a perfect rug for those random spills that happen in the kitchen. 

Another aspect which sets this rug apart from the naturally woven jute rug is this rug won’t shed.  So, you won’t be cleaning up fibers along with the crumbs.

The Ottomanson Jardin Collection Jute Rug has a low pile weight which lays flat on the floor.  This low pile weight will allow for a near seemless transition from the floor to the carpet.  And, like we stated before, this will help prevent tripping your way across the kitchen.

This area rug for the kitchen is easy to care for.  Simply spot clean and vacuum regularly.  And, it comes in your choice of 4 different colors:  Brown, Cream, Dark Brown or Mocha.

Pros:

The Ottomanson Jute Rug has a natural feel with all of the durability and very few drawbacks.  Most notably, its resistance to shedding and soiling.

Furthermore, this rug is stain-resistant and mildew-resistant.

Cons:

Because this pick for best area rugs for kitchen does not have slip-resistant backing, you may find that it will slip on wood or marble floors.  For an easy fix, check out these non-slip pads you can purchase separately.

 

Kangaroo Brands The Original 3/4" Kangaroo Anti-Fatique Comfort Kitchen Mat

Kangaroo Brands The Original 3/4″ Kangaroo Anti-Fatigue Comfort Kitchen Mat

If you’re looking for comfort, you have found your “rug.”  However, this pick is more appropriately called a mat.  And this mat is not only comfortable but it is rehabilitating.  It will help to improve posture, condition muscles and sooth aches and pains.

Sounds too good to be true, right?  It does, however, when we first stepped on this mat, we didn’t want to leave.  This mat is absolute heaven.

The Original Kangaroo Anti-Fatigue Comfort Kitchen Mat is made of 3/4 inch top grade foam which is non-toxic and phthalate-free.  This foam helps to eliminate pressure on the joints, back, feet and extremities, while providing support for long periods of time.  So, if you’re someone who is in the kitchen all day, this mat is a must have and will make the kitchen a more enjoyable place to be.

Furthermore, this mat is heavy-duty.  It is extremely durable and will keep its shape over time.  It is also waterproof and features a slight texture for a slip-resistant surface.  And, the underside of the mat has a grooved surface to keep the mat in place while the sloped edges offer a smooth transition when stepping from the floor onto the mat.

To care for this mat, simply vacuum and wipe clean with a damp cloth.  You can also scrub it and hose it off if need be.

The Original Kangaroo Anti-Fatigue Comfort Kitchen Mat comes in your choice of 9 colors:  Beige, Black, Brown, Gray, Hunter Green, Mocha, Navy, Red or Sand.

Pros:

The comfort of this mat is undeniable.  It is extremely supportive and relieves pressure from your head to your feet.

However, the other notable aspects of this mat is it’s very durable and easy to maintain.

Cons:

To be completely honest, when we first laid eyes on it, we felt it was rather unattractive.  That is until we stepped on it and it quickly grew on us.  The plus side to this mat is it does come in different colors, so depending on how you match the color to your kitchen, it may just be love at first sight.

 

Diagona Designs Contemporary Traditional Moroccan Trellis Area Rug

Diagona Designs Contemporary Traditional Moroccan Trellis Area Rug

This pick for best area rugs for kitchen is made with a durable synthetic pile with a jute-style backing.  And, this jute-style backing is also synthetic.  So, you won’t have to deal with shedding that often comes with natural jute material.

The Diagona Designs Contemporary Traditional Moroccan Trellis Area Rug is made of a 100% polypropylene.  Polypropylene is resistant to moisture, therefore, it is resistant to mildew and stains.  Furthermore, it also resistant to fading.  So, if this rug is in a spot where the sun hits, it is UV protected.

This area rug offers a low pile so it will create a near seemless transition from floor to rug.  And, this will help prevent you from tripping your way across the kitchen.  In addition, because of the jute backing, this rug is slip-resistant.

Lastly, the Diagona Designs Contemporary Traditional Moroccan Trellis Area Rug comes in your choice of 5 color combinations:  Grey/Ivory, Ivory/Navy, Navy/Ivory, Ivory/Purple or Ivory/Grey.

Pros:

This rug comes with a natural worn look, so add that to the polypropylene construction, and this rug works well in high-traffic areas.

Furthermore, it has a subtle Moroccan design which will compliment just about any decor.

Cons:

Because this rug is on the thin side, it tends to wrinkle if placed on carpet.  However, if you intend on using this rug on wood, marble or tile floors, you shouldn’t run into this issue.

Also, this rug is intentionally faded in some areas.  While some people love this particular design aspect, some see it as an eyesore.

 

nuLOOM Natural Hand Woven Rigo Jute Rug

nuLOOM Natural Hand Woven Rigo Jute Rug

If you want to go with a traditional jute rug that is made with natural fibers, this may be the perfect rug for your kitchen.  The nuLOOM Natural Rigo Jute Rug is hand-woven in India with natural jute fiber.

Now, we haven’t touched on what jute really is.  We’ve spoken about the jute weave but jute is a whole different story.  Jute is a natural fiber which is mainly grown in India and Bangladesh.  It is a strong fiber that holds its shape well and offers natural UV protection, as well as, anti-static properties.

Furthermore, jute can be fairly easy to clean.  You can simply run a vacuum over it, brush with a stiff bristle brush or blot with a damp cloth.  These are just some of the ways to care for jute.  But if you need more in-depth detail, you can find it here.

The nuLOOM Natural Hand Woven Rigo Jute Rug is naturally slip-resistant.  However, this particular rug is also trip-resistant.  And this is because it has an oval shape and doesn’t contain any corners that will perk up.  Furthermore, it is low pile, so it will offer an easy transition when stepping from the floor to the rug.

Finally, this rug comes in your choice of colors:  Natural or Beige.

Pros:

This pick for best area rugs for kitchen is as natural as you can get.  And, there’s nothing like bringing the outdoors inside.  In addition, this rug will go with any decor.  And, with the natural color selection, you can’t go wrong.

Furthermore, nuLOOM makes quality rugs at a very decent price.  So, with all this being said, you’re getting a great deal with this rug.

Cons:

Because it is made with natural jute material, this rug is prone to mildew.  However, because it is on the thin side, it would take a lot of spills to create mildew.  Our suggestion, if you do spill something, make sure to dry it out as soon as possible.

And, again, because it is jute, it will shed.  Not a whole lot, but you will most likely be seeing more fibers than crumbs.

 

Ottomanson Ottohome Collection Persian Heriz Oriental Non-Skid Area Rug

Ottomanson Ottohome Collection Persian Heriz Oriental Non-Skid Area Rug

Persian rugs look fantastic in the kitchen so we made sure to include a persian-style rug that will hold up in a high-traffic area.  The Ottomanson Otthome Collection Persian Heriz Oriental Non-Skid Area Rug is stain-resistant, slip-resistant, shed-resistant and fade-resistant.  In addition, this rug will not absorb moisture, making it mildew-resistant.  And, it is also easy to clean.  Simply vacuum and clean with a damp cloth and a mild soap.    

Made of 100% polypropylene, this pick for best area rugs for kitchen is a low pile rug which offers a nearly seemless transition from floor to rug.  And, this helps to eliminate the bulk that can cause you to trip as you bustle your way back and forth from counter to counter.  Furthermore, the underside of this rug has a rubber backing, which will help prevent this rug from sliding around.

The Ottomanson Ottohome Collection Persian Heriz Area Rug comes in a multitude of sizes and your choice of 2 colors, Red Heriz or Sage Green Heriz (pictured above.)

Pros:

This pick for best area rug for kitchen has a timeless look to it.  So, not only will it work with just about any decor, it will never run out of style.

In addition, at this price, you can’t beat the quality and the look.

Cons:

Some consumers complain this rug is rather uncomfortable and on the thin side, with one consumer stating it felt more like astro turf.  However, if you’re using it in a high-traffic area such as the kitchen, this may be ideal.

 

Kapaqua Rubber Backed Moroccan Trellis Non-Slip Area Rug

Kapaqua Rubber Backed Moroccan Trellis Non-Slip Area Rug

We love Moroccan patterns so it is no surprise we have yet another Moroccan-inspired rug on our list.  And, the great thing about this particular design is it can go with classic or modern decor.  You can even mix it in with country-inspired decor.

The Kapaqua Rubber Backed Moroccan Trellis Non-Slip Area Rug is machine woven with a loop pile.  In addition, it is a low pile rug, so your chance of slipping on the edge of the rug is greatly reduced.  And, this rug has a rubber backing, so it is also slip-resistant.

This pick for best area rugs for kitchen is made of 100% polypropylene which is resistant to stains, mildew, bacteria and moisture.  It is also easy to care for.  Simply vacuum and wipe with a damp cloth.  And if needed, you can use a mild detergent.

Finally, this rug comes in numerous sizes and colors.  Your color choices are:  Brown, Grey, Ivory, Light Blue, Neon Green, Orange, Pink, Purple, Red, Teal or Yellow.

Pros:

This rug offers all the necessities for the kitchen.  It’s easy to clean, easy to care for, it is slip-resistant, stain-resistant and mildew-resistant.

Furthermore, this area rug for the kitchen comes in all different sizes and colors.  So, your chances of matching the carpet to your decor and space greatly increase.

Cons:

This rug is rather light.  So, even though it comes with rubber backing, you made need to add a non-slip pad to ensure this rug stays in place.  However, everyone has different type of flooring so what slips for one may not slip for another.

Fab Habitat Reversible Indoor/Outdoor Weather Restistant Floor Mat

Fab Habitat Reversible Indoor/Outdoor Weather Restistant Floor Mat

Our final pick for best area rugs for kitchen is an indoor/outdoor rug.  So, this is going to handle a lot of abuse.  Furthermore, it is reversible.  So, if one side gives, you have the other side to count on.

The Fab Habitat Reversible Indoor/Outdoor Weather Resistant Floor Mat is an eco-friendly rug made of 100% recycled plastic.  This plastic is power loomed in a woven fashion.

And, if you have ever had anything woven of recycled plastic, you will know that it is highly durable and practically lasts forever.  In addition, you’re doing the environment a favor by taking some plastic out of the ocean.

The Fab Habitat Reversible Floor Mat won’t soak up moisture, so it is resistant to mold and mildew.  Furthermore, it is also UV resistant.  Therefore, if the spot you’re looking to place this rug gets any amount of sunlight, you won’t have to worry about fading.

This area rug for the kitchen comes in a multitude of sizes and your choice of colors:  Blue or Teal.

Finally, this rug is easy to care for.  Simply shake off any crumbs or you can even hose it off.

Pros:

Because this rug is made of recycled plastic, it can handle all kinds of abuse.  And, because of this, this rug is great for those with kids and/or pets.

Furthermore, we really respect Fab Habitat’s principles.  They not only make recycled products, but they ensure their products are child-labor free.

Cons:

If this rug obtains a lot of moisture, it can get slippery.  However, if you’re using it indoors, you shouldn’t need to worry about this too much.

best squirrel proof bird feeder

Best Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder

If you’re looking for the best squirrel proof bird feeder, we found the top 5 bird feeders that will keep those pesky critters out and the birds coming back for more.

So, how do these bird feeders keep those squirrels at bay?  For starters, these feeders are made with materials that will keep the squirrels from getting anywhere near the bird seed.  Simply put, these bird feeders are chew-proof.

However, what differs with each of these bird feeders is how they keep the squirrels from getting the bird seed where the birds perch.  For instance, one of our picks comes with a motor which will detect the weight of a squirrel and literally spin the squirrel away.  This may sound cruel, but it’s pretty harmless to the squirrel as they are acclimated to moving surfaces such as tree limbs and branches.  So, they can roll with the punches quite easily.

best squirrel proof bird feeder 

Furthermore, a couple of our picks will detect the weight of the squirrel and this will activate a locking mechanism which will shut off the seed supply.  And, a couple of others have a unique design which just simply does not accommodate squirrels.  But, there’s something else you may want to consider to go along with the squirrel proof bird feeder.

Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder Pole

A squirrel proof bird feeder pole can be an extra deterrent from squirrels and something you may take into consideration to further ensure the bird seed goes to who they were intended for.

Squirrel proof bird feeder poles help to deter squirrels by using a “hanging basket” design for the bird feeders.  Then, there is either a spring or a baffle placed in the middle of the pole to prevent the squirrel from scaling the pole and snatching the seed.

Typically, you can use the squirrel proof bird feeder pole with just a normal bird feeder as opposed to a squirrel proof bird feeder.  And, in this case, you may have luck keeping the squirrels away.  However, most people have the best luck keeping the squirrels away by using a squirrel proof bird feeder pole along with squirrel proof bird feeders.  This is pretty much a sure-fire way to keep the squirrels away for good.

So, now you know how to keep the squirrels away, we have the 5 top picks for best squirrel proof bird feeder.  And, these bird feeders are the leaders in the market.  This means, they are well-designed for aesthetic purposes, they have a high rating for squirrel-repellent and they are functional and durable.

 

Best Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Brome 1057 Squirrel Buster Standard Wild Bird Feeder
Brome
1057 Squirrel Buster Standard Wild Bird Feeder
Metal
Water Proof
Rust-Proof
UV Stabilized
1.3 lb Seed Capacity
Seed Ventilation System
5" x 5" x 21"
Arundale The Sky Cafe
Arundale
The Sky Cafe
Recycled Plexiglass
Weather Resistant
1.5 Gallon Seed Capacity
17" x 17" x 17"
Droll Yankees Yankee Flipper Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder
Droll Yankees
Yankee Flipper Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder
Polycarbonate
Metal
UV Stabilized
5 lb Seed Capacity
8.5" x 8.5" x 28.5"
Heritage Farms Woodlink Absolute Squirrel Resistant Bird Feeder Model 7533
The Nuttery
NT066 Classic Peanut Sunflower Seed Feeder
Metal
Weather Resistant
1.73 lb Seed Capacity
14.2" x 7.9" x 7.9"
Heritage Farms Woodlink Absolute Squirrel Resistant Bird Feeder Model 7533
Heritage Farms
Woodlink Absolute Squirrel Resistant Bird Feeder Model 7533
Steel
Weather Resistant
15 lb Seed Capacity
Pole
Hangar
13.5" x 16" x 11.2"

 

Best Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder

 

Brome 1057 Squirrel Buster Standard Wild Bird Feeder

Brome 1057 Squirrel Buster Standard Wild Bird Feeder

Our first pick for best squirrel proof bird feeder is one of the most popular anti squirrel proof bird feeders on the market.  So much so, that this bird feeder gets hundreds, if not thousands, of search engine searches a month.

The Brome 1057 Squirrel Buster Standard Wild Bird Feeder deters squirrels by detecting their weight and closing the seed hatches accordingly.  And, it not only deters squirrels, but larger birds as well.

In addition to this deterrent, this squirrel proof bird feeder is made of chew proof metals.  So, squirrels can’t chew or claw their way to the seed.  This chew proof material is also waterproof, rust-proof and UV stabilized, which will extend the look and the life of the feeder.

The Brom Squirrel Buster features a seed ventilation system at the top of the feeder which releases the humidity and hot air through the vents and replaces it with fresh air.  This will help to keep the seed fresh and more attractive to the birds.

And, with the Squirrel Buster, it is recommended you leave at least 18 inches of room around the feeder in order to force the squirrel to mount the feeder which triggers the closing mechanism.  If you don’t leave this amount of room, the squirrel may find a way to bypass the feeder and mount another part of the bird feeder to gain access to the seed.  And, this is where the squirrel proof bird feeder pole may come in handy.  This pole will enable you to create the 18 inches you need without much forethought.

The other option you have is going with the Brome Squirrel Buster Plus Bird Feed and Accessory Kit.  This comes with the Squirrel Buster Bird Feeder, a pole, a perch ring and a weather guard.

Lastly, the Brom Squirrel Buster measures 5 inches in diameter and 21.5 inches tall.

Pros:

This is a very well designed bird feeder and is made with quality materials.

Furthermore, many consumers raved about how well it deterred the squirrels, with one consumer stating it even deterred a bear!

Cons:

The perches are rather small, comfortably accommodating smaller birds.  However, larger birds have a difficult time perching.  So, if you’re looking to attract larger birds, you may want to go with another option.

Additionally, the seed ports are on the small side.  So, if you’re looking to fill this feeder with larger food items such as fruit or nuts, you may be looking at clearing out the seed ports often.

Arundale The Sky Cafe

Arundale The Sky Cafe

This next pick for best squirrel proof bird feeder has a picture-perfect, postcard-like design.

The Arundale Sky Cafe Bird Feeder is made with 100% recycled plexiglass.  Plexiglass is essentially acrylic, and this is a high-grade plastic material which is resistant to weathering.  In addition, if acrylic is scratched, the scratches can be easily buffed out.

This anti squirrel bird feeder features a 17-inch diameter dome which helps protect the seed from different weather elements such as rain and snow.  Furthermore, and perhaps most importantly, this dome prevents the squirrels from snatching the seeds.

The Arundale Sky Cafe has a wide tray that can accommodate up to 10 birds at once.  And, it comes with a 1.5 gallon seed bucket which will reduce the number of refills needed.

For mounting purposes, the Arundale Sky Cafe can be hung or pole mounted.  Furthermore, if you choose to hang the Sky Cafe, it is recommended that you hang it 5 inches or more from the nearest object, whether it be a tree trunk or a house.  If you choose to pole mount it, it is recommended that it is mounted at least 5 inches from the ground.

In addition, if you are using a chain to hang the Arundale Sky Cafe, allow at least 6 inches of chain above the feeder.  This will further deter the squirrels from trying to access the seeds.

Finally, this anti squirrel bird feeder measures 17 inches in diameter and weighs roughly 5 pounds, without seeds.

Pros:

This bird feeder is well designed and uses acrylic, which is a durable, all-weather material.

And, among consumers, there is a unanimous vote that this bird feeder repels squirrels and repels them good.

Furthermore, consumers state this bird feeder attracts a lot of birds, as well as, a large variety of birds.  In addition, the perching tray allows the birds plenty of room to spread out and move about.

Cons:

It is a bit spend-ier than other bird feeders, however, there’s no denying that this bird feeder has an excellent squirrel-proof design and is beautiful to look at.

 

Droll Yankees Yankee Flipper Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder

Droll Yankees Yankee Flipper Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder

This anti squirrel bird feeder is one entertaining feeder.  The Droll Yankees Yankee Flipper Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder works by spinning the squirrel off.  When the squirrel mounts the weight-activated perch ring, it triggers the motor and the feeder starts spinning.  This will knock the squirrels off the feeder and the squirrels won’t be coming back for more.

And, if the squirrels try to perch from the top to access the food, the feeder tube is too long for them to reach the seed.

The spinning motor works via rechargeable and replaceable batteries.  Simply charge the batteries overnight and the batteries will run for months.

The Droll Yankees Flipper Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder is made of polycarbonate with a heavy metal cap and perch ring.  According to Plastics Make it Possible, polycarbonate is durable and shatter-resistant.  In addition, this polycarbonate bird feeder is UV-stabilized to retain its appearance and prevent discoloration.

This anti squirrel bird feeder contains 4 feeding ports which will accommodate small and large birds alike.  Furthermore, it has a 5 pound seed capacity to keep you stocked up for longer.  And, it has an internal baffle system which will prevent seed blockage when delivering the seed to the port.

Lastly, the Droll Yankee Flipper Bird Feeder measures 4.75 inches in diameter and 21 inches tall.  It is recommended you secure the feeder 6 feet from the nearest object.

Pros:

If you’re buying this for entertainment purposes, you may find the entertainment to be short-lived.  This is because the Droll Yankees Yankee Flipper Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder works so well, squirrels quickly learn to stay away.

Cons:

A few consumers have stated the battery doesn’t hold its charge for very long after about a year of usage.

In addition, a few consumers have stated the squirrels outsmarted this bird feeder.

 

The Nuttery NT066 Classic Peanut Sunflower Seed Feeder

The Nuttery NT066 Classic Peanut Sunflower Seed Feeder

This pick for best squirrel proof bird feeder has its own unique design to keep the pesky critter out.  The Nuttery NT066 Classic Peanut Sunflower Seed Feeder features a cage-like design which prevents the squirrel from reaching the food.

This bird feeder is made with strong metal with a twist lid to easily refill the nuts and seeds.  Furthermore, this metal is durable and will withstand attempted squirrel break-ins and years of weather abuse.

The Nuttery Classic Feeder has a seed capacity of 1.73 pounds which means infrequent refills.  And, to refill this feeder, simply twist the lid and pour the seeds and nuts in.

This squirrel proof bird feeder is perfect for attracting a smaller breed of bird.  However, if you’re looking to feed larger birds, you may want to try another pick.

The Nuttery measures 7.9 inches in diameter and 14.2 inches tall.

Pros:

The Nuttery can handle nuts and seeds without clogging the ports.

Furthermore, this pick for best squirrel proof bird feeder is made of strong metal which will prevent the squirrels from chewing their way to the food.

Cons:

A couple of consumers have issues with this bird feeder rusting after about a year’s worth of use.

Heritage Farms Woodlink Absolute Squirrel Resistant Bird Feeder Model 7533

Heritage Farms Woodlink Absolute Squirrel Resistant Bird Feeder Model 7533

Our last pick for best squirrel proof bird feeder is a heavy-duty option.  The Heritage Farms Woodlink Absolute Squirrel Resistant Bird Feeder is constructed of all steel.  The green powder-coated steel body is chew proof and will help protect the feeder from weather elements.  In addition, the zinc-plated steel hanger and black powder-coated pole is also weather resistant.

This pick for best squirrel proof bird feeder deters squirrels by using a spring-activated perch.  The perch detects the squirrel’s weight and will shut off the seed supply, preventing the squirrel from feasting on the bird seed.  Furthermore, this bird feeder has a counter balanced perch, where you can set one of three positions to allow small, medium or large-sized birds to access the seed.  If the wrong sized bird perches, the seed supply will shut off.

In addition to the spring-activated perch, the Heritage Farms Woodlink Absolute Bird Feeder will further deter squirrels with a locking, squirrel-resistant roof.  This roof also helps to keep the seed dry and protected from weather elements.

This anti squirrel bird feeder comes with a 15 pound seed capacity to keep refills to a minimum.  In addition, it comes with a metal hangar and a 5 foot pole, so you can choose how you would like to display the feeder.

Finally, the Heritage Farms Woodlink Absolute Squirrel Resistant Bird Feeder measures 13.5 inches long, 16 inches wide and 11.2 inches tall.  It weighs approximately 12 pounds.

Pros:

This squirrel proof bird feeder is very well constructed and made with ultra durable materials.

In addition, this feeder has customers raving about how squirrel proof it is.

Cons:

A few consumers have stated that the 5 foot mounting pole is rather short which deters birds from feasting.

 

best portable charcoal grill

Best Portable Charcoal Grill and Propane Grill

So, you’re on the hunt for the best portable charcoal grill or propane grill for the ultimate summer excursions.  Well, there are a few things to look out for when purchasing the best portable charcoal grill or propane grill – and we’ll take you through the ins and outs of finding the right grill for you.

The first step into purchasing the best charcoal or propane grill is to decide if you’re going to want to go with charcoal or propane.  And, there’s really no clear winner between the two, however, there may be personal preferences that will help you through this decision-making process.  

What’s the Difference Between a Charcoal and a Propane Grill?

Let’s start with taste and texture.  Charcoal grills get much hotter than gas grills, therefore, you will see some serious searing action with a charcoal grill.  So, if you’re looking for a crunchy outer texture, charcoal grill hands-down.

In addition, charcoal grills produce more smoke and this smoke transfers flavor.  According to AmazingRibs.com, with charcoal, you will be burning more complex organic molecules which will give you a broader range of flavor compared to a propane grill.

This is not to say that you won’t be grilling some delicious hamburgers on a propane grill.  Quite the opposite, in fact.  However, if you’re looking for that outdoorsy, smoke-infused taste, a charcoal grill is the way to go.

best portable charcoal grill

As far as convenience goes, propane grills seem to win this battle.  Propane grills light with a flick of switch or a turn of a knob while charcoal grills take a lot more effort.  And, propane grills will reach desired heat at approximately 10 minutes while charcoal grills reach desired heat at approximately 20 minutes.

When it comes to cleanup, charcoal grills are far more messy because you have the ash to deal with.  So, a propane grill wins the clean-up convenience factor.

Finally, decide if you will be grilling year round.  Propane grills are the clear winner for every season while charcoal grills are more difficult to light in the colder months.  And, sometimes it’s too cold or too windy to get them to light at all.

So, hopefully you’ve been able to come to some sort of conclusion on which type of grill is going to work best for you.  And, if you haven’t, maybe just taking a browse through our picks for best portable charcoal grill and best portable propane grill will help you on your way – whether it be a portability factor or even the aesthetic of a grill that catches your eye.  

 

Best Portable Charcoal Grill and Propane Grill

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Weber 51010001 Q1200 Liquid Propane Grill
Weber
51010001 Q1200 Liquid Propane Grill
Propane
Porcelain-Enameled
Cast Iron
Cast Aluminum
Split Grates
Side Trays
Disposable Drip Tray
Color Options
20.5" x 40.9" x 24.6"
Weber 10020 Smokey Joe 14-Inch Portable Grill
Weber
10020 Smokey Joe 14-Inch Portable Grill
Charcoal
Porcelain-Enameled
Plated Steel
Heavy-Gauge Steel
Ash Catcher
15.6" x 15.6" x 9"
Coleman Road Trip Propane Portable Grill LXE
Coleman
Road Trip Propane Portable Grill LXE
Propane
Porcelain-Coated
Cast Iron
Split Grates
Side Trays
Removable Grease Tray
Lift and Lock System
Color Options
33.8" x 13.5" x 19.1"
Gourmia GBQ330 Portable Charcoal Electric BBQ Grill
Gourmia
GBQ330 Portable Charcoal Electric BBQ Grill
Charcoal
Battery-Operated
Non-Stick Grill Plate
Turbo Fan
Removable Drip Pan
Carrying Case
14" x 13.5" x 8"
Pinty Portable Folding Charcoal Grill
Pinty
Portable Folding Charcoal Grill
Charcoal
Porcelain-Enameled
Carbon Steel
Silicone Handles
Ash Catcher
22" x 15.7" x 15.4"
Char-Griller 2-2424 Table Top Charcoal Grill
Char-Griller
2-2424 Table Top Charcoal Grill
Charcoal
Cast Iron
Heavy Steel
Removable Ash Pan
Smoker Option
18.5" x 16" x 17"

 

Best Portable Charcoal Grill and Propane Grill

Weber 51010001 Q1200 Liquid Propane Grill

Weber 51010001 Q1200 Liquid Propane Grill

Our first pick for best portable propane grill comes from one of the top outdoor grill companies around.  Weber was established around 1952 with the invention of the kettle grill.  Since then, Weber has become a household name due to innovation and quality and their name is synonymous with grilling.

The Weber 51010001 Q1200 Liquid Propane Grill is built of porcelain-enameled cast iron with a cast aluminum lid and body.  And, according to Crown Variety, the benefit to grilling with cast iron is the cast iron will retain a large amount of heat.  Furthermore, because the cast iron is coated in porcelain, this means it will protect the cast iron from erosion and rust, extending the life of the grill.

In addition, cast iron is known to clean up quickly and easily.  And, along with the disposable and replaceable drip trays, this is one of the easiest propane grills to clean.

The Weber Liquid Propane Grill lights up instantly and is reliable in just about all-weather conditions.  Once lit, you can then adjust the control burner valve to any temperature from low to high.

And, with this pick for best portable propane grill, you get the luxury of split grates.  Split grates are two separate grates that, when put together, become one.  Furthermore, when purchased separately, you can add a griddle grate for cooking items such as scrambled eggs, hash browns and paninis.

The Weber Liquid Propane Grill is lightweight and folds up easily for portability.  And, it comes with side trays that fold up over the grill when not in use.

This portable grill is the perfect size for transporting and the perfect size for a small balcony.  So, if you’re looking for a grill that works just as well at home as it does on the road, this pick is superb.

Finally, the measurements of this grill completely expanded with the lid open and the side tables out is 24.6 inches tall, 40.9 inches wide and 20.5 inches deep.  With the lid closed and the tables out, this grill measures 15.5 inches tall, 40.9 inches wide and 16.5 inches deep.  And, it comes in your choice of colors:  Fuchsia, Black, Blue, Green, Orange, Purple, Red, Titanium or Florida State Maroon.

Pros:

This pick for best portable propane grill is the perfect size for taking it on the road or using on a small porch or balcony.  And, to make matters even better, if you have a standing grill in mind, you can add-on this portable cart.

Furthermore, the Weber Liquid Propane Grill lights easily and heats up quickly.  And, while cooking, this grill retains an even cooking temperature throughout, including an even cooking surface.  Once grilling is done, cleanup is a cinch.

Cons:

There’s not much negative to be said about this grill.  It cooks flawlessly, heats up reliably and folds up nicely.  However, one small flaw prevents this grill from being a ten.  The regulator is located next to one of the handles, which makes it rather awkward and difficult to carry.

Weber 10020 Smokey Joe 14-Inch Portable Grill

Weber 10020 Smokey Joe 14-Inch Portable Grill

This pick for best portable charcoal grill is a classic and an all-time favorite.  And, according to the Weber Kettle Club, the Weber Smokey Joe Grill was first introduced in 1955, and was Weber’s first portable, tabletop grill.  Furthermore, it has kept the same basic design for over half a century.

The Weber 10020 Smokey Joe 14-Inch Portable Grill features a plated steel cooking grate and a heavy-gauge steel charcoal grate.  The plated steel cooking grate is durable and easy to clean.  Furthermore, the plated steel cooking grate has the ability to produce some serious sear marks.

In addition, this portable grill features a porcelain-enameled bowl and lid.  This will help to prevent rust and will enable heat to transfer evenly.

To keep things clean, the Weber Smokey Joe comes with an aluminum ash catcher.  Once the ash catcher is full, simply scoop the ash out and you’re ready for another round of grilling.

This pick for best portable grill measures roughly 12 inches tall and 15.6 inches in diameter.  The cooking grate measures 14.5 inches in diameter, enough to fit 3 steaks or 6 burgers at a time.  However, if you’re looking for something a bit larger in size, you can always go with the 18-inch model, which you can find here.

Finally, this portable grill transports easily.  Simply place the lid on the grill and latch it shut.  And, if you think things may get a little messy in the process, Weber offers a handy carrying bag which you can conveniently strap over your shoulder.

Pros:

Weber makes quality products and this Smokey Joe Portable Grill is just another one of their reliable products they offer.

So, if you’re looking for a basic, no-frills grill, this pick is most likely your best bet.  Plus, the price is right.

Cons:

This grill is lacking handles.  And, for the life of us, we can’t figure out why something so simple and convenient was left out of the design.  However, you can always carry a pair of gloves with this grill to help protect your hands and maneuver it if you must.

Coleman Road Trip Propane Portable Grill LXE

Coleman Road Trip Propane Portable Grill LXE

We are in love with this design.  This is as close to the look and feel of an outdoor home grill.  The Coleman Road Trip Propane Portable Grill LXE is a collapsible grill that will fit in most trunks.  And, it features a lift and lock system which allows for set up within seconds.

This pick for best portable propane grill offers 2 porcelain-coated cast iron grilling plates.  These plates are easy to clean and will last for a very long time.  And, according to Grill Beast, cast iron is extremely efficient at retaining heat for long periods of time.  Furthermore, the sear marks cast iron produces are to die for.

And with these grill plates, they can be interchangeable with a griddle plate for scrambled eggs or whatever your heart desires.

The Coleman Road Trip Propane Portable Grill offers a lot of cooking power with 10,000 BTUs for each burner.  BTU, or British Thermal Unit, is a unit of measure given off by a gas burner.  For instance, a home stove has around 7,000 BTUs per burner.  So, 10,000 BTUs is a seriously good amount of heat for some grilling.

This portable grill features an Instastart Button which will enable you to light the grill without a lighter.  And, once lit, this grill can run for an hour on one of the 16.4 ounce propane cylinders.

Other features of the Coleman Road Trip Grill is a removable grease tray for easy cleanup and the convenient sliding side tables.

Finally, this grill measures 33.8 inches long, 13.5 inches wide, 19.1 inches tall and weighs roughly 50 pounds.  And, you get your choice of color:  Black, Blue, Green, Maroon, Orange, Purple, Red or Silver.

Pros:

The portability of this grill, while having the appearance of a regular-sized grill, is unheard of.  And, when speaking of the portability, did we bring attention to the wheels?

Furthermore, the setup of this grill is literally in seconds.  No hassle, no fuss, it just props right up.

Cons:

Because this grill has cast iron grilling plates, it’s going to take a lot longer to clean than grills with steel grates.  

Another con to this grill, it is rather heavy at 50 pounds.  Just make sure you have the manpower to transport this to and from the trunk.

Gourmia GBQ330 Portable Charcoal Electric BBQ Grill

Gourmia GBQ330 Portable Charcoal Electric BBQ Grill

This pick for best portable charcoal grill is an electric pick, looks-wise and function-wise.  The Gourmia BGQ330 Portable Charcoal Electric BBQ Grill is battery and coal-operated.  Simply place the charcoal in the small charcoal box, light the ignition and adjust the Smart Turbo Fan to control the strength of the flame.

This Smart Turbo Fan is a fabulous addition.  Not only does it control the strength of the flame, it also controls the airflow.  This allows for minimal charcoal and minimal smoke output.

The Gourmia GBQ330 Portable Charcoal Electric BBQ Grill features a non stick grill plate that is easy to clean.  In addition, this electric charcoal grill comes with a double grill pan system that helps eliminates drip.  Furthermore, it has a removable drip pan and all the electronic elements are removable for the convenience of cleaning.

Lastly, this pick for best portable charcoal grill has a circumference of 37.39 inches with an 11.90 inch grilling surface.  And, it comes with a travel case with a shoulder strap for easy portability.

Pros:

The cleanup process of this grill is flawless.  You can easily get to every crease and crevice without much hassle.

In addition, this grill is extremely efficient and doesn’t burn much charcoal, making it cost-effective.

Cons:

The grill plate is on the thin side and can bend rather easily.

Furthermore, some consumers say the heat does not distribute evenly and tends to focus on the center of the grill.

 

Pinty Portable Folding Charcoal Grill

Pinty Portable Folding Charcoal Grill

If you’re looking to grill for a group of people and still want the portability factor, this pick for best portable charcoal grill is one to consider.  The Pinty Portable Folding Charcoal Grill features 250 square inches of grill space which can accommodate anywhere from 5 to 7 people.  And, 250 square inches comes out to 18.5 inches wide by 13.5 inches deep of grill space.

This charcoal grill is made of carbon steel with a dust proof surface.  Carbon steel is known for its durability and strength.  In addition, the Pinty Portable Folding Charcoal Grill comes with porcelain-enameled grates which will help protect the grilling surface from rust while being easy to clean.  And, to protect your extremities, this grill comes with heat-resistant silicone handles.

This pick for best portable charcoal grill comes with 7 air vents for dust and ash discharge and will create the ultimate ventilation.  It also comes equipped with an ash catcher underneath the grilling grates.  And, to remove the ash, you simply remove the grates and turn the grill upside down.

Finally, even though this grill can accommodate a group of people, it is still highly portable.  With the legs expanded, this grill measures 22 inches long, 15.7 inches wide and 15.4 inches tall.  It’s fully foldable so the legs can tuck underneath the grill.  And, you can carry it away by one of the silicone handles.

Pros:

This is one sturdy little grill.  And, we’re not sure if we should be calling it little as it can feed a family at once.

So, with this pick for best portable charcoal grill, you’re getting the best of three worlds:  Durability, portability and a large grilling space.

Cons:

While this grill is made with carbon steel, some consumers felt it wasn’t as heavy-duty as they thought it would be.

 

Char-Griller 2-2424 Table Top Charcoal Grill

Char-Griller 2-2424 Table Top Charcoal Grill

Our final pick for best portable charcoal grill can also be used as a Texas-style smoker.  However, once you use this as a smoker, you cannot go back to using it as a grill.  

The Char-Griller 2-2424 Table Top Charcoal Grill is constructed of heavy steel with cast iron cooking grates.  So, you’re looking at durability all around.  And, with the cast iron cooking grates, you’re looking at some seriously fabulous grilled foods.  In addition, like we mentioned before, cast iron cleans up easily and quickly.

This portable charcoal grill is another pick that offers a large amount of grilling space.  The cooking grates have 250 square inches of real estate, enough to feed anywhere from 5 to 7 people.

A couple of other features include a removable ash pan for easy and convenient cleanup and a Stay Cool handle to protect your extremities from heat.

For portability purposes, what you see is what you get.  Just pick it up and go.  The Char-Griller 2-2424 Table Top Charcoal Grill measures 18.5 inches long, 16 inches wide and 17 inches tall.  It weighs approximately 41 pounds.

Pros:

This pick for best portable charcoal grill is well-constructed and made with some of the most durable materials available.  From the cast iron cooking grates to the heavy steel construction, you may be looking at a grill for a lifetime.

Furthermore, if you ever want to try your hand at some smoked fish or sausage, this grill would be your opportunity.  However, just remember you can’t go back to using this as a regular grill once you use it as a smoker.

Cons:

Some consumers have had issues with the paint coming off after the first couple of uses.  But, it’s important to note that some consumers haven’t had any issues.

best l shaped desk

Best L Shaped Desk for the Home or Office

If you’re on the hunt for the best L shaped desk for the home or office, we found 6 aesthetically pleasing desks that are durable and made with absolute quality.

In addition, these desks come in a range of prices to meet every consumer’s needs.  Therefore, if you’re on the lower end of the budget, we found the best L shaped desk that, in our opinion, looks the best – while being able to stand the test of time.  If you’re on the higher end of the budget, we found the best L shaped desks that are built with top quality materials, and will, not only look fabulous, but feel fabulous.

So, besides meeting your budget and aesthetic, what else should you look for in the best L shaped desk?

Under the assumption this desk will be used for work, the desk should draw inspiration.  This can happen a couple of different ways.  You can choose a desk that is designed in such a way that is pleasing to the eye or you can choose a desk that is so minimal, your work will be the focal point.

best l shaped desk

Therefore, a good question to ask yourself is, when you look at your desk, what do you want to see?  Do you want your work to stand out or your surroundings to stand out?  For some people, the work they do is aesthetically pleasing in nature, and these consumers tend to go with a simple design so as to not take away from their work.  Others, on the other hand, have more data driven work and these consumers tend to go with a more aesthetically pleasing desk.

Next, consider how much storage space you will need.  Do you need a filing cabinet?  How about a keyboard pullout?  Or, perhaps everything is stored on your computer and you just need extra counter space for a printer and a lamp.

Finally, be sure to take measurements.  The last thing you want to do is buy a desk and have to return it because the darn thing won’t fit.  And, with L shaped desks, pay close attention to if the L is on the right or the left of the desk.  Having the L shape on the wrong side can result in an annoying return.

So, once you have your needs all figured out, you’re ready to narrow down your options.  And, our picks for the best L shape desk should propel you on your way.

 

Best L Shaped Desk

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Ashley Furniture Signature Design Lobink L-Shaped Home Office Desk
Ashley Furniture Signature Design
Lobink L-Shaped Home Office Desk
Wood
Manmade Wood
Veneer
L/R Arrangement
60" x 56" x 30"
Sauder Costa L-Desk Chc A2
Sauder
Costa L-Desk Chc A2
Engineered Wood
Veneer
3 Drawers
Filing Rails
Keyboard Shelf
Grommet Holes
65.12" x 65.12" x 30"
DECHO DESIGN Modern L-Shaped Corner Computer Desk
DECHO DESIGN
Modern L-Shaped Corner Computer Desk
MDF Board
Steel Frame
Color Options
56" x 56" x 20.5"
Simpli Home Sawhorse Solid Wood L-Shape Corner Desk
Simpli Home
Sawhorse Solid Wood L-Shape Corner Desk
Pine
Keyboard Shelf
Color Options
84" x 80" x 30"
Sauder 420606 Palladia L-Desk Vo A2 Computer Desk
Sauder
420606 Palladia L-Desk Vo A2 Computer Desk
Engineered Wood
Veneer
4 Drawers
Filing Rails
Keyboard Shelf
Grommet Holes
68.7" x 65.1" x 29.6"
Merax 59-Inch L-Shaped Desk
Merax
59-Inch L-Shaped Desk
MDF Board
Steel Frame
Color Options
59" x 55" x 29.9"

 

Best L Shaped Desk

Ashley Furniture Signature Design Lobink L-Shaped Home Office Desk

Ashley Furniture Signature Design Lobink L-Shaped Home Office Desk

Simple, unassuming and a great fit for a traditional, classic, industrial or modern space.  And, actually, the simplicity of the Ashley Furniture Signature Design Lobink L-Shaped Home Office Desk can work with just about every aesthetic.

This pick for best L shaped desk measures 60 inches wide, 30 inches tall and 56 inches in diameter.  In addition, as an added bonus, this desk can be arranged on the left or right hand side.

The Ashley Furniture Signature Design Lobink L-Shaped Desk is made of wood, manmade wood and veneer.  And, it is made extremely sturdy which is crucial for those heavier items, such as a TV or a printer.  In addition, because it is made extremely sturdy, this desk will last for years to come.  And, of course, through all of that abuse work puts us through.

Finally, the assembly required is fairly easy.  However, it is a whole lot easier with 2 people on the task.

Pros:

This L shaped desk is very well made and sturdy.  This means there’s no wobble and the desk is made to handle heavier items.  

Furthermore, it is made with a quality hand-applied wood finish.  This will help protect it against scratches and stains.

Cons:

There’s not many cons to this desk.  The price is extremely gracious for what you get.  However, a few consumers have stated that assembly wasn’t that easy.  And, a couple of consumers didn’t receive the necessary tools to assemble the desk.

 

Sauder Costa L-Desk Chc A2

Sauder Costa L-Desk Chc A2

This L shaped, corner desk is great for elegant, classic and/or country decor.  The Sauder Costa L-Desk Chc A2 is also great for those who need extra storage.  This L shaped desk features 3 drawers, a keyboard shelf and filing rails.  And, the keyboard shelf can be assembled on either side of the L shape.

Furthermore, the bottom of the desk features a storage area with an adjustable shelf.  This adjustable shelf is perfect for storing a modem, speakers and/or a computer tower.  And, as an added feature, the top of the desk comes with grommet holes that will help manage cords and keep the desk free of cord clutter. 

The Sauder Costa L-Desk is made with engineered wood and thick-grained veneer, topped with a chalked chestnut finish.  And, this desk is finished on all sides so you’re not stuck propping it against the wall.

Finally, this L shaped corner desk measures 65.12 inches wide, 30 inches tall and 65.12 inches in diameter.  While the depth of the desk is 23.25 inches deep.

Pros:

The Sauder Costa L-Desk is extremely well made with sturdy construction. 

And, this desk offers plenty of storage.  But, if you’re looking for more storage or a whole office set, you can find the matching hut here, the matching file cabinet here and the matching chest here.

Cons:

Although this desk is easy to assemble, it does take awhile.  With some consumers estimating around 4 hours.

 

DECHO DESIGN Modern L-Shaped Corner Computer Desk

DECHO DESIGN Modern L-Shaped Corner Computer Desk

Our next pick for best L shaped desk for the home or office is perfect for modern spaces.  And, it comes in your choice of colors:  Oak and White Leg or Walnut and Black Leg.

In addition, because it is modern a modern design, it doesn’t offer much storage.  However, if you need extra storage, you can always add in a roll away filing cabinet like pictured above.  You can find the one DECHO DESIGN makes here or you can spice it up with some of these.

The DECHO DESIGN Modern L-Shaped Corner Computer Desk measures 20.5 inches wide, 29.93 inches tall and 56 inches in diameter.  Furthermore, it is constructed of MDF board with a thick steel frame.  And, this desk has a capacity to hold 300 lbs.  So, feel free to stack your monitors on top.

Finally, this desk is easy to assemble and come with instructions and tools to help get the job done.

Pros:

The DECHO DESIGN Modern L-Shaped Corner Computer Desk is strong and sturdy.  And, the design is great for minimal and modern spaces.

In addition, if you’re looking for a space-saving pick, this one’s a great fit.

Cons:

If you’re looking for the real deal, AKA wood, you may want to go with another pick.  This is made with MDF board, which is medium-density fiberboard.  And, although it is sturdy, many people crave the aesthetic of real wood.

Simpli Home Sawhorse Solid Wood L-Shape Corner Desk

Simpli Home Sawhorse Solid Wood L-Shape Corner Desk

This pick for best L shaped desk is one of our favorites and we can’t help but see ourselves completely in our element with this one.

The Simpli Home Sawhorse Solid Wood L-Shape Corner Desk is constructed in the classic sawhorse style with solid pine.  This solid pine is finished with a medium Saddle Brown stain and a NC Lacquer to protect the wood from scratches and stains.  You also have your pick of colors:  Saddle Brown, Dark Chestnut Brown or Distressed Grey.

This L shaped desk doesn’t come with storage so it’s great for those who are minimalists at work.  However, it does come with a built-in keyboard tray to help further keep things to a minimum.

This desk comes in three main pieces:  desk, corner piece and thick side desk.  The desk measures 60 inches long, 30 inches tall and 24 inches deep.  The corner piece measures 24 inches long and 24 inches deep, while the thick side desk measures 56 inches long, 30 inches tall and 24 inches deep.  With all that said, this is a fairly large desk so it’s great for those that like to spread out.

Pros:

The Simpli Home Sawhorse Solid Wood L-Shape Corner Desk is handcrafted and made with solid pine.  Need we say more?  Yes indeed!  This desk is absolutely stunning.

In addition, the assembly of this desk is easy.  The directions are straight-forward and clear and the hardware is clearly marked.

Cons:

Pine is softer than other woods and it tends to dent more easily.  Some people will purchase pine just for this fact, while others like to keep their wood looking brand new.  If you’re the type that likes their wood looking fresh, you can always invest in some desk pads for protection.

 

Sauder 420606 Palladia L-Desk Vo A2 Computer Desk

Sauder 420606 Palladia L-Desk Vo A2 Computer Desk

This pick is for someone looking for much-needed storage.  The Sauder 420606 Palladia L-Desk Vo A2 Computer Desk features 4 drawers, with one drawer set up for hanging files.  In addition, this L shaped desk comes with a shelf drawer for a keyboard and hidden storage which has an adjustable shelf.  This shelf is perfect for a computer tower, modem and/or speakers.

Furthermore, the top of the desk has grommet cords to keep the desk free of cord clutter. 

This traditional-style L shaped desk is made of engineered wood.  More specifically, it is made of high-quality hardwood and softwood residuals.  It is then bonded with synthetic resin and topped with a Vintage Oak laminate finish.

The Sauder Palladia L-Desk measures roughly 68.7 inches long on each side and 29.5 inches tall.

Pros:

This is one solid piece of furniture.  And, it weighs a whopping 271 pounds.  So, you can be rest assured that this table is going to hold the heavier pieces of equipment and then some.

Cons:

Although assembly is fairly easy, it’s going to take some time to put together.  Most consumers estimate between 4 and 6 hours.

However, once this desk is put together, it’s well worth it.

Merax 59-Inch L-Shaped Desk

Merax 59-Inch L-Shaped Desk

Our last pick for best L shaped desk is as minimal as you can get – price-wise and style-wise.  The Merax 59-Inch L-Shaped Desk is so unassuming, it will fit with just about any decor.

This L shaped desk is made with MDF with powder-coated steel legs.  The MDF is scratch resistant and cleans up easily while the durable, steel cantilever legs help keep the desk stable.

The Merax 59-Inch L-Shaped Desk measures 59 inches wide, 55 inches deep and 29.9 inches tall.  And, if you like this desk but you’re not so enthralled with the color, you can find different color schemes here and here.

Pros:

If you’re on a super-duper budget, this is a great pick.  It’s strong and will hold heavier equipment.

Furthermore, because it’s modern and unassuming, it’s going to look good in any space.

Lastly, most consumers agree, this desk is easy to assemble.

Cons:

Although this desk is strong, it is iffy in the sturdy department.  And, when we say sturdy, we mean wobble.  A couple of consumers have stated that it wobbles slightly when used on carpet.  So, perhaps your floor dressing is something to take into account before purchase.

how to make bath bombs

How to Make Bath Bombs

If you’ve gotten sucked into the bath bomb craze, you know exactly how rejuvenating these little guys can be.  If you haven’t, you’re in for the ultimate luxurious treat.  And, in this post, we are going to take you on a journey on how to make bath bombs, for bath bomb beginners and veterans alike.

For those that are just getting started, bath bombs are amazing.  They will help soften and moisturize your skin and you will reap the benefit of essential oils.

how to make bath bombs

So, we’ve got to give major props to this scientific experiment gone right.  Not only are bath bombs great for our skin and our general well-being, they add an element of surprise every time the bombs start to fizz away and dissolve in the bath water.  And, they turn a rather mundane bath experience into a lively and perplexing, yet relaxing, down time.

For those that are new to these fizzy creatures, you may ask, how do I get started with this magical bath treatment?  Well, there’s 2 ways:  you can follow our precise instructions and learn how to make bath bombs or you can buy some.

The benefit to making your own bath bombs is you can customize them down to the very last drop of essential oil.  On the other hand, the benefit of buying some is you don’t have to do the work and they come in delightful, gift-like packaging.

So, if you would like to bypass the process of making your own bath bombs, you can find our picks for the 5 best bath bombs here.  If you would like to try your hand at making your own, continue on to our fabulous bath bomb recipe below.

 

How to Make Bath Bombs

The infograph above shows a simplified way on how to make bath bombs and can be used for an easy reference once you’ve got the details down. But first, let us take you through the ins and outs, as well as the dos and don’ts, of how to make bath bombs.

What You Will Need:  Bath Bomb Ingredients*

  • 1 cup baking soda
  • 1/2 cup citric acid
  • 1/2 cup Epsom Salt
  • 1 tsp mineral water
  • 3 tsp coconut oil
  • 2 tsp essential oils

What You Will Need:  Supplies*

  • Medium bowl
  • Small bowl
  • Whisk
  • Bath bomb mold

*If you need a recommendation for some of these ingredients or supplies, we have a list of our favorites at the bottom of this article.

Bath Bomb Recipe

Step 1:  In a medium bowl, whisk together the dry ingredients.  This includes the baking soda, citric acid and Epsom salt.  Set aside.

Step 2:  In a small bowl, combine the mineral water, coconut oil and essential oils.  (Note:  Most recipes call for food coloring.  However, due to the unnatural state of food coloring, for health purposes, we opt not to use it.)

Step 3:  Slowly add the wet mixture in with the dry mixture and combine.  You will want to achieve a wet, sandy texture.  So, you may need to add in a little more oil to achieve this.

Step 4:  Place the bath bomb mixture in the molds and let dry.  If you find the bath bombs are having a tough time drying, you may want to put them into the freezer and that should do the trick.

Step 5:  Now that you know how to make bath bombs, it’s time to bathe.  Use one bath bomb for one tub full of water.  

Recommendations

While most of the ingredients and supplies you can easily find lying around the pantry or sitting on the shelf in the grocery store in your favorite aisle, a few of these aren’t so cut and dry.  So, in order to help steer you in the right direction, here’s our picks for our favorite not-so-common ingredients and our pick for the elusive bath bomb molds:

Best Bath Bomb Molds

AMXTOP DIY Metal Bath Bomb Mold

AMXTOP DIY Metal Bath Bomb Mold

There are a few advantages to these bath bomb molds.  First and foremost, these bath bomb molds offer 3 different sizes:  1.8 inch, 2.2 inch and 2.6 inch.  In addition, they are heavy-duty and durable so they will keep their shape for longer.  Lastly, and certainly the most important advantage to these bath bomb molds is, they are BPA free.  This will help to eliminate any contact with the chemical Bisphenol-A, which mimics the estrogen hormone and can cause numerous health issues.

Citric Acid for Bath Bombs

HaleFRESH Premium Food Grade Citric Acid

HaleFRESH Premium Food Grade Citric Acid

Citric Acid is a common food ingredient and something that you can easily find in the grocery store.  However, we have been using this particular premium grade citric acid and our bath bombs have turned out perfectly fizzy.  And, not only are they fizzy, this citric acid is made with high quality, 100% citric acid.  This means no fillers or anti-caking agents.  Furthermore, this citric acid is also approved for organic foods, which attests to the quality of this product.

Best Essential Oils for Bath Bombs

Just about any essential oil will do.  However, you may want to customize the oils in accordance with your needs.

For instance, if you’re looking to unwind, you will want to choose an essential oil that will help you do just that.  If your skin feels rather dry, you will want to pick an essential oil that’s heavy on the hydration properties.  And, if you’re looking for an anti-aging treatment, there are some beneficial essential oils that will target this particular regimen.  (For more in-depth knowledge on which anti-aging essential oils may work best for you, check out our guide for combatting wrinkles and obtaining more youthful skin.)

To get you started, here’s a simplified version of the most popular essential oils and what they can do for you:

  • Lavender:  Relax, unwind and de-stress
  • Peppermint:  Stimulate and rejuvenate
  • Hibiscus:  Relax, calm and de-stress
  • Rosemary:  Invigorate and energize
  • Sea Buckthorn:  Normalize moisture levels and improve skin elasticity
  • Frankincense:  Normalize oily skin
  • Rosewood:  Tranquil, calm and hydrate
  • Pomegranate Seed:  Detox, hydrate and normalize

Typically, we add a moisturizing essential oil along with a mood-type oil.  For instance, we will mix peppermint with the hydrating pomegranate seed or we will mix hibiscus with the skin normalizing frankincense.

And, because we love variety, we chose to go with an essential oil set.   This set helps us mix, match and customize our baths down to our skin’s needs and our current state of mind.

Natrogix Nirvana Essential Oil Set

Natrogix Nirvana Essential Oil Set

This therapeutic grade essential oil set will give you lots of opportunity to create the ultimate bath bomb mixtures.  And, this is because it comes with a whopping 18 essential oils.  Choose from eucalyptus, frankincense, lavender, lemongrass, lemon, rosemary, sweet orange, tea tree, peppermint, turmeric, tangerine, ylang ylang, basil, cedarwood, spearmint, bergamot, copaiba balsam and cinnamon leaf.

And, just like our other recommended products, we aim for quality and health-conscious products.  So, these oils are GC/MS certified and made without pesticides, herbicides, GMOs and other additives.

best coffee maker with grinder

Best Coffee Maker with Grinder – Top 4 Programmable Picks

There’s nothing better than fresh ground coffee and fresh brewed coffee – except for the best coffee maker with grinder.  And, this is a device where you can have both nearly simultaneously.

So, what are the advantages of having a coffee maker with grinder?  First off, like we mentioned above, you get fresh ground and fresh brewed coffee back to back.  So, if you thought the smell of coffee brewing was heavenly before, this just makes it all smell a whole lot richer.

Next, there isn’t one person who would love to save on cupboard space and counter space.  And, when you have a separate grinder and a separate coffee maker, things get a little clunky and cluttered.  Therefore, the best coffee maker with grinder will save you precious room in the kitchen.

Another added bonus of having a 2-in-1 coffee maker and grinder is less mess.  We all know from grinding coffee in a separate grinder, things tend to get messy.  With a coffee maker and grinder, the grounds go directly from the grinder into the filter.  So, say goodbye to grounds spilling onto the countertop.

Finally, and perhaps best of all, our picks for best coffee maker with grinder are all programmable.  This means they will grind and brew the coffee while you’re working on getting out of bed.  And, there’s nothing like waking up to the smell of fresh ground and brewed coffee.

 

Best Coffee Maker with Grinder

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Capresso 464.05 CoffeeTeam GS 10-Cup Digital Coffeemaker with Concial Burr Grinder
Capresso
464.05 CoffeeTeam GS 10-Cup Digital Coffeemaker with Concial Burr Grinder
Programmable
Automatic Grind/Brew
Strength Settings
Fineness Settings
Conical Burr Grinder
Drip Stop
Charcoal Water Filter
Gold Tone Filter
Safety Shutoff
9.2" x 9.2" x 15.2"
Cuisinart DGB-650BC Grind-and-Brew Thermal 10-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker
Cuisinart
DGB-650BC Grind-and-Brew Thermal 10-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker
Programmable
Automatic Grind/Brew
2 Blade Grinder
Brew Pause
Double-Wall Carafe
Charcoal Water Filter
Gold Tone Filter
Auto Shutoff
9.8" x 12" x 17.5"
BLACK+DECKER 12-Cup Mill and Brew Coffeemaker CM5000B
BLACK+DECKER
12-Cup Mill and Brew Coffeemaker CM5000B
Programmable
Automatic Grind/Brew
Strength Settings
2 Blade Grinder
Brew Pause
Bronze Tone Filter
Auto Shutoff
10" x 13.5" x 15.5"
Cuisinart DGB-900BC Grind & Brew Thermal 12-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker
Cuisinart
DGB-900BC Grind & Brew Thermal 12-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker
Programmable
Automatic Grind/Brew
Strength Settings
Burr Grinder
Brew Pause
Double-Wall Carafe
Charcoal Water Filter
Gold Tone Filter
Auto Shutoff
7.9" x 12.7" x 15.9"

 

Best Coffee Maker with Grinder

 

Capresso 464.05 CoffeeTeam GS 10-Cup Digital Coffeemaker with Concial Burr Grinder

Capresso 464.05 CoffeeTeam GS 10-Cup Digital Coffeemaker with Concial Burr Grinder

Our first pick for best coffee maker with grinder will brew up to 10 cups of coffee at a time.  And, it will grind enough beans for up to 20 cups of coffee before you will need to refill the 6 ounce bean bin.

The Capresso CoffeeTeam GS Digital Coffeemaker with Concial Burr Grinder is programmable so you can wake up smelling the day ahead of you.  With the programmable settings, you can choose between 2 to 10 cups of coffee at a mild, regular or strong setting.  In addition, this coffee maker offers 5 fineness settings to grind the beans according to the darkness or the lightness of the bean.  So, for darker beans, you can program the grinder for a coarser grind.  And, with a lighter bean, you can program the grinder for a finer grind.

Furthermore, these settings are all programmable by a 24-hour clock.  This clock is displayed on an LCD screen which also displays the grind and strength settings.

So, what if you don’t want to use the programmable settings?  No worries, this coffee maker will also work manually.

Now, what happens if you’re up and ready to go before the coffee gets done brewing?  Well, this coffee maker with grinder has a drip stop so you can pour your coffee in the middle of the process without worrying about making a mess.  Then, just place the coffee pot back on the burner and the brewing will resume.

This coffee maker with grinder also features direct-feed technology.  Direct-feed technology is where the grinder feeds the beans right into the filter, so you don’t have to worry about anything except for pouring your morning cup of coffee.     

The Capresso CoffeeTeam GS 10-Cup Digital Coffeemaker features a solid steel concial burr grinder.  According to Kitchn, a conical burr grinder will grind your beans in a uniform size.  And, since this is a slow grinding concial burr grinder, it will increase the aroma of the coffee.  Furthermore, according to Whole Latte Love, the slow grinding conical burr grinder is the “Cadillac” of grinders.  So, coming from the coffee specialists themselves, this is the best grinder money can buy.

The next question is, what if you want to use pre-ground coffee?  This coffee maker will work with or without the grinder, so feel free to grind or not to grind.

And, for a few other notable features, the Capresso CoffeeTeam GS 10-Cup Digital Coffeemaker comes equipped with a charcoal water filter.  This charcoal water filter will remove up to 82% of chlorine, sediment and odor from the water.

Furthermore, this coffee maker with grinder features a 2-hour safety shutoff to preserve energy and to keep your surroundings safe.

Finally, this pick for best coffee maker with grinder comes with your choice of a glass carafe or a stainless steel carafe.

Pros:

The Capresso CoffeeTeam GS Digital Coffeemaker is extremely well made and a quality product.  Furthermore, it has endless features from the charcoal water filter to the 3 strength settings to the 5 fineness settings.  And, it is completely programmable, so you don’t have to worry about a thing when waking up.

Another added bonus with this coffee maker with grinder is it comes with a conical burr grinder.  This grinder is the grinder used by coffee snobs and connoisseurs alike.  So, you’re going to have some of the best smelling and best tasting coffee money can brew.

Cons:

A few consumers have complained about how long this grinder takes to grind.  In addition, they also stated that this grinder is rather loud.  So, if you’re a light sleeper, you may want to venture with another option on our list.

Furthermore, once you have filled the bean bin with whole beans, they are there to stay.  So, if you’re looking to change to a different blend, you need to go through the grinding process in order to rid of the unused beans.  However, this grinder has the capacity for approximately 2 pots of brewed coffee, so it’s not the biggest downfall in the world of brewing coffee.

 

Cuisinart DGB-650BC Grind-and-Brew Thermal 10-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker

Cuisinart DGB-650BC Grind-and-Brew Thermal 10-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker

This pick for best coffee maker with grinder is another one with a 10 cup brew capacity.  And, the grinder bin has the capacity to grind enough beans for a full pot of coffee.

The Cuisinart DGB-650BC Grind-and-Brew Thermal 10-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker is completely programmable.  These programmable settings include a 1-4 cup brewing option, a brew-pause and a grind-off.  The brew-pause function allows you to pour the coffee while it’s brewing.  This will enable the spout to shut off until you place the carafe back on the burner.  Additionally, the grind-off function will allow you to use pre-ground coffee.

Furthermore, these settings can all be programmed 24 hours in advance to ensure you wake up to the smell of coffee.  And, there is a large control panel with an LED display to adjust these settings.

The Cuisinart DGB-650BC Grind-and-Brew Thermal Automatic Coffeemaker features a 2 blade grinder.  According to the Coffee Detective and other coffee professionals, the better option for a grinder is a burr grinder.  With a 2 blade grinder, there is inconsistency with the size of the grind which can clog the machine.  However, the 2 blade grinder is less expensive than a burr grinder.

Furthermore, with this 2 blade grinder, it is preset to brew medium strength coffee.  So, be sure you choose your coffee blends accordingly.  If you prefer dark-brewed coffee, we suggest going with a darker blend.  If you prefer light-brewed coffee, we suggest going with the lightest blend possible.  Or, you can choose any blend you want and just add less beans.

The Cuisinart DBG-650BC Grind-and-Brew Coffeemaker will automatically grind the beans before brewing.  So, while you’re waking up, the grind process will already be in effect for your much-awaited first cup of coffee.

This coffee maker with grinder comes with a double-wall thermal carafe which will keep the coffee hotter for longer.  And, this carafe features a stay-cool handle and a drip-free spout.

Additional features of this coffee maker with grinder include a charcoal water filter and a gold tone filter.  The charcoal water filter will eliminate most contaminants from the water and will remove odor, making way for an even more delicious cup of coffee.

Finally, the Cuisinart Grind-and-Brew is made in such a way that all materials which come in contact with the water, coffee and coffee beans are BPA free.

Pros:

Consumers find this coffee maker with grinder easy to use.  And, furthermore, it is easy to clean.

In addition, the thermal double-wall coffee pot is an industrial-style pot which is great for keeping the coffee hotter for longer.  

Cons:

This coffee maker comes with a 2 blade grinder as opposed to a burr grinder.  A burr grinder is definitely the far better grinder for better tasting coffee.  However, if you are interested in this Cuisinart but prefer a burr grinder, you’re in luck.  Our last pick for best coffeemaker with grinder is a Cuisinart with a burr grinder.

Lastly, this coffeemaker doesn’t have an adjustable grinder.  So, you will need to work around the medium-strength brew preset by following our examples above.

BLACK+DECKER 12-Cup Mill and Brew Coffeemaker CM5000B

BLACK+DECKER 12-Cup Mill and Brew Coffeemaker CM5000B

This pick for best coffeemaker with grinder comes with a 12 cup brew capacity carafe.  And, the grinder bin also allows for a 12 cup brew capacity.  So, you will need to fill the grinder bin with fresh beans before each brew.

The Black & Decker 12-Cup Mill and Brew Coffeemaker CM5000B features 24-hour programming with multiple settings.  These settings include brew strength, grind-off, small-brew, and of course, grinding and brewing at your desired time.  The brew strength setting allows you to set the option for regular, bold or strong coffee.  The grind-off setting allows you to shut off the grinder so you can use ground coffee.  And, the small-brew setting will allow you to make a smaller pot of coffee for those energy-fueled days.

These settings are all programmable on a large control panel with a backlight display.  This backlight display will highlight the settings and the time.

This coffeemaker with grinder comes with a 2 blade grinder.  And, like we stated above, a 2 blade grinder isn’t necessarily the grinder the professionals use.  It will grind and it will allow for great tasting brewed coffee.  However, because of the way it erratically grinds the coffee, it has a tendency to clog after a while.

The Black & Decker 12-Cup Mill and Brew Coffeemaker comes with a couple more notable features.  These features include a permanent bronze filter, a brew-stop function and an automatic-off function.  The brew-stop function will allow you to pour a cup of coffee mid-brew without making a mess.  And, the automatic-off function will shut off the heat to preserve energy and prevent a disaster.

Finally, this coffee maker with grinder comes in your choice of colors:  Black, Black/White, Red or White.

Pros:

For having a 2 blade grinder, this machine grounds the coffee reasonably fine.  Therefore, you may be able to avoid clogging issues for longer with this pick.

Furthermore, the grinder is fairly quiet.  And, if you’re a light sleeper, you’re going to love this aspect.

Cons:

There is no water filter with the Black & Decker 12-Cup Mill and Brew Coffeemaker.  However, to achieve the best tasting coffee, you can fill the water tank up with pre-filtered water.

In addition, there is no reservoir for the beans.  So, you will have to fill this bin each time before programming it to brew at your desired time.

 

Cuisinart DGB-900BC Grind & Brew Thermal 12-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker

Cuisinart DGB-900BC Grind & Brew Thermal 12-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker

Our grand finale for best coffee maker with grinder is a 12 cup capacity coffee maker with an 8 ounce bean bin.  This bean bin will hold a half a pound of beans which will allow you to grind and brew approximately 4 pots of coffee.

The Cuisinart DGB-900BC Grind & Brew Thermal 12-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker is fully programmable.  These programmable settings include automatic grind, automatic brew, automatic shutoff, brew-pause and grind-off.  The automatic shutoff will shut down the coffee maker to preserve energy and keep your surroundings safe.  The brew-pause setting will allow you to pour yourself a cup of coffee mid-brew without making a mess.  And, the grind-off setting will allow you to use pre-ground coffee.

Furthermore, there is a strength setting and a grind control.  With the strength setting, you can set the strength of your coffee to mild, medium or strong.  And, with the grind control, you can grind enough coffee for 2 to 12 cups.  In addition, there is a feature where you’re able to brew between 2 and 4 cups of coffee.

The Cuisinart DGB-900BC Grind & Brew Thermal 12-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker features a burr grinder.  And, like we stated above, a burr grinder is the choice of coffee professionals and coffee connoisseurs alike.  A burr grinder will grind the beans in a uniform size, which helps to prevent clogging.  In addition, a burr grinder produces better tasting and better smelling coffee.  And, we’re pretty sure we can all wake up to that.

This coffee maker with grinder comes with a charcoal water filter.  This charcoal water filter will remove most of the contaminates in the water and will help to eliminate odor.  And, eliminating odor will help to achieve the ultimate fresh brewed coffee.

The Cuisinart Grind & Brew Thermal 12-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker comes with a double-wall insulated stainless steel thermal carafe and features a comfort grip handle.  This double-wall thermal carafe will help to keep the coffee hotter for longer.

Finally, this pick for best coffee maker with grinder is BPA free.

Pros:

This coffee maker is fairly quiet which is great for the light sleepers out there.

In addition, the Cuisinart Grind & Brew 12-Cup Coffeemaker features a burr grinder for better tasting and better smelling coffee.  And, it helps to keep things from getting clogged.

Another aspect consumers love about this coffeemaker is it is very easy to operate.

Cons:

With this pick for best coffee maker with grinder, there is no fineness settings for coarseness.  If you’re looking for a coffeemaker with grinder comparable to this model that has these settings, you may want to check out the first option on our list.

Furthermore, this coffeemaker requires quite a bit of daily cleaning.  However, some consumers say for such great tasting coffee, it’s well worth it.

 

best seat cushion for lower back pain

Best Seat Cushion for Lower Back Pain

Because we suffer from lumbar, coccyx, sciatica and hip issues, we found ourselves in need of the best seat cushion for lower back pain.  And, we also needed a cushion that was going to improve our posture, which in the long run, will help our back and hip issues over time.

So, when we began this assignment, the seat cushion we were using at the time had flattened out like a pancake and we were in desperate need before our back and hip issues became worse.  Therefore, our pancake seat cushion gave us our first requirement for finding the best seat cushion.  The cushion had to hold up through long hours of sitting day in and day out.  So, durability and longevity was one of our main focal points.

Our other main focal point was, of course, finding the best seat cushion to help alleviate our wide range of issues.  Like we stated previously, sciatic nerve pain, anterior pelvic tilt, pelvic floor pain, lower back pain and a fractured coccyx.  Trust us, all of this together is not fun.  And, that’s why finding the best seat cushion for us is all that more dire.

So, with our final picks, we needed relief.  And, we made sure these picks will not only help us with our wide-range of issues, they will help us for months to come.

 

Best Seat Cushion for Lower Back Pain

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Everlasting Comfort 100% Pure Memory Foam Luxury Seat Cushion
Everlasting Comfort
100% Pure Memory Foam Luxury Seat Cushion
Memory Foam
Non-Slip Gel Rubber Bottom
U-Shaped Coccyx Cutout
Leg Support
17.5" x 13.5" x 2.8"
Easy Posture Dr. Tushy Wedge
Easy Posture
Dr. Tushy Wedge
Memory Foam
EZ Snap Elastic Straps
U-Shaped Coccyx Cutout
Leg Support
14" x 14" x 3"
Kieba Coccyx Seat Cushion
Kieba
Coccyx Seat Cushion
Memory Foam
Gel Technology
Non-Slip Bottom
U-Shaped Coccyx Cutout
Leg Support
14" x 18" x 3"
Ergonomic Innovations Donut Tailbone Cushion
Ergonomic Innovations
Donut Tailbone Cushion
Medical Foam
Non-Slip Bottom
Center Coccyx Cutout
17.5" x 14" x 2.5"
Soft & Care Seat Cushion Coccyx Orthopedic Memory Foam and Lumbar Support Pillow
Soft & Care
Seat Cushion Coccyx Orthopedic Memory Foam and Lumbar Support Pillow
Memory Foam
Non-Slip Bottom
U-Shaped Coccyx Cutout
Back Support
Adjustable Straps
18” x 14” x 3”

 

Best Seat Cushion for Lower Back Pain

Everlasting Comfort 100% Pure Memory Foam Luxury Seat Cushion

Everlasting Comfort 100% Pure Memory Foam Luxury Seat Cushion

Our first pick for best seat cushion for lower back pain is made of 100% memory foam.  So, this will mold to your tush and relieve pressure that often comes with sitting on hard surfaces.

The Everlasting Comfort 100% Pure Memory Foam Luxury Seat Cushion is used to relieve numerous back conditions.  These conditions include sciatic nerve pain, arthritis, lower back pain, lumbar pain, coccyx discomfort and hip discomfort.

So, how does a memory foam seat cushion manage to alleviate all of these conditions?  Like we mentioned previously, the memory foam will help relieve pressure by absorbing shock.  Furthermore, this seat cushion features a contoured design to support your legs.  And, it has a U-shaped cutout to take much-needed pressure off of the coccyx.

The Everlasting Comfort Luxury Seat Cushion is heat responsive, which not only helps to form perfectly to your tush, it will also help to relax tight muscles.

Finally, this seat cushion offers a nonslip gel rubber bottom to keep you secure and in proper alignment at all times.

And, there is a weight limit with this cushion.  So, for maximum benefit and longevity of this seat cushion, it is best suited for those weighing between 100 and 300 pounds. 

What consumers are saying:

Consumers say this seat cushion is firm, yet comfortable.  In addition, it keeps its form without flattening out over time.

In addition, consumers say it helps them sit upright and prevents them from hunching over.

And, as far as alleviating back and hip conditions, the consensus was overwhelming.  Many consumers who suffer from pain and discomfort related to sciatica and hip, lumbar and coccyx issues reported feeling relief from these particular issues and were able to sit comfortably for longer periods of time.

Easy Posture Dr. Tushy Wedge

Easy Posture Dr. Tushy Wedge

This next pick for best seat cushion for lower back pain is made with memory foam and features a soft velour cover.  And, like we mentioned previously, memory foam will help absorb shock and relieve back, hip and coccyx pressure.

The Easy Posture Dr. Tushy Wedge is designed in such a way that it will help to improve posture while alleviating pain associated with hip, lower back and coccyx issues.  And, for those with hip pain, or in our case, anterior pelvic tilt, this cushion will help align your hips to relieve pain that comes with sitting for long periods of time.

This seat cushion features a coccyx cut out to help take complete pressure off of the tailbone.  So, for those that have had a tailbone injury, you can breathe a sigh of relief.

The Easy Posture Dr. Tushy Wedge comes with EZ Snap elastic straps to secure the cushion into place.  And, this is especially helpful while using this seat cushion in the car.

Finally, this seat cushion’s cover is removable and machine washable.

What consumers are saying:

Consumers say this seat cushion is firm, yet gives a little once it detects the form of the body.  And, once it conforms to the body, it is extremely comfortable.

Furthermore, consumers say this seat cushion helps relieve pressure from the hips and works very well in aligning the spine while relieving lumbar and coccyx pain.

Lastly, most consumers agree, the Easy Posture Dr. Tushy Wedge keeps its shape after months of use.

Kieba Coccyx Seat Cushion

Kieba Coccyx Seat Cushion

This pick for best seat cushion for lower back pain is made of premium memory foam.  Furthermore, this memory foam is layered with gel technology to keep things cool.

The Kieba Coccyx Seat Cushion is designed for lumbar, coccyx, hip and sciatic pain and discomfort.  Some other conditions this seat cushion will help comfort is pelvic pain, herniated discs and bed sores.

In addition, this seat cushion will help align the spine and promote correct posture.  And, because this seat cushion offers leg support, it will distribute weight evenly.

The Kieba Coccyx Seat Cushion comes with a non-slip bottom to keep you secure through hours of sitting.  Furthermore, this seat cushion features a removable velour cover that is machine washable.

What consumers are saying:

Consumers say this seat cushion is firm, yet comfortable.  And, some consumers say it is too firm.  So, if you are looking for a firm seat cushion, this is a great pick for you.  If you like to have a little cushion, you may want to go with another one of our picks.

Furthermore, this seat cushion is wider in size than our other picks.  So, if you need more space for your hips, this is one to consider.

Ergonomic Innovations Donut Tailbone Cushion

Ergonomic Innovations Donut Tailbone Cushion

For those of you that have tried the U-shaped seat cushions to no avail, this donut-shaped cushion may be the miracle you’ve been looking for.

The Ergonomic Innovations Donut Tailbone Cushion is made of high-rebound medical foam.  And, high-rebound medical foam is durable and long-lasting, while being firm, yet comfortable.

This seat cushion can be helpful for numerous conditions.  Some of these conditions include:  lumbar, hip and pelvic pain, coccyx discomfort, hemorrhoids, ulcers, herniated disc, prostate pain and more.  Furthermore, if you suffer from prolonged sitting disorder, this seat cushion will also give you relief.

The Ergonomic Innovations Donut Tailbone Cushion features a center cutout for the coccyx.  In addition, this cutout will relieve pressure to the spine.

Lastly, this donut seat cushion has a nonslip bottom that will help keep you seated securely.  And, it has a removable cover that is machine washable.

What consumers are saying:

Consumers say this seat cushion is very firm.  So, if firm support is what you’re looking for, this is a great pick for you.

Additionally, consumers say this is a quality product and it retains its shape well.

Soft & Care Seat Cushion Coccyx Orthopedic Memory Foam and Lumbar Support Pillow

Soft & Care Seat Cushion Coccyx Orthopedic Memory Foam and Lumbar Support Pillow

Our last pick for best seat cushion for lower back pain is for those who need extra back support.  Furthermore, this pick is especially great for those who have a less than desirable office chair.

The Soft & Care Seat Cushion Coccyx Orthopedic Memory Foam and Lumbar Support Pillow is made of high-density, premium memory foam.  And, like we mentioned earlier, memory foam will absorb shock and take some of the pressure off of the spine, hip and coccyx area.

This seat cushion is great for numerous issues, such as, sciatica, herniated disc, hip pain, pelvic floor pain, lower lumbar pain, pregnancy discomfort and more.  And, because this seat cushion has a coccyx cutout, this will give additional relief for the coccyx and spine area.  Additionally, this seat cushion will help align the spine and promote correct posture.

The Soft & Care Seat Cushion Coccyx Orthopedic Memory Foam Pillow comes with a non-slip bottom to keep you extra secure, while the top cushion features 2 adjustable straps that buckle to keep the cushion in place.  Furthermore, for traveling purposes, this seat cushion comes with a convenient carrying handle and a side pocket for your phone.

Lastly, this seat cushion features breathable mesh to keep things cool and comfortable.  And, the cover is removable and washable.

What consumers are saying:

If you’re looking for softer support, this is a great option for you.  However, users seem to agree, although soft, it’s supportive.  And, more specifically, it offers great lumbar and spine support.

In addition, consumers say the Soft & Care Seat Cushion Memory Foam Support Pillow is quality constructed and durable.  But, consumers say it’s a bit on the small size, especially the seat back.  So, if you’re on the smaller side, this may be a good option for you.  If you’re in need of something bigger, you may want to check out some of our other picks.

 

best space heater for large room

Best Space Heater for Large Room

When looking for the best space heater for large room, it is crucial to find a heater that is efficient.  If you have ever received an electricity bill after trying to keep warm in the winter, it’s not the most pleasant surprise.  So, when we began our search for the best space heater for large room, efficiency was at the top of our list.

Another quality to look for when searching for the best space heater for large room is safety.  Therefore, our final picks all have different safety features to help prevent a disaster.  For instance, one of our picks has tip-over protection while another pick stays cool to the touch.  And, of course, all of our picks come with overheat protection.

In addition, we also had comfort in mind when choosing our final 5 best heaters for a large space.  And, we are not talking about the comfort of heat.  This aspect we already made sure of.  We are talking quiet heat.  So, if the heat is blowing, there will be very little to no white noise.

Finally, we sifted through all the user reviews and made sure each on of our final picks lived up to the expectations of some picky consumers.  And, our final picks have some of the highest-rated reviews and most satisfied consumers on the market.

 

Best Space Heater for Large Room

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Dr Infrared Heater Portable Space Heater
Dr Infrared Heater
Portable Space Heater
PTC/Quartz Infrared Heating
1500 Watt/12.5 Amp
Electronic Thermostat
12 Hour Automatic Shutoff
Tip-Over Protection
Remote Control
13" x 11" x 16"
Duraflame DFI-5010-01 Infrared Quartz Fireplace Stove with 3D Flame Effect
Duraflame
DFI-5010-01 Infrared Quartz Fireplace Stove with 3D Flame Effect
Quartz Infrared Heating
1500 Watt/12.5 Amp
Thermostat
Metal Construction
3-D Flame Effect
Cool Touch
Safer Plug Fire Prevention
Remote Control
Style Options
13.1" x 24" x 23.4"
Homegear Pro 1500w Large Room Infrared Space Cabinet Heater
Homegear
Pro 1500w Large Room Infrared Space Cabinet Heater
Mica/Quartz Infrared Heating
1500 Watts/12.5 Amp
Thermostat
Cool Touch
Overheat Protection
Remote Control
Style Options
12" x 13" x 17"
Cadet RCP402S Space Heater "The Hot One"
Cadet
RCP402S Space Heater "The Hot One"
4000 Watts/20 Amp
Double Pole Thermostat
Fan Only Mode
Mounting Bracket
Overheat Protection
Color Options
Wattage Options
8.2" x 17.5" x 15.8"
Heat Storm Portable 1500 Watt Infrared Heater
Heat Storm
Portable 1500 Watt Infrared Heater
HMS Technology Heating
1500 Watt/12.5 Amp
Thermostat
Fan
Overheat Sensor
Remote Control
12.5" x 14.5" x 16"

 

Best Space Heater for Large Room

 

Dr Infrared Heater Portable Space Heater

Dr Infrared Heater Portable Space Heater

Our first pick for best space heater for large room is energy-efficient and will keep a 1,000 square foot space comfortably warm.

And, how does it do this?  The Dr Infrared Portable Space Heater uses a high-efficiency blower to transfer heat.  This blower is twice as large and will move larger volumes of air than other competing space heaters.  In addition, this blower is virtually noiseless.  

Furthermore, the Dr Infrared Portable Space Heater uses a dual heating system.  This dual heating system combines both PTC and Quartz Infrared Heating.  PTC heating, or Positive Temperature Coefficient, helps to prevent overheating and reduce operating costs.  And, Quartz Infrared Heating heats up instantly and operates quietly.

This 1500 Watt, 12.5 Amp portable space heater features an electronic thermostat, which is also operational via remote, and has a heating range of 50 to 86 degrees.  In addition, this space heater offers a high and low feature to customize the amount of heat output.

And, for safety protection, the Dr Infrared Portable Space heater comes with a 12 hour automatic shutoff and tip-over protection.

Pros:

The consensus with this space heater is it heats up quickly and operates quietly.

Additionally, it is able to heat a large space and accommodate tall ceilings.

Cons:

The remote control only works if the heater is turned on.  And, some consumers have issues with the remote interfering with their other electronics.  And, perhaps, this may be a case where the remote uses the same frequency as other appliances.

 

Duraflame DFI-5010-01 Infrared Quartz Fireplace Stove with 3D Flame Effect

Duraflame DFI-5010-01 Infrared Quartz Fireplace Stove with 3D Flame Effect

This next pick for best space heater for large room can heat up an area as large as 1,000 feet.  The Duraflame DFI-5010-01 Quartz Fireplace Stove uses Quartz infrared heating which will heat up instantly.  Furthermore, Quartz infrared heating will preserve the natural humidity in the air.

This 1500 Watt, 12.5 Amp space heater is constructed of metal and offers side windows and a beveled glass door.  And, there is access through the door for easy maintenance.

The Duraflame Quartz Fireplace Stove features an adjustable thermostat which can be turned up to a maximum of 82 degrees Fahrenheit.  Additionally, this thermostat is operable via remote control.

And, when you’re not using the heat, the flame effect can be turned on to set the mood.  Furthermore, this flame effect has 5 adjustable brightness and speed settings.

For safety purposes, the Duraflame Quartz Fireplace Stove is cool to the touch which is a necessity for households with children and pets.  

For overheat protection, this space heater features Safer Plug Fire Prevention Technology.  Safer Plug Fire Prevention Technology will automatically shutoff the stove if the temperature rises above the maximum safety level.

Finally, this space heater comes in your choice of 4 styles:  Black, Black Carleton, Bronze Steel or Pure Black.

Pros:

The Duraflame Quartz Fireplace Stove not only adds heat, but ambience as well.  And, the adjustable brightness and speed settings for the flame effects are a great addition.

Furthermore, because this unit uses Quartz heating, it will keep the air comfortably moist without drying it out.

Cons:

The remote control will only turn the heat on and off.  So, if you want to adjust the temperature, you’re going to have to do that in the unit.  And, when we mean in the unit, we mean in the unit.  You will have to open the door in order to set the temperature.

 

Homegear Pro 1500w Large Room Infrared Space Cabinet Heater

Homegear Pro 1500w Large Room Infrared Space Cabinet Heater

If you’re looking to heat up an even larger space, this pick for best space heater for large room will accommodate an area of 1500 square feet.

The Homegear Pro 1500w Large Room Infrared Space Cabinet Heater uses Mica and Quartz Infrared Heating.  Like we stated earlier, Quartz heating will work instantaneously and keep the desired level of moisture in the air.  And, when it comes to Mica heating, or micathermic heating, this type of heating is good for transferring heat and will heat the air while radiating infrared heat waves.

This 1500 Watt space heater features a thermostat which can be set from 59 degrees to 86 degrees Fahrenheit.  In addition, the fan can be set to economy, low or high.

And, you can control all of this via the unit or the remote control.  Furthermore, this unit features an LED display to observe the current temperature.

The Homegear Pro Large Room Infrared Space Cabinet Heater comes with overheat protection.  If things get too hot, the unit will automatically turn off to avoid overheating.  In addition, this space heater will stay cool to the touch which is a necessity for households with kids and pets.

Lastly, this space heater comes in your choice of colors and color combinations:  Black, Brown and Black/White.

Pros:

If you’re looking to heat up a very large space, this is a great option for you to consider.  And, most consumers seem to agree, this space heater works extraordinarily well.

Furthermore, for peace of mind, this space heater operates quietly.

Cons:

Some consumers say it’s an exaggeration that this space heater can heat an area of 1500 square feet.  However, this is all determined by ceiling height, window draft and insulation.  So, if you have lower ceilings, tight-fitting windows and have good insulation, you shouldn’t have an issue.

 

Cadet RCP402S Space Heater "The Hot One"

Cadet RCP402S Space Heater “The Hot One”

If you’re looking for a garage heater or a super-strength indoor heater, this is a great option to check out.  The Cadet RCP402S Space Heater “The Hot One” will efficiently heat a space of 400 to 600 square feet at a range of 45 to 80 degrees Fahrenheit.

This 4000 Watt, 20 Amp space heater features a built-in double pole thermostat.  According to Cadet, a double pole thermostat contains a safety feature that single pole thermostats do not.  When a double pole thermostat is turned off, it will not turn back on once the temperature dips.

The Cadet “The Hot One” has low and high settings for heat output.  It also has the option of a fan without heat.  So, if you’re interested in a fan and a space heater, this is an excellent choice.

Furthermore, this space heater comes with a 6 foot cord and a bracket for standing or an optional wall or ceiling mount.

The Cadet “The Hot One” features a high-temperature safety shutoff.  Additionally, it is recommended that there is at least 3 feet of clearance from the front of the heater, a 6 inch clearance from the back and the top of the heater and a 12 inch clearance from both sides.

Finally, this space heater comes in your choice of Camo or Red.  And, it also comes in your choice of 4000 Watt or 5000 Watt.

Pros:

Consumers rave about how quickly and efficiently this space heater heats up.

Additionally, this is a high quality product with consumers stating that it has lasted them decades.

Cons:

This space heater can be a little loud.  However, most consumers agree that it is not an annoying loud.

 

Heat Storm Portable 1500 Watt Infrared Heater

Heat Storm Portable 1500 Watt Infrared Heater

Our final pick for best space heater for large room is efficient enough to heat an area of up to 1,000 square feet.

The Heat Storm Portable 1500 Watt Infrared Heater uses HMS Technology which combines with the humidity in the room to produce heat, while keeping the moisture in the air.  And, according to Heat Storm, HMS Technology will provide faster heating while running more efficiently, which will save on heating costs.

In addition, for more efficiency, this 1500 Watt space heater has an Energy Efficient Mode which will reduce the wattage from 1500 to 750 Watts.

The Heat Storm Portable Infrared Heater has an LED display which displays the ambient temperature.  And, an adjustable thermostat with a maximum temperature setting of 99 degrees Fahrenheit.  Furthermore, this can all be controlled with a remote control.

Lastly, for safety purposed, this space heater comes with an overheat sensor which will sense when things get too hot.  Once things get too hot, this space heater will automatically shut down.

Pros:

Consumers state that this space heater can heat up a space in no time.

Furthermore, it’s efficient, quiet and look great.

Cons:

While many consumers say the Heat Storm Portable Infrared Heater is quiet, others say the fan is a little noisy.  And, more specifically, that it sounds like white noise.

 

best leather recliner

Best Leather Recliner Chair Reviews

The first order of business when searching for the best leather recliner is comfort.  And, along with comfort comes support.  The best leather recliner should be comfortable, yet offer a soft, yet stabilized platform to promote good posture.  

The next thing to look for with the best leather recliner is durability.  Because these chairs have hinges, joints and handles, it is imperative to have these functioning.  And, not only functioning, but functioning for years.  So, durability equals longevity and both of these together equal extended comfort.

So, after we narrowed down the top leather recliners on the market based on these factors, we further filtered them by style.  And, because everyone has a different aesthetic, we have an array of leather recliners that will work for just about every space.  And, in the end, we chose classic leather and modern recliners.  However, the good news about both of these styles is they will work with just about any decor.  You can mix classic with modern and modern with classic.  So, whatever leather recliner you choose to go with, it’s pretty much a guarantee that it’s going to look like you’re lounging in a magazine.

Finally, our final 5 best leather recliners all have rave reviews from consumers.  And, this is important when purchasing a leather recliner because it also gages the longevity and the durability of the recliner.

 

Best Leather Recliner

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Barcalounger Pedestal Cinna Ped Recliner
Barcalounger
Pedestal Cinna Ped Recliner
Leather
Foam and Down Feather Fill
Mortise and Tenon Joints
Ottoman
Cup Holder
Table Receptacle
Ottoman Storage
35.5" x 35.5" x 43"
Lane Stallion Leather Comfort King Wallsaver Recliner
Lane
Stallion Leather Comfort King Wallsaver Recliner
Leather
Vinyl
Steel Frame
40" x 44" x 48"
RECLINER GENIUS 100% Grain Italian Leather Recliner Lounge Chair with Ottoman
RECLINER GENIUS
100% Grain Italian Leather Recliner Lounge Chair with Ottoman
Leather
Wood
Wood Veneer
Aluminum Base
Ottoman
Color Options
87" x 87" x 82"
Flash Furniture Contemporary Brown Vintage Leather Recliner and Ottoman
Flash Furniture
Contemporary Brown Vintage Leather Recliner and Ottoman
LeatherSoft
Wood
Metal
Ottoman
360 Degree Swivel
Color Options
40" x 32.8" x 41"
Emorden Furniture Leather Lounge Chair & Ottoman
Emorden Furniture
Leather Lounge Chair & Ottoman
Leather
Aluminum Base
Laminated Veneer
Ottoman
360 Degree Swivel
Color Options
35.4" x 35" x 31.5"

 

Best Leather Recliner

 

Barcalounger Pedestal Cinna Ped Recliner

Barcalounger Pedestal Cinna Ped Recliner

Our first pick for best leather recliner is a traditional style recliner that has some aspects of mid century modern design.  And, since it contains the best of both worlds, this will look fabulous with any decor.

The Barcalounger Pedestal Cinna Ped Recliner is constructed with a hardwood and plywood frame and features mortise and tenon joints.  And, according to Popular Mechanics, mortise and tenon joints is considered one of the strongest woodworking joints.  These joints connect by attaching 2 pieces of wood at a 90 degree angle and glued to secure.

This leather recliner comes with 30 individual pocket coils in each seat cushion which is enclosed in high resilience foam.  And, perhaps the best part, this foam is topped with down feathers for the ultimate comfort.  In addition, this recliner features a sculpted foam back and a relaxing headrest.

The Barcalounger has additional features which makes this chair one of our favorite leather recliners on the market.  It has sliding arms which move backwards to reveal a cup holder and a receptacle for a table.  Furthermore, there is storage inside the ottoman which is perfect for books, magazines and remotes.

And, of course, let’s not forget about the leather.  The Barcalounger Cinna Ped Recliner comes with durable, yet soft, high-quality leather.  And, this particular recliner comes in a roasted chestnut color which can easily coordinated with just about any room in the house.

Lastly, this leather recliner comes from a company with quite a history and reputation.  Barcalounger has been around since the 1940’s and has consistently produced quality and luxury.

Pros:

For a high quality leather recliner, this price can’t be beat.  In addition, this recliner is extremely comfortable and the down feathers only add to the comfort.

And, because it is constructed with mortise and tenon joints, this recliner is extremely durable and will most likely last a lifetime.

Cons:

There isn’t many cons to this recliner.  It’s an amazing price for the amount of quality you get.  However, the one downfall is, it is so comfortable, you may never get anything done.

 

Lane Stallion Leather Comfort King Wallsaver Recliner

Lane Stallion Leather Comfort King Wallsaver Recliner

This next pick for best leather recliner has a traditional vintage design, so it can work with both classic and modern decor.  Furthermore, this is a leather recliner which is designed to support up to 500 pounds and it features a high seat back.  And, with both of these aspect combined, this recliner is a perfect fit for those who are big and tall.  Additionally, if you’re someone that likes to get lost while they’re lounging, this recliner will also be a good fit for you.

The Lane Stallion Leather Comfort King Wallsaver Recliner is constructed with a heavy-duty steel frame and filled with a polyurethane foam.  This foam has a density of 2.2 with 30 pounds of compression.  And, with these measurements, this will provide resilient support and pressure relief.

And, perhaps one of the best features of this leather recliner is it will extend to 79 inches when reclined, which is almost equivalent to a king-sized mattress.

Finally, the Lane Stallion Leather Comfort King Wallsaver Recliner features top grain leather with vinyl on the sides and on the back.  And, this vinyl will help prevent wear and tear and is easy to clean.

Pros:

If you’re really looking to sink into a recliner, this is probably your best option.  However, although sinking isn’t necessarily a term used for adequate back support, it is important to note that this recliner does offer a supportive base.  So, it’s the best of both worlds.

Furthermore, if you’re looking for a size solution, this leather recliner will hold a lot of weight and accommodate tall consumers.

Cons:

Some consumers state that the lumbar area could have more padding.

In addition, some consumers feel the chair is stiff which makes it difficult to recline.  And, the handle mechanism in relation to the chair is hard to reach, making it difficult to recline when in a seated position.

 

RECLINER GENIUS 100% Grain Italian Leather Recliner Lounge Chair with Ottoman

RECLINER GENIUS 100% Grain Italian Leather Recliner Lounge Chair with Ottoman

This leather recliner has a style reminiscent of the famous Herman Eames lounge chair at a fraction of the cost.  And, since this is a classic and iconic design, this recliner will work well with every type of decor.

The RECLINER GENIUS 100% Grain Italian Leather Recliner Lounge Chair with Ottoman is constructed with a wood veneer frame with a powder-coated, die-cast aluminum base.  And, it is covered with soft Italian leather upholstery.

This pick for best leather recliner offers ample back and neck support.  In addition, for extra comfort, it swivels and comes with an ottoman foot rest.

Lastly, this leather recliner comes in your choice of 3 colors.  Choose between Walnut Black, Brown or White.

Pros:

The RECLINER GENIUS Leather Recliner Lounge Chair is extremely comfortable and offers fabulous lumbar and neck support.

Furthermore, it is completely covered in Italian leather.  And, it doesn’t get much better than that.

Cons:

This leather chair reclines with body weight.  So, if you’re looking for a recliner that uses a lever, you may want to go with another option.

 

Flash Furniture Contemporary Brown Vintage Leather Recliner and Ottoman

Flash Furniture Contemporary Brown Vintage Leather Recliner and Ottoman

This pick for best leather recliner is a vintage-style recliner which will work well with both traditional and modern decor.

The Flash Furniture Contemporary Brown Vintage Leather Recliner and Ottoman is constructed with a wood and metal base and is covered in LeatherSoft upholstery.  LeatherSoft is a high-quality bonded type of leather made of leather and polyurethane.  And, it is softer and more comfortable than your typical bonded leather.  Furthermore, it keeps things cool and is resistant to fading and flaking.

This leather recliner features a mahogany wood base with 360 degree, ball-bearing swivel action.  In addition, for added comfort, this recliner comes with an integrated headrest and plush LeatherSoft upholstered arms.  To recline, simply adjust the side lever and use your weight to obtain your desired positioned.

Finally, this chair comes in your choice of Brown and Vintage Brown.

Pros:

The overall consensus of the Flash Furniture Contemporary Leather Recliner and Ottoman is it is a comfortable chair for the price.

Furthermore, it is easy to assemble and should take no more than 15 minutes to get setup and ready to lounge.

Cons:

There is no added lumbar support, however, most consumers feel there is enough support regardless.

And, the weight capacity of this chair is 250 pounds.  So, it may not work for everyone.

 

Emorden Furniture Leather Lounge Chair & Ottoman

Emorden Furniture Leather Lounge Chair & Ottoman

This last pick for best leather recliner is another replica of the famous Herman Eames chair.  However, although this is a replica, it is a high quality and well constructed chair.  And, since this is an iconic and classic style of chair, it will go with any decor.

The Emorden Furniture Leather Lounge Chair & Ottoman is constructed with 100% vintage leather which includes all the piping and all the buttons.  It is filled with high-elastic soft foam which offers the ultimate in comfort and in resilience.  Furthermore, it features a 7-ply laminated veneer which lines the bottom and the back of the chair, as well as the ottoman.  This laminated veneer will help to prevent warping and cracking.

This leather recliner has an aluminum base with a 360 degree swivel, while the manual tilt offers a 15 degree recline.  And, the head and back rest features rubber shock mounts for increased flexibility.

The Emorden Furniture Leather Lounge Chair & Ottoman is easy to clean.  It is recommended to use a soft-bristled vacuum and clean with leather-approved oil.  In addition, direct sunlight should be avoided.

Finally, this leather recliner comes in your choice of 4 leather and veneer colors.  Choose between Light Brown Aniline and Palisander Veneer, Red Aniline Leather and Palisander Laminated Veneer, Red Italian Leather and Natural Oak Laminated Veneer or Vintage Leather and Palisander Veneer.

Pros:

The Emorden Furniture Leather Lounge Chair & Ottoman is pretty much an exact replica of the famous Herman Eames chair.  And, if you have ever had the privilege of sitting in one of the chairs, it is one of the most comfortable chairs you will ever witness.

Furthermore, this leather recliner is made with high quality materials so longevity and durability are in your future.

Cons:

For some, a 15 degree angle is just not going to do it.  So, if you are looking to recline in a sleeping type of position, it’s best to go with a different chair.  And, quite possibly, a different design.

 

Best Western Saddle Pad

Best Western Saddle Pad for Comfort

When choosing the best western saddle pad, the first requirement, above all else, should be comfort.  And, this can get tricky because not all horses are created equal.

So, when choosing a saddle pad, you should start with the fit.  Take a good measurement of your horse, pay special attention to the contours of the spine and make sure there’s enough room under the saddle for a pad.  If there’s not enough room under the saddle, you may want to look into purchasing a new saddle.

And, we can’t stress enough how crucial it is to get the proper fit.  Not only will a proper fit help improve the performance of your horse, it will help prevent back issues and soreness that often develops when there’s too much compression on your horse.  A proper fitting pad will also prevent slipping which can cause injury to your horse.

Furthermore, if your horse has a high wither, underdeveloped shoulders or loss of muscle mass due to aging or other factors, you should look into a saddle pad with extra reinforcement and fill to help stabilize the declining area.  And, we have a couple of picks on our list that address these particular issues.

The next aspect to look at when choosing the best western saddle pad is material.  It is best to go with a material that is moisture-wicking and will help to keep the horse from overheating.  Wool is most likely your best option since it naturally helps to keep moisture at bay.  There are also other breathable fabrics and designs that will allow for a consistent airflow and which will work just as well.

Once you have an idea on what fit will work for your horse, you’re ready to go western saddle pad shopping.  And, we found the top 5 best western saddle pads.  These saddle pads are all made with quality materials and have some of the highest ratings on the market.  The only aspects you may find where one works better than the other is size and fit.  And, these saddle pads all have different fits which may be the deciding factor in which western saddle pad you choose.

But, whatever the case may be, these saddle pads have been tried, tested and highly-raved about by riders near and far.

 

Best Western Saddle Pad

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Southwestern Equine Silverado 1" Grey Contoured Saddle Pad
Southwestern Equine
Silverado 1" Grey Contoured Saddle Pad
100% Wool
Leather Trim
Contoured
32" x 32"
Weaver Leather All Purpose Contoured Saddle Pad
Weaver Leather
All Purpose Contoured Saddle Pad
Herculon Fabric
Leather Trim
Tacky-Tack Non-Slip Bottom
Contoured
Color Options
32" x 32"
Classic Equine BioFit Correction Saddle Pad
Classic Equine
BioFit Correction Saddle Pad
Wool Blend
Leather Trim
High-Withered Design
Contoured
30" x 30"
31" x 32"
Thinline Western Endurance Saddle Pad
Thinline
Western Endurance Saddle Pad
Cotton Quilted
Felt Center
Contoured
27" x 23"
Diamond Wool Contour Felt Ranch Pad
Diamond Wool
Contour Felt Ranch Pad
Wool Felt
Leather Trim
Spine Reinforcement
Contoured
32" x 32"

 

Best Western Saddle Pad

Southwestern Equine Silverado 1" Grey Contoured Saddle Pad

Southwestern Equine Silverado 1″ Grey Contoured Saddle Pad

This first pick for best western saddle pad measures 32 inches by 32 inches.  And, it is 1 inch thick which makes it one of the thickest saddle pads on our list.  So, make sure you take your measurements to ensure you have plenty of room under the saddle.

The Southwestern Equine Silverado Contoured Saddle Pad is made of 100% wool and leather trim.  And, because this saddle pad is made with wool, it will help to keep your horse cool and dry.  Furthermore, wool will help with shock absorption to keep your horse comfortable.

This saddle pad is designed to fit the contours of the horses spine.  So, if your horse has a more prominent dip in its back, this saddle pad is a great option for you – and your horse, of course.

The Southwestern Equine Silverado Contoured Saddle Pad is easy to clean.  Simply hose it off or rinse it under cold water.  You can also use a wet sponge to eliminate hair and sweat. After you’re done cleaning, hang dry.

Pros:

This western saddle pad is made with high quality materials and is ultra durable.  So, you can expect this saddle pad to last a long time.

Furthermore, because this saddle pad is contoured, it’s going to take a lot of weight and pressure off of your horse.  And, we all know if the horse is happy, so are you.

Lastly, the Southwestern Equine Silverado Contoured Saddle Pad features a large cut out for the withers.  Therefore, this saddle pad can keep just about any size of horse comfortable.

Cons:

Because this western saddle pad is an inch thick, you’re going to need plenty of room under the saddle.  So, depending on your measurements, you may have to find a saddle pad that isn’t as thick or buy a new saddle.

Weaver Leather All Purpose Contoured Saddle Pad

Weaver Leather All Purpose Contoured Saddle Pad

This next pick for best western saddle pad measures 32 inches by 32 inches and features a 1/2 inch felt insert.  So, just make sure there’s a little room underneath the saddle for your horse’s comfort.

The Weaver Leather All Purpose Contoured Saddle Pad is made with Herculon fabric.  Herculon is a synthetic fabric known for its durability and its resistance to mildew.  In addition, this fabric is quick drying which makes it a great material to keep your horse cool and sweat-free.  And, this Herculon fabric features a waffle pattern to provide optimal ventilation.

This saddle pad comes lined with top grain leather and a tacky-tack bottom.  This tacky-tack bottom will help keep the pad secure and prevent it from sliding around – something that can often cause sores on the horse.  Furthermore, this tacky-tack bottom is breathable which will keep your horse from overheating.

The Weaver Leather All Purpose Contoured Saddle Pad is designed to conform to the shape of your horse’s spine.  So, this will help aid in comfort and it will help prevent injuries.

And, because this saddle pad is made with Herculon fabric, it is easy to clean.  You can simply hose it off or run it under warm water.  Or, you can use a water-based cleaner for a deeper clean.

Finally, the Weaver Leather All Purpose Contoured Saddle Pad comes in your choice of colors, color combinations and/or designs.  Choose between Black, Blue Navajo, Red Navajo, Red/Tan, Tan/Brown, Tan/Red Pattern, and Turquoise/Coral.

Pros:

Because this saddle pad has a tacky-tack bottom, this will help prevent saddle roll.

In addition, consumers claim this saddle pad is easier to break in compared to wool and it conforms very well to the shape of the horse.

Cons:

This western saddle pad is made with synthetic and polyester fabric.  And, although it keeps the horse cool and dry, some consumers prefer the natural element of wool.

Classic Equine BioFit Correction Saddle Pad

Classic Equine BioFit Correction Saddle Pad

This pick for best western saddle pad comes in your choice of 2 sizes.  Choose between 31 inches by 32 inches or 30 inches by 30 inches.  In addition, this pad is an inch thick, however, it is another 1/2 inch thicker in the shoulder area.

The Classic Equine BioFit Correction Saddle Pad will work for all horses.  But, it is specifically designed for horses that have a high wither, underdeveloped shoulders or loss of muscle mass.

This saddle pad offers a contoured design, a strategic buildup to support the shoulders and to fill in any gaps and a wool felt center which will help absorb shock.  And, this contoured design will enhance saddle fit and correspond to the shape of your horse’s back.

The Classic Equine BioFit Correction Saddle Pad is made of a wool blend to help you keep your horse cool and dry.  Furthermore, this saddle pad features leather reinforcement trim in the high wear areas.

Pros:

This saddle pad is a God-send for horses with high withers and offers unbelievable support.  So, not only are a lot of owners happy, a lot of horses are, too.

In addition, many consumers rave about how well this saddle pad fits.

Cons:

A couple of consumers have stated this saddle pad didn’t fit their horse very well, however, they are in the vast minority.  So, not every saddle pad is going to be a one-size-fits-all scenario.

Thinline Western Endurance Saddle Pad

Thinline Western Endurance Saddle Pad

This saddle pad measures 27 inches by 23 inches and has a thickness ranging from 3/4 of an inch to 1 inch.  And, as claimed by the company, the Thinline Western Endurance Saddle Pad is the only pad on the market that is endorsed by veterinarians, spinal surgeons and master saddlers.

So, this saddle pad is made for comfort, and specifically for comfort while endurance and trail riding.  In addition, this saddle pad helps absorb an enormous amount of shock and features extra girth protection for your horse’s back.

The Thinline Western Endurance Saddle Pad is designed to fit drop and center-fire rigged saddles.  However, this works for numerous other saddles including Australian saddles, English saddles, Tucker saddles, Western saddles and more.

Lastly, this saddle pad is made of cotton quilt and features a hollow fill with a felt center.  And, all of these together makes this saddle pad breathable which allows your horse to keep cool during those long rides.

Pros:

The Thinline Western Endurance Saddle Pad is extremely comfortable and offers a secure grip to prevent saddle roll.

In addition, this saddle pad is perfect for endurance and trail riding, which often takes a toll on the horse.

Cons:

Many consumers prefer wool for their saddle pads.  However, this is designed in a way that will allow your horse a lot of breathing room.

Diamond Wool Contour Felt Ranch Pad

Diamond Wool Contour Felt Ranch Pad

Our final pick for best western saddle pad measures 32 inches by 32 inches.  And, it has a thickness of 1 inch, which makes this one of the thickest saddle pads on our list.  So, be sure to take measurements to ensure there is enough room underneath your saddle.

The Diamond Wool Contour Felt Ranch Pad is made of wool felt with leather reinforcement.  And, this wool felt will help keep your horse cool, dry and comfortable, while the leather reinforcement will increase the longevity of the pad since it is placed in a high wear area.

This saddle pad features a reinforced leather spine and a wither relief notch to help take the pressure off the shoulders.  Additionally, this cutout will work especially well with horses who have high withers.

Lastly, the Diamond Wool Contour Felt Ranch Pad is easy to clean.  Just spray or rinse off with cool water and let hang to dry.

Pros:

Most consumers state this saddle pad has the right amount of thickness, not too thick and not too thin.

Furthermore, this saddle pad stays in place with few reports of saddle roll.

Also, the Diamond Wool Contour Felt Ranch Pad is made of high quality materials.

Cons:

A few consumers complained that this saddle pad is thin.  However, the majority of consumers lean towards this pad being thick or just right.